52006PC0829

[pic] | COMMISSION OF THE EUROPEAN COMMUNITIES |

Brussels, 18.12.2006

COM(2006) 829 final

2006/0266 (ACC)

Proposal for a

COUNCIL REGULATION

setting up a Community regime for the control of exports of dual-use items and technology

(presented by the Commission)[COM(2006) 828 final][SEC(2006) 1696]

EXPLANATORY MEMORANDUM

1) CONTEXT OF THE PROPOSAL

Grounds for and objectives of the proposal

The proposal for the amendment and recast of Council Regulation N° (EC) 1334/2000 on the control of exports of dual-use items and technology has the objectives of strengthening and improving the EU dual-use export control regime. This will enable the EU to meet standards set by the UN Security Council Resolution 1540 and to implement most of the recommendations noted by the General Affairs Council following the "peer reviews" of the implementation of the Regulation by the Member States in 2004 in conformity with the Thessaloniki Action Plan endorsed by the Heads of States and governments in June 2003. It also aims at introducing more clarity and at reducing regulatory burdens in the implementation of controls by EU exporters.

General context

The EC Regulation on export controls of dual-use items and technologies contributes to the Member States' implementation of their commitments taken in international export control regimes or as State parties to the non-proliferation treaties and arrangements. The reason is that dual-use items are civil items that can be used for military purposes and, in some cases, for the production or as the means of delivery of weapons of mass destruction (nuclear, biological, chemical or missiles).

Since 11 September 2001, the mandates of international export control regimes, which were initially created by like-minded States to prevent the illicit acquisition by States of weapons of mass destruction or of their means of delivery, have been extended to the prevention of the acquisition by non-State actors of dual-use items in order to prevent attacks against civilians and states. Consequently, the European Council adopted in June 2003 the Thessaloniki Action Plan, which contained several provisions recommending the strengthening of the EU export control regime and an enhanced and more visible role for the EU in international export control regimes. It included considerations on an enhanced role for the Commission in those fora and also recommended an EU strategy to support the entry of new EU Member States in those regimes.

Following this Action Plan, several proposals were made to the Council in the autumn of 2003. They addressed the role of the Commission in the international regimes and a method to enhance EU coordination in those fora, proposing a strategy for the membership of new EU Member States. A "peer review" of Member States' implementation of the Regulation was coordinated by the Commission and implemented by the Member States, with the support of a small task force comprising the Commission, the Council Secretariat and Finland. The Task Force recommended actions which were noted by the General Affairs and External Relations Council (GAERC) in December 2004. Those recommendations stressed, among other priorities, the need for a more pro-active approach of the EU against the acquisition by State and non State actors of dual-use items focussing on risks.

Existing provisions in the area of the proposal

The existing Regulation (EC) N° 1334/2000 was adopted following two decisions of the European Court of Justice in 1995 which affirmed the exclusive competences of the European Community in the area of external trade in dual-use items. The current proposal aims at amending that Regulation.

Consistency with the other policies and objectives of the Union

The proposal to amend the Regulation will enable the EU to implement relevant aspects of the EU Strategy against the proliferation of Weapons of Mass Destruction and to contribute to other priorities of the EU such as the security of EU citizens, the prevention of biological, chemical or nuclear terrorist attacks, the support of EU defence-related industries in line with the Commission's communication on Defence made in 2003 and to EU and international security.

2) CONSULTATION OF INTERESTED PARTIES AND IMPACT ASSESSMENT

Consultation of interested parties

Consultation methods, main sectors targeted and general profile of respondents

The Commission launched a study via a consultancy firm to assess the views of exporters and other stakeholders in order to assess the impact of options to amend the Regulation.

In order to define a representative sample of stakeholders, a questionnaire was sent to about 450 potential dual-use exporters based in the EU including a large number of EU federations of industry. The consultation was also extended to any potential interested exporter as it was advertised on the DG TRADE website from 5 October 2005. The final sample of exporters who answered the questionnaire was representative of the distribution of suppliers and exporters of the 10 categories of dual-use items listed in Annex I of the Regulation. Based on the answers received, specific sub-samples of representative exporters were selected to be consulted on the various options to reform the EC Regulation. Because the options referred also to transit, transhipment and brokering controls, transporters and traders were also consulted.

Summary of responses and how they have been taken into account

The exporters were consulted on the final report of the impact assessment study and on the Commission services' assessment of the findings of the study. Opinions from member States and other stakeholders on the results of the study and the intended follow-up by the Commission services were collected from January until early July 2006 and are well reflected by this proposal.

Collection and use of expertise

Scientific/expertise domains concerned

The necessary expertise on dual-use was assured all along the processes of consulting and assessing the views of stakeholders. Expertise on dual-use items and on export control and security issues was a major criterion of selection in the call for tender.

Methodology used

The initial questionnaire aiming at identifying a representative sample of exporters has been prepared by DG TRADE and was included in the terms of reference of the call for tender. It was improved after consultation with a number of EU federations of industry. During the study, additional questionnaires on options tested were prepared by the consultancy firm and subject to Commission's endorsement before they were sent out to stakeholders (Member States' administrations and exporters).

Main organisations/experts consulted

EU federations of industry and individual exporters, Member States national competent authorities in particular national authorities competent to grant export authorisations and custom authorities.

Summary of advice received and used

The impact assessment study revealed a number of weaknesses in the options that DG TRADE had put for testing with the consensus of the different associated DGs. In some cases, DG TRADE knew that the options were weak but considered nevertheless that they had to be tested to confirm initial opinions shared with the Member States.

Some comments and suggestions made by industry could not be retained for a variety of reasons, and in particular as they would go beyond what is achievable in the context of the current revision of the Regulation. These include for example:

- The exemption of a multinational company from export controls of intangible transfers between its EU base and its foreign subsidiaries

- The change of the current system based on ex ante and case by case export control decisions granted to individual exporters for most of the Annex I items to third countries to a system of certified exporters through regular audits of their internal compliance programmes and intensive government to industry dialogue.

- The introduction of a pre-established maximum deadline for the process by national authorities of export authorisations applications.

- Introduction of an exemption for all small samples and small value shipments from export authorisations. However, the Commission will examine in 2007 the possibility to propose new Community export authorisations to facilitate certain exports to certain destinations based on industry's relevant input, and this could include the introduction of a de minimis rule in certain instances.

- The elimination or a radical simplification of the controls on non-listed items that Member States are enabled to conduct in addition to the items listed in the Regulation.

However, the Commission is sensitive to the concerns of industry, and it will continue its work in order to provide the least possible burdensome regulatory framework in order to enhance its international competitive position. For this reason, a review clause has been added to the proposal for amendment to the Regulation.

Means used to make the expert advice publicly available

The results of the study were made available on 23 February 2006 at the following URL address: http://ec.europa.eu/comm/trade/issues/sectoral/industry/dualuse/pr230206_en.htm

Impact assessment

As to the decision to clarify the definition of intangible transfers of technology, it is not clear if the current Article 2biii) covers the transmission of controlled dual-use technology via the access to intranet by third parties located outside the EU. This can have an impact on industry as currently there is no EU-wide definition and no harmonisation of the enforcement of controls on intangible technology. However such impact could be reduced by the adoption of EU guidelines for the implementation of controls of intangible transfers which would include a practical understanding of the scope of technologies in the public domain.

Different options to control transit and transhipment have been considered. Given the high volume of trade passing through the EU, the option to submit all transit or transhipment of dual-use items to systematic pre-authorisation requirements was excluded as impracticable and excessively burdensome. The option kept is to allow all Member States' competent national authorities to take possession of a dual-use item in transit or transhipped when there are reasonable indications (mainly from intelligence sources) that the item is or may be intended for illicit proliferation in a third country. This option already exists in some Member States as it enables them to implement the Proliferation Security Initiative. The impact of this option on those few Member States who used to impose systematic prior authorisation on transit of dual-use items should be minimum as the volume of such authorisations that they reported is below 10 per year.

Different options to sanction illicit brokering of dual-use items have been studied based on the definition that brokering is a service facilitating a transaction covering dual use items . They have taken into account that brokering controls would cover goods located outside the EU and hence submitted to third country's legislation. The study has revealed the extreme difficulty to enforce such controls. It was concluded that controls should only cover the two following cases:

- when the broker is aware of the illicit WMD end uses of the goods in third countries

- when the Member State where the broker is located has informed him of such risks .

Those two cases will trigger the obligation for the broker /supplier of intermediation services to apply for an authorisation if he aims at doing the transaction.

The explicit reference to the possibility for Member States to introduce electronic management of export applications and authorisations in recasted Article 10.4 will facilitate the work of national administrations and exporters.

Different options have been tested to harmonise the conditions of use of the different types of export authorisations that are available in conformity with the Regulation so as to create a level playing field and improve EU security.

Regarding the Community General Export Authorisation (CGEA) , the impact assessment study has led the Commission to opt for clarifying the meaning of "registration" and "reporting" which are currently defined in Annex II of the Regulation, and for limiting the conditions under which the CGEA can be denied (Recasted Article 6.1.a)). This lead to greater convergence of practices across the EU.

Regarding the harmonisation of the conditions of use of the National General Export Authorisations (NGEA), the impact assessment study has revealed that some Member States had no system of registration and therefore, by lacking information on users, could not fully ensure the enforcement of the Regulation. The option to amend the Regulation aims at filling this gap. The study has also highlighted that the exporters who could benefit from National General Export authorisations at national level[1] do enjoy a comparative advantage compared to other exporters. The Commission's proposal to create new Community General Export Authorisations has been widely supported by industry and favoured by Member States. The Commission will try to make those proposals in 2007 based on information to be supplied by exporters and discussions with Member States.

Regarding the option to harmonise the Member States' practices of granting global export authorisations by obliging the exporter to carry out an internal compliance programme (ICP ), the study has revealed that when implemented, ICPs are considered as positive factors. In fact, those ICPs significantly enhance the capacity of the exporters to comply with export control provisions. The Commission proposal is to encourage Member States to grant global export authorisations to companies having ICPs in place.

Options to increase coordination and the sharing of sensitive information among Member States national authorities on the national implementation of the "end use control" have been tested. The results have led the Commission to propose a middle position between the option tested during the impact assessment study (a systematic sharing of information between national customs authorities of all Member States' valid national requests) and the current situation, which is unsatisfactory from a trade and security point of view. The proposal aims at obliging Member States to share with other Member States and the Commission the general requirements that they impose on national exporters regarding the obligation of an export authorisation for non-listed items aimed at being exported to certain end users. In due course this should lead to greater convergence of national policies, and better information of and transparency for the exporting industry.

Amendments have been made to Article 7.2, Article 9 and Article 15 of the Regulation in order to:

- Align the EU legal framework on the informal but politically binding rules set in international export control regimes which regularly review the validity of denials;

- Ensure wider consultations between Member States in case of divergences of appreciation on some export application cases and to create a level playing-field within the EU;

- Enable the Commission to develop, in the future, an electronic secure system to share sensitive and possibly classified EU information.

The impact of those above mentioned proposals is expected to be positive both on trade and security issues.

The proposed recasted Article 11 establishes that amendments to the list of controlled items will be carried out using a comitology procedure, established in recasted Article 19 instead of requiring a formal Council Regulation. It will result in speedier update of the list of controlled items in accordance with the decisions adopted in the export control regimes.

The obligations regarding record keeping under Article 16 have been amended to take due account of demands from industry, supported by work carried out with Member States' experts, to improve the current situation by introducing proportionate and enforceable requirements depending on the transfers at stake.

The recast Article 21 provides for the imposition of criminal sanctions for at least serious infringements of the Regulation and implementing provisions will provide a deterrent for the violation of export controls regulations.

The impact of the creation of a recast Article 22 on international cooperation will:

- contribute to solving current situations such as those, among others, where exporters in third countries and in the EU are obliged to apply controls to transfers of dual-use items in the single market (concretely when third countries' laws impose re-export rules within the single market of dual-use items imported)

- allow for mutual recognition of export authorisations which has the potential to greatly facilitate joint industrial projects or research projects in particular with third countries members of international export control regimes or listed in the current CGEA.

- allow for the adoption of EU-wide specific export control rules that would be applicable to the technologies developed in the EU in the context of Community-financed international programmes involving third countries and would also cover access through intangible means to those technologies.

The impact of the replacement of the existing prior authorisation for transfers between Member States of items in current Annex IV (recast Article 25) by pre-notifications will facilitate transfers within the internal market without having a negative impact on security as Members States will retain the possibility of blocking such transfers for justified reasons.

Finally, a number of proposals are made in order to adopt in specific areas best practices and administrative measures whose impact has not been assessed but whose political justification can be found in developments in international export control regimes and in the recommendations adopted by the Council on the follow up to the "peer reviews".

3) Legal elements of the proposal

Summary of the proposed action

This proposal is a recasting of Council Regulation (EC) N°1334/2000 in line with the Interinstitutional Agreement on the recasting technique for legal acts. It incorporates in a single text both the substantive amendments it makes to Council Regulation (EC) N°1334/2000 and the unchanged provisions thereof. The proposal will replace and repeal this Regulation . This will help make Community legislation more accessible and transparent.

Among the proposed amendments to the Regulation, there are in particular five items where the changes proposed go beyond a technical revision and update of Regulation (EC) N°1334/2000. These are the following:

- a proposal for the introduction of a "comitology" procedure for the amendment of the annexes of the Regulation (lists controlled items and forms) and for the adoption of implementing measures;

- a replacement of the authorisation requirement for the transfer of items within the internal market which are listed in recasted Annex V with a "pre-notification" procedure destined to facilitate trade within the EU internal market without compromising security interests;

- the introduction of a provision according to which Member States must apply criminal sanctions at least for violations of the Regulation; it responds to the call in the Thessaloniki Action Plan for a common EU approach regarding the criminalisation of illegal dual use exports, and to the call by UNSC Resolution 1540 for the introduction of appropriate civil or criminal penalties for violations of such export control regulations. The current sanction regimes of most Member States include both administrative and criminal penalties. The new provision will rule out through a minimum harmonization on EU level that, at least for serious infringements, offenders can profit from purely administrative sanctions in some Member States;

- a recital clarifies that the Regulation provides for a comprehensive legal framework for the export of dual use items, technology and related services. In this context, legal security is essential for those exports of dual use items, technology or services subject to this Regulation and performed in conformity with its provisions and with those adopted for its implementation in compliance with this Regulation. The legal security is particularly important in respect to third countries' legislation that might consider the same exports as criminal offences;

- the introduction of an article providing for the conduct of negotiations with third countries destined to deal with issues such as re-export requirements, in particular when they aim at preventing the full use of the single market by the EU importers of those dual-use technologies of non EU origin and to adopt specific project-based export control rules when EC financed projects involved third countries;

The other main proposals for the recast and amendment of Regulation (EC) N°1334/2000 are the following:

- the introduction of controls on transit ;

- the introduction of controls of brokering and the sanctioning of illicit brokering of dual-use items linked to a weapons of mass destruction programme;

- the clarification and update of controls of intangible transfers of technology including the provision of technical assistance;

- the introduction of some limited adjustments regarding the application of national controls on items non-listed in the Regulation to improve their efficiency and transparency

- the harmonisation of the conditions of use of general authorisations

- the inclusion of a criterion to enhance the granting of global licences to exporters implementing internal compliance programmes

- the introduction of possibilities for wider consultation among concerned Member States prior to granting authorisations essentially similar to denied transactions

- the improvement of the exchange of denials and other sensitive information and the possible introduction in the future of an encrypted electronic system for exchanging information on denials as well as other classified information

- the obligation of registration of exporters and of suppliers of the most sensitive items within the Community to competent national authorities

- provision for the establishment by national authorities of indicative deadlines for the processing of applications for export authorisations, and of deadlines for the treatment of requests for information from licensing authorities concerning the application of national controls.

Some measures, such as adaptation of the model form in Annex III to comply with the United Nations Layout Key for trade documents, which has provided Governments, organisations and the business community with a basis for a standard and aligned design of documents used in trade and transport in order to facilitate the use of the licence, have been left for further regulatory action under the comitology procedure.

Legal basis

Article 133 of the EC Treaty.

Subsidiarity principle

The proposal falls under the exclusive competence of the Community. The subsidiarity principle therefore does not apply.

Proportionality principle

The proposal complies with the proportionality principle for the following reasons:

Only the amendments to the Regulation which are necessary and whose justification has been confirmed have been proposed. Other issues will be dealt with and are addressed through administrative action or best practices or actions at national level.

As stated above, the financial and administrative burden is reduced to the minimum as the new obligations have been limited to what can be reasonably enforced and some of the new measures will facilitate the management of export controls.

Choice of instruments

Proposed instrument: Regulation.

Other means would not be adequate, first because an amendment to the existing legal instrument (Council Regulation) can only be done through another Regulation. Secondly, the decisions of the European Court of Justice have made it clear that export controls of dual-use items are an exclusive Community competence. Other measures that are of a non-legal nature and which have met the criteria that they can bring an added value to the EU have been proposed in the Communication.

4) Budgetary implications

In the short term the proposals will not have significant financial consequences for the EU. The possible development and establishment of an EU secure system for sharing denials and other sensitive information would have a moderate financial cost, although a decision on whether or not such a system should be developed will be taken in agreement with Member States not before early 2007. An assessment of the costs of establishing such a system is provided in the annex..

5) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Simplification

The proposal provides for simplification of legislation, and of the administrative procedures for public authorities (Community or national), and for private entities.

The use of the recasting technique allows the Community to combine in a single text both the substantive amendments proposed to the Council Regulation and the unchanged provisions thereof. Moreover, the original text of the Regulation has been improved and clarified in the interests of better regulation.

A number of proposals will simplify the work for the Community administrations (a comitology procedure for changes to the annexes and for the adoption of guidelines) and for private entities (adoption of best practices for the implementation of the Regulation, harmonisation of the conditions of use of export authorisations and their format, e-systems for the management of licence applications).

Repeal of existing legislation

The adoption of the proposal will lead to the repeal of existing legislation .

Recasting

The proposal involves recasting.

Annex

Costs of the possible establishment of a secure system for the exchange of information mentioned in the amended Article 15.4 of the proposal of Regulation

Introduction

The proposed new paragraph 4 of Article 15 of the recasted Regulation establishes the possibility of setting up a secure system for the exchange of information among Member States and as appropriate also the Commission. Such a system would be destined in particular to have access on-line to a database containing the denials of export authorisations (information currently shared via a CD-Rom), although other possible uses to facilitate the exchange of information provided for in the Regulation might also be considered.

The proposal at this stage only intends to provide a legal basis in case such a decision is taken; it does not prejudge any such future decision, which would have to be taken only after consideration of the parameters required for such a system and in agreement with the Member States.

Budget line concerned

20.02.01, within the operational part of the budget, and within the current amounts available.

Estimated costs

In case in the future a decision to go ahead with such a system was taken, the budget could be split into five parts detailed in the table below:

2007 | 2008 | 2009 | 2010 | Total |

Development | 200.000 | 50.000 | 0 | 0 | 250.000 |

Maintenance | 10.000 | 20.000 | 20.000 | 50.000 |

Infrastructure | 30.000 | 10.000 | 40.000 |

Network | 25.000 | 15.000 | 15.000 | 55.000 |

Support infra | 30.000 | 20.000 | 20.000 | 70.000 |

Support user | 40.000 | 30.000 | 30.000 | 100.000 |

Total | 200.000 | 185.000 | 85.000 | 95.000 | 565.000 |

The development would consist in refurbishing the current database using a server technology and including additional functions and possibilities. However, a significant part of the current database (e.g. the format) would be reused.

As regards the network costs, in principle they should be very limited as the current "Testa secure" would be used. Such costs do not include the connexion costs incurred by Member States. Should a separate ad-hoc network be considered, it would require a specific budget, but this is not the option under consideration.

The user support budget would consist of setting up a helpdesk, which could be shared with other existing projects.

1334/2000

2006/0266 (ACC)

Proposal for a

COUNCIL REGULATION

setting up a Community regime for the control of exports of dual-use items and technology

THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,

Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 133 thereof,

Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,

Whereas:

ò new

1. Council Regulation (EC) No 1334/2000 of 22 June 2000 setting up a Community regime for the control of exports of dual-use items and technology[2] has been amended substantially, and it should be recast in the interests of clarity.

1334/2000 recital 1 (adapted)

(2) Dual-use items (including software and technology) should be subject to effective control when they are exported from the European Community.

1334/2000 recital 2

(3) An effective common system of export controls on dual-use items is necessary to ensure that the international commitments and responsiabilities of the Member States, especially regarding non-proliferation, and of the European Union, are complied with.

1334/2000 recital 3

(4) The existence of a common control system and harmonised policies for enforcement and monitoring in all Member States is a prerequisite for establishing the free movement of dual-use items inside the Community.

1334/2000 recital 4 (adapted)

(4) The current regime of export controls on dual-use items established by Regulation (EC) No 3381/94[3], and Decision 94/942/CFSP[4], needs to be further harmonised in order to cntinue to guarantee the effective application of controls.

1334/2000 recital 6

ð new

(5) The responsibility for deciding on applications for ð individual, global or general national ï export authorisations ð or for authorisations for the provision of intermediary services or for the transfer supervision of Annex V dual-use items within the single market ï lies with national authorities. National provisions and decisions affecting exports of dual-use items must be taken in the framework of the common commercial policy, and in particular Council Regulation (EEC) N° 2603/69 of 20 December 1969 establishing common rules for exports[5].

1334/2000 recital 7 (adapted)

ð new

(6) Decisions to update the common lists of dual-use items subject to export controls must be in full conformity with the obligations and commitments that each Member State has ð States have ï accepted as a member ð members ï of the relevant international non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, or by ratification of relevant international treaties.

1334/2000 recital 5 (adapted)

ð new

(7) Common lists of dual-use items, destinations and guidelines are essential elements for an effective EU export control regime system; such lists have been established by Decision 94/942/CFSP and subsequent amendments and should be incorporated into this Regulation.ð and it is appropriate that the decisions agreed by Member States in international export control regimes are quickly reflected into amendments to the Annex I of the Regulation listing the items under control in the EU, and that procedures are established for the adoption of measures by the Commission for the implementation of the Regulation in consultation with a Committee composed of Member States' representatives. ï

1334/2000 recital 8

(8) Transmission of software and technology by means of electronic media, fax or telephone to destinations outside the Community should also be controlled.

1334/2000 recital 9

(9) Particular attention needs to be paid to issues of reexport and end-use.

1334/2000 recital 10

(10) On 22 September 1998 representatives of the Member States and the European Commission signed Protocols additional to the respective safeguards agreements between the Member States, the European Atomic Energy Community and the International Atomic Energy Agency, which, among other measures, oblige the Member States to provide information on transfers of specified equipment and non-nuclear material.

1334/2000 recital 11

(11) The Community has adopted a body of customs rules, contained in Council Regulation (EEC) No 2913/92 of 12 October 1992 establishing the Community Customs Code[6] and Commission Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93[7] implementing Regulation (EEC) No 2913/92 which lay down, among other things, provisions relating to the export and reexport of goods. Nothing in this Regulation constrains any powers under and pursuant to the Community Customs Code and its implementing provisions.

1334/2000 recital 12

ð new

(12) Pursuant to and within the limits of Article 30 of the Treaty and pending a greater degree of harmonisation, Member States will retain the right to carry out controls on transfers of certain dual-use items within the European Community in order to safeguard public policy or public security. ð These intra-community controls of items listed in Annex V will consist in pre-notifications of shipments made within the EU in order to ensure both greater consistency with the provisions of the Euratom Treaty and to ease intra-Community dual-use trade. Measures adopted by Member States to implement these new provisions shall not involve the application of internal frontier controls within the Community, but solely provisions aimed for instance at ensuring traceability of items circulating in the single market and applied as part of control procedures applied in a non-discriminatory fashion throughout the territory of the Community. ï Where these controls are linked to the effectiveness of controls on exports from the Community, they will be periodically reviewed by the Council.

1334/2000 recital 13

(13) In order to ensure that this Regulation is properly applied, each Member State should take measures giving the competent authorities appropriate powers.

ò new

(14) The UN Security Council Resolution 1540, adopted 28/04/2004, calls in particular for adequate prevention of illicit export, re-export, transit, transhipment and brokering of dual-use items. Accordingly, a possibility for Member States authorities to intercept and take possession of a dual-use item in transit when it may or is intended for proliferation of weapons of mass destruction or of their means of delivery in a third country should be explicitly established, and controls should be introduced on provision of intermediation services when the intermediary has been informed by competent national authorities or is aware that it might lead to production or delivery of illegal weapons of mass destruction in a third country.

(15) It is desirable to achieve a uniform and consistent application of controls throughout the EU in order to avoid undermining EU and international security and unfair competition among EU exporters. With this objective, it is decided, in line with the recommendations of the Thessaloniki Action Plan adopted by Heads of States and Governments in June 2003 and complemented by the WMD strategy:

- to enlarge the circumstances when the Member States can enter into consultation with other Member States prior to granting an export authorisation which could, for example, threaten another Member State's essential security interests

- to ensure greater convergence of the conditions of implementation of the national controls on dual-use items not listed by the Regulation

- to complement the definition of intangible transfers of technology to include making available controlled technology to persons located outside the EU and including technical assistance services provided via electronic means; and to adjust, by amendments to Article16, the record keeping requirements for intangible transfers of technology to the actual possibilities of exporters

- to harmonise the conditions of use of the different types of authorisations that can be granted under the Regulation

- to further align the modalities of exchange of sensitive information among Member States with some of the existing practices of the international export control regimes, in particular by introducing in the Regulation the concept of denials in effect or of valid denials, and to provide for the possibility of establishing a secure electronic system for sharing information among the Member States.

(16) As EU exporters operating in different countries may be subject to different export control standards, it is provided that the Commission can negotiate with third countries so as to obtain in particular the recognition of the EU regime and its specificities such as the single market for dual-use items and the common external trade policy which applies to dual-use items.

1334/2000 recital 14 (adapted)

ð new

(17) Each Member State should determine the ð effective, proportionate and dissuasive ï penalties applicable in the event of breach of the provisions of this Regulation.

ò new

(18) In order to strengthen the EU regime on the export of dual-use items and related services and pursuant to UN Security Council Resolution 1540, it is necessary to provide for the imposition of criminal penalties in particular for serious infringements of the Regulation and of the regulations adopted by Member States for its implementation. In addition, the European Council on 17/18 June 2004 adopted a declaration on criminal sanctions, recalling the commitment expressed by Member States in the European Strategy against the proliferation of WMD adopted on 12 December 2003, to adopt common policies related to criminal sanctions for illegal export, brokering and smuggling of WMD-related material.

(19) The Regulation provides for a comprehensive framework regulating the export of dual-use items, technology or services from the European Union. In this regard, legal security is essential for exporters of items or services subject to this Regulation, who have acted in conformity with its provisions and with those adopted for its implementation in compliance with this Regulation, in respect to differing third country legislation that might consider such exports as criminal offences.

(20) National competent authorities in charge of the implementation of the Regulation must know the exporters intending to export dual-use items or the suppliers intending to transfer items listed in the Annex V to the Regulation within the community so as to efficiently enforce its provisions.

1334/2000 recital 15 (adapted)

The European Parliament expressed its views in its resolution of 13 April 1999[8].

1334/2000 recital 16 (adapted)

In view of the foregoing, Regulation (EC) No 3381/94 should be repealed,

1334/2000

HAS ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:

CHAPTER I

SUBJECT AND DEFINITIONS

1334/2000 (adapted)

ð new

Article 1

This Regulation sets up a Community system regime of export controls of exports of for dual-use items ð and related services and of transit of dual-use items ï.

1334/2000 Art. 2 (adapted)

ð new

Article 2

For the purposes of this Regulation:

(a) «dual-use items» shall mean items, including software and technology, which can be used for both civil and military purposes, and shall include all goods which can be used for both non-explosive uses and assisting in any way in the manufacture of nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices;

(b) «export» shall mean:

(i) an export procedure within the meaning of Article 161 of Regulation (EC) No 2913/1992 (the Community Customs Code);

(ii) a re-export within the meaning of ÕArticle 182 of that Code,; and

(iii) transmission of software or technology ð , or the provision of technical assistance, ï by electronic media, including by fax, or telephone ð , electronic mail or any other electronic means, ï to a destination outside the European Community; this applies to oral transmission of technology by telephone only where the technology is contained in a document the relevant part of which is read out over the telephone, or is described over the telephone in such a way as to achieve substantially the same result ð , and includes making available in an electronic form such software, technology or technical assistance ï ;

ð (iv) the provision of the services of intermediation in transactions of dual-use items from the European Community intro the territory of a third country. ï

(c) «exporter» shall mean any natural or legal person ð or partnership : ï

(i) on whose behalf an export declaration is made, that is to say the person who, at the time when the declaration is accepted, holds the contract with the consignee in the third country and has the power for determining the sending of the item out of the customs territory of the European Community. If no export contract has been concluded or if the holder of the contract does not act on its own behalf, the exporter shall mean the person who has the power for determining the sending of the item out of the customs territory of the European Community shall be decisive;

(ii) «exporter» shall also mean any natural or legal person who decides to transmit ð or make available ï software or technology ð or provides technical assistance ï by any electronic media, fax or telephone means to a destination outside the European Community;

ò new

(iii) who provide services as intermediaries within the meaning of point (e)

1334/2000

Where the benefit of a right to dispose of the dual-use item belongs to a person established outside the Community pursuant to the contract on which the export is based, the exporter shall be considered to be the Ccontracting Pparty established in the Community.

(d) «export declaration» shall mean the act whereby a person indicates in the prescribed form and manner the wish to place dual-use items under an export procedure.;

ò new

(e) "Intermediation services related to dual-use items" shall mean activities of persons, entities and partnerships:

- negotiating or arranging transactions that have as an object the purchase, sale or supply of dual-use items listed in Annex I from a third country to any other third country; or

- who buy, sell or supply such items from a third country to any other third country.

(f) "Intermediary" shall mean any legal or natural person or partnership providing intermediation services related to dual-use items listed in Annex I from the customs territory of the European Community into the territory of a third country

(g) "Transit" shall mean a transport of dual-use items entering and passing through the customs territory of the European Community with a destination outside the European Community

(h) "Individual export authorisation" shall mean an authorisation granted to one specific exporter for one end user in a third country and covering one or more dual-use items or technologies

(i) "Community General Export Authorisation" shall mean an export authorisation (EU 001) for exports to certain countries of destination available to all exporters who respect its conditions of use as listed in Article 6(1) and Annex II.

(j) "Global export authorisation" shall mean an authorisation granted to one specific exporter in respect of a type or category of dual-use item which may be valid for exports to one or more specified end users in one or more specified third countries.

(k) "National general export authorisation" shall mean a national authorisation published in the official journal of a Member State which is valid for all exporters based in the Member State where it is published who meet the conditions set in the national law, covering one or several specified countries as well as a number of dual-use items defined in the national law and not subject to notifications under Article 9.

(l) "Supplier" shall mean any legal or natural person or partnership who transfers a dual-use item listed in Annex V to the Regulation from one Member State to another Member State.

1334/2000

CHAPTER II

SCOPE

ARTICLE 3

1. An authorisation shall be required for the export of the dual-use items listed in Annex I.

2. Pursuant to Article 4 or Article 5, an authorisation may also be required for the export to all or certain destinations of certain dual-use items not listed in Annex I.

ò new

3. An authorisation for the provision of intermediation services related to dual-use items listed in Annex I is required when the intermediary has been informed by the competent authorities of the Member State where he is established or has grounds for suspecting that those dual-use items are or may be intended for proliferation of weapons of mass destruction or their means of delivery in violation of relevant international treaties and obligations.

4. This Regulation does not apply to dual-use items which only pass through the territory of the Community, that is those which are not assigned a customs-approved treatment or use other than the external transit procedure or which are merely placed in a free zone or free warehouse and where no record of them has to be kept in an approved stock record.

4. National customs authorities can temporarily stop for the purpose of control dual-use items listed in Annex I being in transit. If as a result of such controls, national competent authorities have reasonable grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended for illegal proliferation or attempts at international security in violation of international treaties and obligations, they can decide to take possession of them.

1334/2000

53. This Regulation does not apply to the supply of services or the transmission of technology if that supply or transmission involves cross-border movement of natural persons.

1334/2000

ð new

Article 4

1. An authorisation shall be required for the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has been informed by the competent authorities of the Member State in which he is established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons.

2. An authorisation shall also be required for the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if the purchasing country or country of destination is subject to an arms embargo decided by a common position or joint action adopted by the Council or a decision of the OSCE or an arms embargo imposed by a binding resolution of the Security Council of the United Nations and if the exporter has been informed by the authorities referred to in paragraph 1 that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for a military end-use. For the purposes of this paragraph, «military end-use» shall mean:

(a) incorporation into military items listed in the military list of Member States;

(b) use of production-, test- or analytical equipment and components therefor, for the development, production or maintenance of military items listed in the abovementioned list;

(c) use of any unfinished products in a plant for the production of military items listed in the abovementioned list.

3. An authorisation shall also be required for the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has been informed by the authorities referred to in paragraph 1 that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for use as parts or components of military items listed in the national military list that have been exported from the territory of that Member State without authorisation or in violation of an authorisation prescribed by national legislation of that Member State.

4. If an exporter is aware that dual-use items which he proposes to export, not listed in Annex I, are intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraphs 1, 2 and 3, he must notify the authorities referred to in paragraph 1, which will decide whether or not it is expedient to make the export concerned subject to authorisation.

5. A Member State may adopt or maintain national legislation imposing an authorisation requirement on the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I if the exporter has grounds for suspecting that those items are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraph 1.

6. A Member State which imposes an authorisation requirement, in application of paragraphs 1 to 5, on the export of a dual-use item not listed in Annex I, shall, where appropriate, inform the other Member States and the Commission. ð Member States shall also provide information to the other Member States and the Commission on any authorisation requirements applied generally in accordance with this Article for the export of non-listed items subject to such authorisation requirements, and on the names of end-users/consignees to which these requirements apply ï . The other Member States shall give all due consideration to this information and shall inform, to the extent possible, their customs offices and other relevant national authorities.

7. The provisions of Article 9(2) and (3) shall apply to cases concerning dual-use items not listed in Annex I.

ò new

8. Exporters can request a reply from the competent authorities of the Member State where they are established on whether the export of a non-listed item is subject or not to an authorisation requirement under this Article. The national competent authorities shall provide a reply within a delay of 20 working days from the presentation of a complete request by the exporter.

1334/2000 (adapted)

89. This Regulation is without prejudice to the right of Member States to take national measures under Article 11 of Regulation (EEC) No 2603/69.

Article 5

1. A Member State may prohibit or impose an authorisation requirement on the export of dual-use items not listed in Annex I for reasons of public security or human rights considerations.

2. Member States shall notify any measures adopted pursuant to paragraph 1 to the Commission immediately after their adoption and indicate the precise reasons for the measures.

3. Member States shall also immediately notify the Commission of any modifications to measures adopted pursuant to paragraph 1.

4. The Commission shall publish the measures notified to it pursuant to paragraphs 2 and 3 in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Communities Union .

CHAPTER III

EXPORT AUTHORISATION

ARTICLE 6

1. A Community general export authorisation for certain exports as set out in Annex II is established by this Regulation.

ò new

(a) Exporters that intend to use the Community General Export Authorisation shall notify the competent authorities of the Member State where they are established of their intention to use or of their first use of the Community General Export authorisation; such notification shall take place no later than thirty days after the date when the first export took place. The Member States will share with the Commission and other Member States those registration notifications.

(b) The use of the Community General Export authorisation shall be denied by the national competent authorities of the Member State where the exporter is established if:

- the exporter has been informed by his authorities that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraphs 1, 2 and 3 of Article 4,

- or if the exporter is aware that the items are intended for the abovementioned uses,

- or when the relevant items are exported to a customs free zone or free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.

In those cases, the competent authorities of the Member State shall assess individual applications on the basis of the criteria listed in Article 8 (1) to decide if the items can be exported with a global or individual export authorisation or if they must be denied.

1334/2000 (adapted)

2. For all other exports for which an authorisation is required under this Regulation, such authorisation shall be granted by the competent authorities of the Member State where the exporter is established. Subject to the restrictions specified in paragraph 13, this authorisation may be an individual, global or general authorisation.

The authorisation All the authorisations shall be valid throughout the European Community.

ò new

Member States shall establish targets for the treatment of the requests of export authorisation within certain deadlines and communicate them to the Commission and national exporters.

1334/2000

The authorisation may be subject, if appropriate, to certain requirements and conditions, such as an obligation to provide an end-use statement.

3. Items listed in Part 2 of Annex II shall not be included in a general authorisation.

ò new

3. National general export authorisations shall:

(a) Exclude from their scopes items listed in part 2 of Annex II and items and countries subject of valid denials issued under Article 9.2;

(b) Be used only by exporters who have notified to the competent authorities of the Member State where they are established their intention to use the national general export authorisation at the latest 30 days after the first shipment;

1334/2000

4. Member States shall indicate in general authorisations that these may

(c) not be used if the exporter has been informed by his authorities that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for any of the uses referred to in paragraphs 1, 2 and 3 of Article 4, or if the exporter is aware that the items are intended for the abovementioned uses.

45. Member States shall maintain or introduce in their respective national legislation the possibility of granting a global authorisation to a specific exporter in respect of a type or category of dual-use item which may be valid for exports to one or more specified countries.

56. Member States shall supply the Commission with a list of the authorities empowered to:

(a) grant export authorisations for dual-use items;

ò new

(b) grant export authorisations for the provision of intermediation services related to listed dual use items

(c) decide to take possession of dual-use items in transit

(d) grant transfer authorisations only if these authorities are different from these listed in Article 6.5a).

1334/2000 (adapted)

The Commission shall publish the list of these authorities in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Communities Union .

1334/2000

ð new

Article 7

1. If the dual-use items in respect of which an application has been made for an individual export authorisation to a destination not listed in Annex II or to any destination in the case of dual-use items listed in Annex IV V are or will be located in one or more Member States other than the one where the application has been made, that fact shall be indicated in the application. The competent authorities of the Member State to which the application for authorisation has been made shall immediately consult the competent authorities of the Member State or States in question and provide the relevant information. The Member State or States consulted shall make known within 10 working days any objections it or they may have to the granting of such an authorisation, which shall bind the Member State in which the application has been made.

If no objections are received within 10 working days, the Member State or States consulted shall be regarded as having no objection.

In exceptional cases, any Member State consulted may request the extension of the 10-day period. However, the extension may not exceed 30 working days.

2. If an export might prejudice its essential security interests, a Member State may request another Member State not to grant an export authorisation or, if such authorisation has been granted, request its annulment, suspension, modification or revocation. ð Such request shall be circulated to the other Member States and to the Commission. ï The Member State receiving such a request shall immediately engage in consultations of a non-binding nature with the requesting Member State, to be terminated within 10 working days. ð The requesting and requested Member States may ask the Commission to raise the issue in the Coordination Group established in Article 18 within 10 working days. In case the requested Member State decides to grant the authorisation, this should be notified to the Commission and other Member Statesï

1334/2000

ð new

Article 8

1. In deciding whether or not to grant an ð individual or global ï export authorisation ð or an authorisation for the provision of intermediation services ï under this Regulation, the Member States shall take into account all relevant considerations including:

(a) the obligations and commitments they have each accepted as a members of the relevant international non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, or by ratification of relevant international treaties;

(b) their obligations under sanctions imposed by a common position or a joint action adopted by the Council or by a decision of the OSCE or by a binding resolution of the Security Council of the United Nations;

(c) considerations of national foreign and security policy, including those covered by the European Union Code of Conduct on arms exports;

(d) considerations about intended end-use and the risk of diversion.

ò new

2. In addition to the criteria set in paragraph 1, when assessing an application for a global export authorisation or for an authorisation for the provision of intermediation services, Member States shall take into consideration the application by the exporter of proportionate, adequate means and procedures to ensure compliance with the provisions and objectives of this Regulation and with the terms and conditions of the authorisation.

1334/2000 (adapted)

ð new

Article 9

1. Exporters shall supply the competent authorities with all relevant information required for their applications for export authorisation ð and for authorisation for the provision of intermediation services including any relevant information collected from third parties so as to provide complete information to the national competent authorities in particular on the end-user, the country of destination, the end-uses of the item exported. ï

2. The competent authorities, acting in accordance with this Regulation, may refuse to grant an export authorisation ð or an authorisation for the provision of intermediation services ï and may annul, suspend, modify or revoke an export authorisation ð or an authorisation for the provision of intermediation services ï which they have already granted. Where they refuse, annul, suspend, substantially limit or revoke an ð export ï authorisation ð or an authorisation for the provision of intermediation services, or when they have determined that the export of dual-use item or the provision of intermediation is not to be authorised, ï they shall inform notify the competent authorities of the other Member States and the Commission thereof and exchange share the relevant information with them the other Member States and the Commission, while complying with the provisions of Article 15(3) concerning the confidentiality of such information.

ò new

Those notifications will be made via secure electronic means for the exchange of sensitive information available to Member States and the Commission, including via a secure system that may be set up in accordance with Article 15.4 . Member States shall review denials of authorisations notified under this paragraph within three years of their notification and revoke them, amend them or renew them. Denials which are not revoked shall remain valid.

When Member States suspend an export authorisation or an authorisation for the provision of intermediation services, they shall inform the other Member States and the Commission thereof and share the relevant information with them while complying with the provisions of article 15 (3) concerning the confidentiality of such information. At the end of the period of suspension, the final assessment shall be communicated to the Member States and the Commission. If the authorisation is revoked, this shall be considered as a notification under the second sub-paragraph.

1334/2000 (adapted)

ð new

3. Before any a Member State grants an export authorisation ð or an authorisation for the provision of intermediation service ï which has been denied by another Member State or States for an essentially identical transaction ð (meaning an essentially identical end use or an item with essentially identical parameters or technical characteristics to the same end user/consignee or wider entity encompassing the same end user) and for which the denial is still valid ï within the previous three years, it will shall first consult the Member State or States which issued the ð valid ï denial(s) ð as provided for in paragraph 2 as well as notifications under the fourth sub-paragraph thereof, and will inform the Commission of the launching of those consultations ï. If following ð such ï consultations, the Member State nevertheless decides intends to grant an authorisation, it shall inform the other Member States and the Commission, providing all relevant information to explain the decision intention .

ò new

4. The competent authorities of the Member States shall notify the Member States and the Commission of the denials of items in transit that they have taken possession of in application of Article 3.

1334/2000 (adapted)

ð new

Article 10

1. All individual and global export authorisations ð and authorisations for the provision of intermediation services ï shall be issued on forms consistent with ð containing at least all the elements and in the order of ï the model set out in Annex IIIa. ð Measures destined to harmonise the forms of authorisations can be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19. ï

2. At the request of exporters, global export authorisations that contain quantitative limitations shall be split.

3. National General export authorisations granted under Article 6(3)(2) shall be published in accordance with national laws and practices. They shall be issued in accordance with the indications set out in Annex IIIb IV ð and communicated to the Commission ï.

ò new

4. Member States may issue their export authorisations in an electronic form. For the purposes of enabling the customs and other relevant authorities to check the existence of an export authorisation, the information contained in the export authorisation may be made available using a secure system that may be set up for this purpose. A decision to implement this provision and the modalities of its application may be adopted in accordance with the procedures referred to in Article 19.

1334/2000 (adapted)

ð new

CHAPTER IV

UPDATING OF LIST OF DUAL-USE ITEMS

ARTICLE 11

The lists of dual-use items set out in Annex I and Annex IV shall be updated ð , in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19.2, ï in conformity with the relevant obligations and commitments, and any modification thereof, that each Member State ð States ï has ð have ï accepted as a member ð members ï of the international non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, or by ratification of relevant international treaties.

1334/2000 (adapted)

2432/2001 Art. 1.a

ð new

CHAPTER V

CUSTOMS PROCEDURES

Article 12

1. When completing the formalities for the export of dual-use items at the customs office responsible for handling the export declaration, the exporter shall furnish proof that any necessary export authorisation has been obtained.

2. A translation of any documents furnished as proof into an official language of the Member State where the export declaration is presented may be required of the exporter.

3. Without prejudice to any powers conferred on it under, and pursuant to, the Community Customs Code, a Member State may also, for a period not exceeding the periods referred to in paragraph 4, suspend the process of export from its territory, or, if necessary, otherwise prevent the dual-use items listed in Annex I which are covered by a valid export authorisation from leaving the Community via its territory, where it has grounds for suspicion that:

(a) relevant information was not taken into account when the authorisation was granted, or

(b) circumstances have materially changed since the grant of the authorisation.

4. In the case referred to in paragraph 3, the competent authorities of the Member State which granted the export authorisation shall be consulted forthwith in order that they may take action pursuant to Article 9(2). If such competent authorities decide to maintain the authorisation, they shall reply within 10 working days, which, at their request, may be extended to 30 working days in exceptional circumstances. In such case, or if no reply is received within 10 or 30 days, as the case may be, the dual-use items shall be released immediately. The Member State which granted the authorisation shall inform the other Member States and the Commission.

Article 13

1. Member States may provide that customs formalities for the export of dual-use items may be completed only at customs offices empowered to that end.

2. Member States availing themselves of the option set out in paragraph 1 shall inform the Commission of the duly empowered customs offices. The Commission shall publish the information in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Communities Union .

Article 14

The provisions of Articles 843 and 912a to 912g of Regulation (EEC) No 2454/93 shall apply to the restrictions relating to the exportation, reexportation and exit from the customs territory of dual-use items for the export of which an authorisation is required under this Regulation.

CHAPTER VI

ADMINISTRATIVE COOPERATION

ARTICLE 15

1. Acting in liaison with the Commission, Member States shall take all appropriate measures to establish direct cooperation and exchange of information between competent authorities, in particular to eliminate the risk that possible disparities in the application of export controls to dual-use items may lead to a deflection of trade, which could create difficulties for one or more Member States.

2. Member States shall take all appropriate measures to establish direct cooperation and exchange of information between competent authorities on sensitive end-users with a view to providing a consistent level of guidance to exporters concerned by this Regulation. ð Such information shall cover: ï

ò new

(a) convictions for criminal export-related offences;

(b) other intelligence, as appropriate, data on sensitive intermediaries, routes taken and consignees

1334/2000

3. Council Regulation (EC) No 515/97 of 13 March 1997 on mutual assistance between the administrative authorities of the Member States and cooperation between the latter and the Commission to ensure the correct application of the law on customs and agricultural matters[9], and in particular the provisions on the confidentiality of information, shall apply mutatis mutandis , without prejudice to Article 18 of this Regulation.

ò new

4. A secure and encrypted system for the exchange of information among Member States and whenever appropriate the Commission may be set up under the terms to be determined in accordance with the procedures referred to in paragraph 3 of Article 19.

5. Measures necessary to facilitate the cooperation established in this paragraphs 1 to 4 of this Article may be taken in accordance with the procedures referred to in Article 19.

1334/2000

CHAPTER VII

CONTROL MEASURES

ARTICLE 16

ò new

1. Exporters of items listed in Annex I and natural and legal persons or partnership wishing to provide intermediation services for those dual-use items in third countries as well as natural or legal persons intending to ship dual–use items listed in Annex V within the Community shall notify their intention to export such items or provide such services to the national competent authorities defined in Article 6. The Member States receiving these registrations will share them with other Member States and the Commission.

1334/2000

ð new

-1. 2. (i) Exporters ð of tangible dual-use items ï shall keep detailed registers or records of their exports, in accordance with the practice in force in the respective Member States. Such registers or records shall include in particular commercial documents such as invoices, manifests and transport and other dispatch documents containing sufficient information to allow the following to be identified:

(a) the description of the dual-use items;

(b) the quantity of the dual-use items;

(c) the name and address of the exporter and of the consignee;

(d) where known, the end-use and end-user of the dual-use items.

ò new

(ii) Suppliers of Annex V dual-use items transferring them in the single market shall keep detailed registers or records of their shipments in accordance with the practice in force in the respective Member States. Such registers or records shall include in particular commercial documents such as invoices, manifests and transport, other dispatch documents and the information contained in the pre-transfer notifications defined in part II of Annex V.

(iii) For exports as defined in Article 2biii) and for the provision of intermediation services, exporters/intermediary shall keep registers or records so as to be able to prove, on request, the nature of the dual-use items, technology or software that were transferred/subject of provision of intermediation services, the period during which the items were transferred/subject of provision of intermediation services and the destination of the transfers.

1334/2000 (adapted)

ð new

2. 3. The registers or records and the documents referred to in paragraph ð paragraphs ï 1 ð and 2 ï shall be kept for at least three years from the end of the calendar year in which the export ð /transfer or provision of intermediation services ï took place. They shall be produced to the competent authorities of the Member State in which the exporter ð /supplier or intermediary ï is established on request.

Article 17

In order to ensure that this Regulation is properly applied, each Member State shall take whatever measures are needed to permit its competent authorities:

(a) to gather information on any order or transaction involving dual-use items;

(b) to establish that the export control measures are being properly applied, which may include in particular the power to enter the premises of persons with an interest in an export transaction.

CHAPTER VIII

GENERAL AND FINAL OTHER PROVISIONS AND INTERNATIONAL COOPERATION

ARTICLE 18

1. A ð Dual-use ï Coordinating Coordination Group chaired by a representative of the Commission shall be set up. Each Member State shall appoint a representative to the Coordinating this Group.

The Coordinating Group It shall examine any question concerning the application of this Regulation which may be raised either by the chairman or by a representative of a Member State and, inter alia in particular :

(a) the measures which should be taken by Member States to inform exporters ð /other relevant stakeholders ï of their obligations under this Regulation;

(b) guidance concerning export authorisation forms. ð best practices and administrative procedures for the implementation and enforcement of the Regulation; ï

ò new

(c) technical considerations on options for legislative amendments to address problems of implementation;

(d) common guidelines for making available in a user-friendly manner for exporters the relevant information concerning the Community dual-use export control regime and its application by the Member States.

It shall report to the Council on the outcomes of its meetings.

1334/2000 (adapted)

ð new

2. The ð Chair of the Dual-use ï Coordinating Coordination Group may ð shall ï , whenever it considers it to be necessary, consult organisations representative of exporters ð and other relevant stakeholders ï concerned by this Regulation.

ò new

Article 19

The Dual-use committee

1. The Commission shall be assisted by a committee (hereinafter referred to as the 'Dual Use Committee').

2. The procedure referred to in paragraph 3 of this Article shall apply for the adoption of measures that may be necessary for the implementation of this Regulation other than in areas covered by Article 21 and 23, and for the adoption of amendments to the Annexes of this Regulation.

3. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Articles 5 and 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply.

The period laid down in Article 5(6) of Decision 1999/468/EC shall be set at two months.

4. The Dual-use Committee shall adopt its rules of procedure.

Article 20

The chair of the Dual-use Committee may, on his own initiative or at the request of one of the Member States representatives, consult the dual-use Committee about any other matter relating to the operation or application of this Regulation.

1334/2000

ð new

Article 1921

Each Member State shall take appropriate measures to ensure proper enforcement of all the provisions of this Regulation. In particular, it shall lay down the penalties applicable to infringements of the provisions of this Regulation or of those adopted for its implementation. Those penalties must be effective, proportionate and dissuasive. ð They shall include criminal penalties at least for serious infringements of the provisions of this Regulation, such as an intentional export intended for use in a programme for the development or manufacture of chemical, biological, nuclear weapons or of missiles capable of their delivery without the authorisation required under this Regulation, or the falsification or omission of information with a view to obtaining an authorisation that would otherwise have been denied. ï

ò new

Article 22

International cooperation

Without prejudice to the provisions on mutual administrative assistance agreements or protocols in customs matters concluded between the Community and third countries, the Commission may negotiate with third countries agreements providing for the mutual recognition of export controls of dual-use items covered by this Regulation and in particular to eliminate authorisation requirements for re-exports within the territory of the European Community. These shall be conducted in accordance with the procedures established in Article 133 (3) of the Treaty establishing the European Community and the Treaty establishing the European Atomic Energy Community, as appropriate.

Article 23

When appropriate and when projects financed by the Community are at stake, the Commission can make proposals, in the relevant legislative frameworks of the European Union or in the arrangements with third countries, so that an ad hoc committee involving all competent authorities of the Member States can be set up and be entitled to decide on the granting of the necessary export authorisations to ensure the proper functioning of those projects involving dual-us items or technologies.

1334/2000 (adapted)

ð new

Article 2024

Each Member State shall inform the Commission of the laws, regulations and administrative provisions adopted in implementation of this Regulation, including the measures referred to in Article 1921. The Commission shall forward the information to the other Member States. Every three years the Commission shall ð review the implementation of this Regulation and ï present a report to the European Parliament and the Council on the its application of this Regulation ð , which shall include as appropriate proposals for its amendment ï . Member States shall provide to the Commission all appropriate information for the preparation of the report ð , such as the number of exporters using the authorisations available in each Member State, the number of different authorisations granted to exporters, the registers of companies using the Community General Export Authorisation, or the number of bilateral consultations carried out under different Articles of this Regulation ï .

Article 2125

1. An authorisation shall be required for intra-Community transfers of dual-use items listed in Annex IV. Items listed in Part 2 of Annex IV shall not be covered by a general authorisation.

2. (a) A Member State may impose an authorisation requirement for the transfer of other dual-use items from its territory to another Member State in cases where at the time of transfer:

- the operator knows that the final destination of the items concerned is outside the Community,

- export of those items to that final destination is subject to an authorisation requirement pursuant to Article 3, 4 or 5 in the Member State from which the items are to be transferred, and such export directly from its territory is not authorised by a general authorisation or a global authorisation,

- no processing or working as defined in Article 24 of the Community Customs Code is to be performed on the items in the Member State to which they are to be transferred.

(b) The transfer authorisation must be applied for in the Member State from which the dual-use items are to be transferred.

ò new

1. A transfer to another Member State of a dual-use item listed in Annex V must be notified in advance by the supplier to the national competent authorities of the Member State where the item is located 8 working days prior to the shipment date, who will inform the Member State where the supplier is established.

2. The pre-transfer notification must contain the information listed in part II of Annex V.

3. The national competent authorities of the Member States concerned can suspend the transfer when:

(a) the supplier has not registered to national authorities of the Member State where it is established or has not fully provided the information required under part II of Annex V

(b) they have serious reasons to consider that the transfer would be contrary to essential security interests of the EU or of a Member State.

In this case, the national competent authority notified of the transfer enters into consultation with the Member States concerned. If the examination of the case leads to the Member State maintaining its initial decision to suspend the transfer, the Member States concerned may refer to the Commission and the other Member States for larger consultations. The final decision will be communicated to Member States and Commission with justification.

1334/2000 (adapted)

ð new

(c) ð The national competent authorities cannot suspend the transfer ï Iin cases where the subsequent export of the dual-use items has already been accepted, in the consultation procedures set out in Article 7, by the Member State from which the items are to be transferred, the transfer authorisation shall be issued to the operator immediately, unless the circumstances have substantially changed.

(d) A Member State which adopts legislation imposing such a requirement shall inform the Commission and the other Member States of the measures it has taken. The Commission shall publish this information in the C series of the Official Journal of the European Communities .

3.4. The measures pursuant to paragraphs 1 and 2 shall not involve the application of internal frontier controls within the Community, but solely controls which are performed as part of the normal control procedures applied in a non-discriminatory fashion throughout the territory of the Community.

4.5. Application of the measures pursuant to paragraphs 1 and 2 ð and 3 ï may in no case result in transfers from one Member State to another being subject to more restrictive conditions than those imposed for exports of the same items to non-Member States.

5. Documents and records of intra-Community transfers of dual-use items listed in Annex I shall be kept for at least three years from the end of the calendar year in which a transfer took place and shall be produced to the competent authorities of the Member State from which these items were transferred on request.

6. A Member State may, by national legislation, require that, for any intra-Community transfers from that Member State of items listed in Category 5, Part 2 of Annex I which are not listed in Annex IV V, additional information concerning those items shall be provided to the competent authorities of that Member State.

7. The relevant commercial documents relating to intra-Community transfers of dual-use items listed in Annex I shall indicate clearly that those items are subject to controls if exported from the Community. Relevant commercial documents include, in particular, any sales contract, order confirmation, invoice or dispatch note.

Article 2226

This Regulation does not affect:

- the application of Article 296 of the Treaty establishing the European Community,

- the application of the Treaty establishing the European Atomic Energy Community.

Article 2327

Regulation (EC) No 3381/94 1334/2000 is hereby repealed with effect from [...] .

However, for export authorisation applications made before the date of entry into force of this Regulation, the relevant provisions of Regulation (EC) No 3381/94 1334/2000 shall continue to apply.

ò new

References to the repealed Regulation shall be construed as references to this Regulation and shall be read in accordance with the correlation table in Annex […].

1334/2000 (new)

Article 2428

This Regulation shall enter into force 90 days after the date of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Communities Union .

This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.

Done at Luxembourg, 22 June 2000 in Brussels,

For the Council

The President

394/2006 Art. 1 and Annex (adapted)

ANNEX I

LIST OF DUAL-USE ITEMS AND TECHNOLOGY

(referred to in Article 3 of Regulation (EC) No 1334/2000)

This list implements internationally agreed dual-use controls including the Wassenaar Arrangement, the Missile Technology Control Regime (MTCR), the Nuclear Suppliers' Group (NSG), the Australia Group and the Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC). No account has been taken of any items that Member States wish to place on an exclusion list. No account has been taken of any national controls (non-regime origin controls) that may be maintained by Member States.

GENERAL NOTES TO ANNEX I

1. For control of goods which are designed or modified for military use, see the relevant list(s) of controls on military goods maintained by individual Member States. References in this Annex that state «SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS» refer to the same lists.

2. The object of the controls contained in this Annex should not be defeated by the export of any non-controlled goods (including plant) containing one or more controlled components when the controlled component or components are the principal element of the goods and can feasibly be removed or used for other purposes.

N.B.: In judging whether the controlled component or components are to be considered the principal element, it is necessary to weigh the factors of quantity, value and technological know-how involved and other special circumstances which might establish the controlled component or components as the principal element of the goods being procured.

3. Goods specified in this Annex include both new and used goods.

NUCLEAR TECHNOLOGY NOTE (NTN)

(To be read in conjunction with section E of Category 0)

The «technology» directly associated with any goods controlled in Category 0 is controlled according to the provisions of Category 0.

«Technology» for the «development», «production» or «use» of goods under control remains under control even when applicable to non-controlled goods.

The approval of goods for export also authorises the export to the same end-user of the minimum «technology» required for the installation, operation, maintenance and repair of the goods.

Controls on «technology» transfer do not apply to information «in the public domain» or to «basic scientific research».

GENERAL TECHNOLOGY NOTE (GTN)

(To be read in conjunction with section E of Categories 1 to 9)

The export of «technology» which is «required» for the «development», «production» or «use» of goods controlled in Categories 1 to 9, is controlled according to the provisions of Categories 1 to 9.

«Technology»«required» for the «development», «production» or «use» of goods under control remains under control even when applicable to non-controlled goods.

Controls do not apply to that «technology» which is the minimum necessary for the installation, operation, maintenance (checking) and repair of those goods which are not controlled or whose export has been authorised.

N.B.: This does not release such «technology» specified in 1E002.e., 1E002.f., 8E002.a. and 8E002.b.

Controls on «technology» transfer do not apply to information «in the public domain», to «basic scientific research» or to the minimum necessary information for patent applications.

GENERAL SOFTWARE NOTE (GSN)

(This note overrides any control within section D of Categories 0 to 9)

Categories 0 to 9 of this list do not control «software» which is either:

a. Generally available to the public by being:

1. Sold from stock at retail selling points, without restriction, by means of:

a. Over-the-counter transactions;

b. Mail order transactions;

c. Electronic transactions; or

d. Telephone order transactions; and

2. Designed for installation by the user without further substantial support by the supplier; or

N.B.: Entry a. of the General Software Note does not release «software» specified in Category 5 — Part 2 («Information Security»).

b.«In the public domain».

EDITORIAL PRACTICES

In accordance with the rules set out in paragraph 101 on page 86 of the Interinstitutional Style Guide (1997 edition), for texts in English published in the Official Journal of the European Communities Union :

- a comma is used to separate the whole number from the decimals,

- whole numbers are presented in series of three, each series being separated by a thin space.

DEFINITIONS OF TERMS USED IN THIS ANNEX

Definitions of terms between «single quotation marks» are given in a Technical Note to the relevant item.

Definitions of terms between «double quotation marks» are as follows:

N.B.: Category references are given in brackets after the defined term.

«Accuracy» (2 6), usually measured in terms of inaccuracy, means the maximum deviation, positive or negative, of an indicated value from an accepted standard or true value.

«Active flight control systems» (7) are systems that function to prevent undesirable «aircraft» and missile motions or structural loads by autonomously processing outputs from multiple sensors and then providing necessary preventive commands to effect automatic control.

«Active pixel» (6 8) is a minimum (single) element of the solid state array which has a photoelectric transfer function when exposed to light (electromagnetic) radiation.

«Adapted for use in war» (1) means any modification or selection (such as altering purity, shelf life, virulence, dissemination characteristics, or resistence to UV radiation) designed to increase the effectiveness in producing casualties in humans or animals, degrading equipment or damaging crops or the environment.

«Aircraft» (1 7 9) means a fixed wing, swivel wing, rotary wing (helicopter), tilt rotor or tilt-wing airborne vehicle.

N.B.: See also «civil aircraft».

«All compensations available» (2) means after all feasible measures available to the manufacturer to minimise all systematic positioning errors for the particular machine-tool model are considered.

«Allocated by the ITU» (3 5) means the allocation of frequency bands according to the current edition of the ITU Radio Regulations for primary, permitted and secondary services.

N.B.: Additional and alternative allocations are not included.

«Angular position deviation» (2) means the maximum difference between angular position and the actual, very accurately measured angular position after the workpiece mount of the table has been turned out of its initial position (ref. VDI/VDE 2617, Draft: «Rotary tables on coordinate measuring machines»).

«Asymmetric algorithm» (5) means a cryptographic algorithm using different, mathematically-related keys for encryption and decryption.

N.B.: A common use of «asymmetric algorithms» is key management.

«Automatic target tracking» (6) means a processing technique that automatically determines and provides as output an extrapolated value of the most probable position of the target in real time.

«Basic gate propagation delay time» (3) means the propagation delay time value corresponding to the basic gate used in a «monolithic integrated circuit». For a «family» of «monolithic integrated circuits», this may be specified either as the propagation delay time per typical gate within the given «family» or as the typical propagation delay time per gate within the given «family».

N.B. 1:«Basic gate propagation delay time» is not to be confused with the input/output delay time of a complex «monolithic integrated circuit».

N.B. 2:«Family» consists of all integrated circuits to which all of the following are applied as their manufacturing methodology and specifications except their respective functions:

a.The common hardware and software architecture;

b.The common design and process technology; and

c.The common basic characteristics .

«Basic scientific research» (GTN NTN) means experimental or theoretical work undertaken principally to acquire new knowledge of the fundamental principles of phenomena or observable facts, not primarily directed towards a specific practical aim or objective.

«Bias» (accelerometer) (7) means an accelerometer output when no acceleration is applied.

«Camming» (2) means axial displacement in one revolution of the main spindle measured in a plane perpendicular to the spindle faceplate, at a point next to the circumference of the spindle faceplate (Reference: ISO 230/1 1986, paragraph 5.63).

«Carbon fibre preforms» (1) means an ordered arrangement of uncoated or coated fibres intended to constitute a framework of a part before the «matrix» is introduced to form a «composite».

«CE» is equivalent to «computing element».

«CEP» (circle of equal probability) (7) is a measure of accuracy; the radius of the circle centred at the target, at a specific range, in which 50 % of the payloads impact.

«Chemical laser» (6) means a «laser» in which the excited species is produced by the output energy from a chemical reaction.

«Chemical mixture» (1) means a solid, liquid or gaseous product made up of two or more components which do not react together under the conditions under which the mixture is stored.

«Circulation-controlled anti-torque or circulation controlled direction control systems» (7) are systems that use air blown over aerodynamic surfaces to increase or control the forces generated by the surfaces.

«Civil aircraft» (1 7 9) means those «aircraft» listed by designation in published airworthiness certification lists by the civil aviation authorities to fly commercial civil internal and external routes or for legitimate civil, private or business use.

N.B.: See also «aircraft».

«Commingled» (1) means filament to filament blending of thermoplastic fibres and reinforcement fibres in order to produce a fibre reinforcement «matrix» mix in total fibre form.

«Comminution» (1) means a process to reduce a material to particles by crushing or grinding.

«Common channel signalling» (5) is a signalling method in which a single channel between exchanges conveys, by means of labelled messages, signalling information relating to a multiplicity of circuits or calls and other information such as that used for network management.

«Communications channel controller» (4) means the physical interface which controls the flow of synchronous or asynchronous digital information. It is an assembly that can be integrated into computer or telecommunications equipment to provide communications access.

«Composite» (1 2 6 8 9) means a «matrix» and an additional phase or additional phases consisting of particles, whiskers, fibres or any combination thereof, present for a specific purpose or purposes.

«Composite theoretical performance» («CTP») (3 4) is a measure of computational performance given in millions of theoretical operations per second (Mtops), calculated using the aggregation of «computing elements» («CE»).

N.B.: See Category 4, Technical Note.

«Compound rotary table» (2) means a table allowing the workpiece to rotate and tilt about two non-parallel axes, which can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control».

«Computing element» («CE») (4) means the smallest computational unit that produces an arithmetic or logic result.

«Contouring control» (2) means two or more «numerically controlled» motions operating in accordance with instructions that specify the next required position and the required feed rates to that position. These feed rates are varied in relation to each other so that a desired contour is generated (ref. ISO/DIS 2806 - 1980).

«Critical temperature» (1 3 6) (sometimes referred to as the transition temperature) of a specific «superconductive» material means the temperature at which the material loses all resistance to the flow of direct electrical current.

«Cryptography» (5) means the discipline which embodies principles, means and methods for the transformation of data in order to hide its information content, prevent its undetected modification or prevent its unauthorised use. «Cryptography» is limited to the transformation of information using one or more «secret parameters» (e.g., crypto variables) or associated key management.

N.B.:«Secret parameter»: a constant or key kept from the knowledge of others or shared only within a group.

«CTP» is equivalent to «composite theoretical performance».

«Data-Based Referenced Navigation» («DBRN») (7) Systems means systems which use various sources of previously measured geo-mapping data integrated to provide accurate navigation information under dynamic conditions. Data sources include bathymetric maps, stellar maps, gravity maps, magnetic maps or 3-D digital terrain maps.

«Deformable mirrors» (6) (also known as adaptive optic mirrors) means mirrors having:

a. A single continuous optical reflecting surface which is dynamically deformed by the application of individual torques or forces to compensate for distortions in the optical waveform incident upon the mirror; or

b. Multiple optical reflecting elements that can be individually and dynamically repositioned by the application of torques or forces to compensate for distortions in the optical waveform incident upon the mirror.

«Depleted uranium» (0) means uranium depleted in the isotope 235 below that occurring in nature.

«Development» (GTN NTN All) is related to all phases prior to serial production, such as: design, design research, design analyses, design concepts, assembly and testing of prototypes, pilot production schemes, design data, process of transforming design data into a product, configuration design, integration design, layouts.

«Diffusion bonding» (1 2 9) means a solid state molecular joining of at least two separate metals into a single piece with a joint strength equivalent to that of the weakest material.

«Digital computer» (4 5) means equipment which can, in the form of one or more discrete variables, perform all of the following:

a. Accept data;

b. Store data or instructions in fixed or alterable (writable) storage devices;

c. Process data by means of a stored sequence of instructions which is modifiable; and

d. Provide output of data.

N.B.: Modifications of a stored sequence of instructions include replacement of fixed storage devices, but not a physical change in wiring or interconnections.

«Digital transfer rate» means the total bit rate of the information that is directly transferred on any type of medium.

N.B.: See also «total digital transfer rate».

«Direct-acting hydraulic pressing» (2) means a deformation process which uses a fluid-filled flexible bladder in direct contact with the workpiece.

«Drift rate» (gyro) (7) means the time rate of output deviation from the desired output. It consists of random and systematic components and is expressed as an equivalent input angular displacement per unit time with respect to inertial space.

«Dynamic adaptive routing» (5) means automatic rerouting of traffic based on sensing and analysis of current actual network conditions.

N.B.: This does not include cases of routing decisions taken on predefined information.

«Dynamic signal analysers» (3) means «signal analysers» which use digital sampling and transformation techniques to form a Fourier spectrum display of the given waveform including amplitude and phase information.

N.B.: See also «signal analysers».

«Effective gramme» (0 1) of «special fissile material» means:

a. For plutonium isotopes and uranium-233, the isotope weight in grammes;

b. For uranium enriched 1 per cent or greater in the isotope uranium-235, the element weight in grammes multiplied by the square of its enrichment expressed as a decimal weight fraction;

c. For uranium enriched below 1 per cent in the isotope uranium-235, the element weight in grammes multiplied by 0,0001;

«Electronic assembly» (2 3 4 5) means a number of electronic components (i.e., «circuit elements», «discrete components», integrated circuits, etc.) connected together to perform (a) specific function(s), replaceable as an entity and normally capable of being disassembled.

N.B. 1:«Circuit element»: a single active or passive functional part of an electronic circuit, such as one diode, one transistor, one resistor, one capacitor, etc.

N.B. 2:«Discrete component»: a separately packaged «circuit element» with its own external connections.

«Electronically steerable phased array antenna» (5 6) means an antenna which forms a beam by means of phase coupling, i.e., the beam direction is controlled by the complex excitation coefficients of the radiating elements and the direction of that beam can be varied in azimuth or in elevation, or both, by application, both in transmission and reception, of an electrical signal.

«End-effectors» (2) means grippers, «active tooling units» and any other tooling that is attached to the baseplate on the end of a «robot» manipulator arm.

N.B.:«Active tooling unit» means a device for applying motive power, process energy or sensing to the workpiece.

«Equivalent Density» (6) means the mass of an optic per unit optical area projected onto the optical surface.

«Expert systems» (7) mean systems providing results by application of rules to data which are stored independently of the «programme» and capable of any of the following:

a. Modifying automatically the «source code» introduced by the user;

b. Providing knowledge linked to a class of problems in quasi-natural language; or

c. Acquiring the knowledge required for their development (symbolic training).

«FADEC» is equivalent to «full authority digital engine control».

«Fault tolerance» (4) is the capability of a computer system, after any malfunction of any of its hardware or «software» components, to continue to operate without human intervention, at a given level of service that provides: continuity of operation, data integrity and recovery of service within a given time.

«Fibrous or filamentary materials» (0 1 2 8) include:

a. Continuous «monofilaments»;

b. Continuous «yarns» and «rovings»;

c.«Tapes», fabrics, random mats and braids;

d. Chopped fibres, staple fibres and coherent fibre blankets;

e. Whiskers, either monocrystalline or polycrystalline, of any length;

f. Aromatic polyamide pulp.

«Film type integrated circuit» (3) means an array of «circuit elements» and metallic interconnections formed by deposition of a thick or thin film on an insulating «substrate».

N.B.:«Circuit element» is a single active or passive functional part of an electronic circuit, such as one diode, one transistor, one resistor, one capacitor, etc.

«Fixed» (5) means that the coding or compression algorithm cannot accept externally supplied parameters (e.g., cryptographic or key variables) and cannot be modified by the user.

«Flight control optical sensor array» (7) is a network of distributed optical sensors, using «laser» beams, to provide real-time flight control data for on-board processing.

«Flight path optimisation» (7) is a procedure that minimizes deviations from a four-dimensional (space and time) desired trajectory based on maximizing performance or effectiveness for mission tasks.

«Focal plane array» (6) means a linear or two-dimensional planar layer, or combination of planar layers, of individual detector elements, with or without readout electronics, which work in the focal plane.

N.B.: This is not intended to include a stack of single detector elements or any two, three or four element detectors provided time delay and integration is not performed within the element.

«Fractional bandwidth» (3) means the «instantaneous bandwidth» divided by the centre frequency, expressed as a percentage.

«Frequency hopping» (5) means a form of «spread spectrum» in which the transmission frequency of a single communication channel is made to change by a random or pseudo-random sequence of discrete steps.

«Frequency switching time» (3 5) means the maximum time (i.e., delay), taken by a signal, when switched from one selected output frequency to another selected output frequency, to reach:

a. A frequency within 100 Hz of the final frequency; or

b. An output level within 1 dB of the final output level.

«Frequency synthesiser» (3) means any kind of frequency source or signal generator, regardless of the actual technique used, providing a multiplicity of simultaneous or alternative output frequencies, from one or more outputs, controlled by, derived from or disciplined by a lesser number of standard (or master) frequencies.

«Full Authority Digital Engine Control» («FADEC») (7 9) means an electronic control system for gas turbine or combined cycle engines utilising a digital computer to control the variables required to regulate engine thrust or shaft power output throughout the engine operating range from the beginning of fuel metering to fuel shutoff.

«Gas Atomisation» (1) means a process to reduce a molten stream of metal alloy to droplets of 500 micrometre diameter or less by a high pressure gas stream.

«Geographically dispersed» (6) is where each location is distant from any other more than 1500 m in any direction. Mobile sensors are always considered «geographically dispersed».

«Guidance set» (7) means systems that integrate the process of measuring and computing a vehicles position and velocity (i.e. navigation) with that of computing and sending commands to the vehicles flight control systems to correct the trajectory.

«Hot isostatic densification» (2) means the process of pressurising a casting at temperatures exceeding 375 K (102 °C) in a closed cavity through various media (gas, liquid, solid particles, etc.) to create equal force in all directions to reduce or eliminate internal voids in the casting.

«Hybrid computer» (4) means equipment which can perform all of the following:

a. Accept data;

b. Process data, in both analogue and digital representations; and

c. Provide output of data.

«Hybrid integrated circuit» (3) means any combination of integrated circuit(s), or integrated circuit with «circuit elements» or «discrete components» connected together to perform (a) specific function(s), and having all of the following characteristics:

a. Containing at least one unencapsulated device;

b. Connected together using typical IC production methods;

c. Replaceable as an entity; and

d. Not normally capable of being disassembled.

N.B. 1:«Circuit element»: a single active or passive functional part of an electronic circuit, such as one diode, one transistor, one resistor, one capacitor, etc.

N.B. 2:«Discrete component»: a separately packaged «circuit element» with its own external connections.

«Image enhancement» (4) means the processing of externally derived information-bearing images by algorithms such as time compression, filtering, extraction, selection, correlation, convolution or transformations between domains (e.g., fast Fourier transform or Walsh transform). This does not include algorithms using only linear or rotational transformation of a single image, such as translation, feature extraction, registration or false coloration.

«Immunotoxin» (1) is a conjugate of one cell specific monoclonal antibody and a «toxin» or «sub-unit of toxin», that selectively affects diseased cells.

«In the public domain» (GTN NTN GSN), as it applies herein, means «technology» or «software» which has been made available without restrictions upon its further dissemination (copyright restrictions do not remove «technology» or «software» from being «in the public domain»).

«Information security» (4 5) is all the means and functions ensuring the accessibility, confidentiality or integrity of information or communications, excluding the means and functions intended to safeguard against malfunctions. This includes «cryptography», «cryptanalysis», protection against compromising emanations and computer security.

N.B.:«Cryptanalysis»: analysis of a cryptographic system or its inputs and outputs to derive confidential variables or sensitive data, including clear text.

«Instantaneous bandwidth» (3 5 7) means the bandwidth over which output power remains constant within 3 dB without adjustment of other operating parameters.

«Instrumented range» (6) means the specified unambiguous display range of a radar.

«Insulation» (9) is applied to the components of a rocket motor, i.e. the case, nozzle, inlets, case closures, and includes cured or semi-cured compounded rubber sheet stock containing an insulating or refractory material. It may also be incorporated as stress relief boots or flaps.

«Interconnected radar sensors» (6) means two or more radar sensors are interconnected when they mutually exchange data in real time.

«Interior lining» (9) is suited for the bond interface between the solid propellant and the case or insulating liner. Usually a liquid polymer based dispersion of refractory or insulating materials, e.g. carbon filled hydroxyl terminated polybutadiene (HTPB) or other polymer with added curing agents sprayed or screeded over a case interior.

«Intrinsic Magnetic Gradiometer» (6) is a single magnetic field gradient sensing element and associated electronics the output of which is a measure of magnetic field gradient.

N.B.: See also «magnetic gradiometer».

«Isolated live cultures» (1) includes live cultures in dormant form and in dried preparations.

«Isostatic presses» (2) mean equipment capable of pressurising a closed cavity through various media (gas, liquid, solid particles, etc.) to create equal pressure in all directions within the cavity upon a workpiece or material.

«Laser» (0 2 3 5 6 7 8 9) is an assembly of components which produce both spatially and temporally coherent light that is amplified by stimulated emission of radiation.

N.B.: See also: | «Chemical laser»; «Q-switched laser»; «Super High Power Laser»; «Transfer laser». |

«Lighter-than-air vehicles» (9) means balloons and airships that rely on hot air or other lighter-than-air gases such as helium or hydrogen for their lift.

«Linearity» (2) (usually measured in terms of non-linearity) means the maximum deviation of the actual characteristic (average of upscale and downscale readings), positive or negative, from a straight line so positioned as to equalise and minimise the maximum deviations.

«Local area network» (4) is a data communication system having all of the following characteristics:

a. Allows an arbitrary number of independent «data devices» to communicate directly with each other; and

b. Is confined to a geographical area of moderate size (e.g., office building, plant, campus, warehouse).

N.B.:«Data device» means equipment capable of transmitting or receiving sequences of digital information.

«Magnetic Gradiometers» (6) are instruments designed to detect the spatial variation of magnetic fields from sources external to the instrument. They consist of multiple «magnetometers» and associated electronics the output of which is a measure of magnetic field gradient.

N.B.: See also «intrinsic magnetic gradiometer».

«Magnetometers» (6) are instruments designed to detect magnetic fields from sources external to the instrument. They consist of a single magnetic field sensing element and associated electronics the output of which is a measure of the magnetic field.

«Main storage» (4) means the primary storage for data or instructions for rapid access by a central processing unit. It consists of the internal storage of a «digital computer» and any hierarchical extension thereto, such as cache storage or non-sequentially accessed extended storage.

«Materials resistant to corrosion by UF6» (0) may be copper, stainless steel, aluminium, aluminium oxide, aluminium alloys, nickel or alloy containing 60 weight percent or more nickel and UF6- resistant fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers, as appropriate for the type of separation process.

«Matrix» (1 2 8 9) means a substantially continuous phase that fills the space between particles, whiskers or fibres.

«Measurement uncertainty» (2) is the characteristic parameter which specifies in what range around the output value the correct value of the measurable variable lies with a confidence level of 95 %. It includes the uncorrected systematic deviations, the uncorrected backlash and the random deviations (ref. ISO 10360-2, or VDI/VDE 2617).

«Mechanical Alloying» (1) means an alloying process resulting from the bonding, fracturing and rebonding of elemental and master alloy powders by mechanical impact. Non-metallic particles may be incorporated in the alloy by addition of the appropriate powders.

«Melt Extraction» (1) means a process to «solidify rapidly» and extract a ribbon-like alloy product by the insertion of a short segment of a rotating chilled block into a bath of a molten metal alloy.

N.B.:«Solidify rapidly»: solidification of molten material at cooling rates exceeding 1000 K/s.

«Melt Spinning» (1) means a process to «solidify rapidly» a molten metal stream impinging upon a rotating chilled block, forming a flake, ribbon or rod-like product.

N.B.:«Solidify rapidly»: solidification of molten material at cooling rates exceeding 1000 K/s.

«Microcomputer microcircuit» (3) means a «monolithic integrated circuit» or «multichip integrated circuit» containing an arithmetic logic unit (ALU) capable of executing general purpose instructions from an internal storage, on data contained in the internal storage.

N.B.: The internal storage may be augmented by an external storage.

«Microprocessor microcircuit» (3) means a «monolithic integrated circuit» or «multichip integrated circuit» containing an arithmetic logic unit (ALU) capable of executing a series of general purpose instructions from an external storage.

N.B. 1: The «microprocessor microcircuit» normally does not contain integral user-accessible storage, although storage present on-the-chip may be used in performing its logic function.

N.B. 2: This includes chip sets which are designed to operate together to provide the function of a «microprocessor microcircuit».

«Microorganisms» (1 2) means bacteria, viruses, mycoplasms, rickettsiae, chlamydiae or fungi, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of isolated live cultures or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures.

«Missiles» (1 3 6 7 9) means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems, capable of delivering at least 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km.

«Monofilament» (1) or filament is the smallest increment of fibre, usually several micrometres in diameter.

«Monolithic integrated circuit» (3) means a combination of passive or active «circuit elements» or both which:

a. Are formed by means of diffusion processes, implantation processes or deposition processes in or on a single semiconducting piece of material, a so-called «chip»;

b. Can be considered as indivisibly associated; and

c. Perform the function(s) of a circuit.

N.B.:«Circuit element» is a single active or passive functional part of an electronic circuit, such as one diode, one transistor, one resistor, one capacitor, etc.

«Monospectral imaging sensors» (6) are capable of acquisition of imaging data from one discrete spectral band.

«Multichip integrated circuit» (3) means two or more «monolithic integrated circuits» bonded to a common «substrate».

«Multi-data-stream processing» (4) means the «microprogramme» or equipment architecture technique which permits simultaneous processing of two or more data sequences under the control of one or more instruction sequences by means such as:

a. Single Instruction Multiple Data (SIMD) architectures such as vector or array processors;

b. Multiple Single Instruction Multiple Data (MSIMD) architectures;

c. Multiple Instruction Multiple Data (MIMD) architectures, including those which are tightly coupled, closely coupled or loosely coupled; or

d. Structured arrays of processing elements, including systolic arrays.

N.B.:«Microprogramme» means a sequence of elementary instructions, maintained in a special storage, the execution of which is initiated by the introduction of its reference instruction into an instruction register.

«Multispectral imaging sensors» (6) are capable of simultaneous or serial acquisition of imaging data from two or more discrete spectral bands. Sensors having more than twenty discrete spectral bands are sometimes referred to as hyperspectral imaging sensors.

«Natural uranium» (0) means uranium containing the mixtures of isotopes occurring in nature.

«Network access controller» (4) means a physical interface to a distributed switching network. It uses a common medium which operates throughout at the same «digital transfer rate» using arbitration (e.g., token or carrier sense) for transmission. Independently from any other, it selects data packets or data groups (e.g., IEEE 802) addressed to it. It is an assembly that can be integrated into computer or telecommunications equipment to provide communications access.

«Neural computer» (4) means a computational device designed or modified to mimic the behaviour of a neuron or a collection of neurons, i.e., a computational device which is distinguished by its hardware capability to modulate the weights and numbers of the interconnections of a multiplicity of computational components based on previous data.

«Noise level» (6) means an electrical signal given in terms of power spectral density. The relation between «noise level» expressed in peak-to-peak is given by S2pp = 8 No(f2–f1), where Spp is the peak-to-peak value of the signal (e.g., nanoteslas), No is the power spectral density (e.g., (nanotesla)2/Hz) and (f2–f1) defines the bandwidth of interest.

«Nuclear reactor» (0) means the items within or attached directly to the reactor vessel, the equipment which controls the level of power in the core, and the components which normally contain, come into direct contact with or control the primary coolant of the reactor core.

«Numerical control» (2) means the automatic control of a process performed by a device that makes use of numeric data usually introduced as the operation is in progress (ref. ISO 2382).

«Object code» (9) means an equipment executable form of a convenient expression of one or more processes («source code» (source language)) which has been converted by programming system.

«Optical amplification» (5), in optical communications, means an amplification technique that introduces a gain of optical signals that have been generated by a separate optical source, without conversion to electrical signals, i.e., using semiconductor optical amplifiers, optical fibre luminescent amplifiers.

«Optical computer» (4) means a computer designed or modified to use light to represent data and whose computational logic elements are based on directly coupled optical devices.

«Optical integrated circuit» (3) means a «monolithic integrated circuit» or a «hybrid integrated circuit», containing one or more parts designed to function as a photosensor or photoemitter or to perform (an) optical or (an) electro-optical function(s).

«Optical switching» (5) means the routing of or switching of signals in optical form without conversion to electrical signals.

«Overall current density» (3) means the total number of ampere-turns in the coil (i.e., the sum of the number of turns multiplied by the maximum current carried by each turn) divided by the total cross-section of the coil (comprising the superconducting filaments, the metallic matrix in which the superconducting filaments are embedded, the encapsulating material, any cooling channels, etc.).

«Participating state» (7 9) is a state participating in the Wassenaar Arrangement. (See www.wassenaar.org)

«Peak power» (6), means energy per pulse in joules divided by the pulse duration in seconds.

«Personalised smart card» (5) means a smart card containing a microcircuit which has been programmed for a specific application and cannot be reprogrammed for any other application by the user.

«Power management» (7) means changing the transmitted power of the altimeter signal so that received power at the «aircraft» altitude is always at the minimum necessary to determine the altitude.

«Pressure transducers» (2) are devices that convert pressure measurements into an electrical signal.

«Previously separated» (0 1) means the application of any process intended to increase the concentration of the controlled isotope.

«Primary flight control» (7) means an «aircraft» stability or manoeuvering control using force/moment generators, i.e., aerodynamic control surfaces or propulsive thrust vectoring.

«Principal element» (4), as it applies in Category 4, is a «principal element» when its replacement value is more than 35 % of the total value of the system of which it is an element. Element value is the price paid for the element by the manufacturer of the system, or by the system integrator. Total value is the normal international selling price to unrelated parties at the point of manufacture or consolidation of shipment.

«Production» (GTN NTN All) means all production phases, such as: construction, production engineering, manufacture, integration, assembly (mounting), inspection, testing, quality assurance.

«Production equipment» (1 7 9) means tooling, templates, jigs, mandrels, moulds, dies, fixtures, alignment mechanisms, test equipment, other machinery and components therefor, limited to those specially designed or modified for «development» or for one or more phases of «production».

«Production facilities» (7 9) means equipment and specially designed software therefor integrated into installations for «development» or for one or more phases of «production».

«Programme» (2 6) means a sequence of instructions to carry out a process in, or convertible into, a form executable by an electronic computer.

«Pulse compression» (6) means the coding and processing of a radar signal pulse of long time duration to one of short time duration, while maintaining the benefits of high pulse energy.

«Pulse duration» (6) is the duration of a «laser» pulse measured at Full Width Half Intensity (FWHI) levels.

«Quantum cryptography» (5) means a family of techniques for the establishment of shared key for «cryptography» by measuring the quantum-mechanical properties of a physical system (including those physical properties explicitly governed by quantum optics, quantum field theory or quantum electrodynamics).

«Q-switched laser» (6) means a «laser» in which the energy is stored in the population inversion or in the optical resonator and subsequently emitted in a pulse.

«Radar frequency agility» (6) means any technique which changes, in a pseudo-random sequence, the carrier frequency of a pulsed radar transmitter between pulses or between groups of pulses by an amount equal to or larger than the pulse bandwidth.

«Radar spread spectrum» (6) means any modulation technique for spreading energy originating from a signal with a relatively narrow frequency band, over a much wider band of frequencies, by using random or pseudo-random coding.

«Real-time bandwidth» (2 3) for «dynamic signal analysers» is the widest frequency range which the analyser can output to display or mass storage without causing any discontinuity in the analysis of the input data. For analysers with more than one channel, the channel configuration yielding the widest «real-time bandwidth» shall be used to make the calculation.

«Real time processing» (6 7) means the processing of data by a computer system providing a required level of service, as a function of available resources, within a guaranteed response time, regardless of the load of the system, when stimulated by an external event.

«Required» (GTN 1-9), as applied to «technology» or «software», refers to only that portion of «technology» or «software» which is peculiarly responsible for achieving or extending the controlled performance levels, characteristics or functions. Such «required»«technology» or «software» may be shared by different goods.

«Resolution» (2) means the least increment of a measuring device; on digital instruments, the least significant bit (ref. ANSI B-89.1.12).

«Robot» (2 8) means a manipulation mechanism, which may be of the continuous path or of the point-to-point variety, may use sensors, and has all the following characteristics:

a. Is multifunctional;

b. Is capable of positioning or orienting material, parts, tools or special devices through variable movements in three dimensional space;

c. Incorporates three or more closed or open loop servo-devices which may include stepping motors; and

d. Has «user accessible programmability» by means of teach/playback method or by means of an electronic computer which may be a programmable logic controller, i.e., without mechanical intervention.

N.B.: The above definition does not include the following devices:

1.Manipulation mechanisms which are only manually/teleoperator controllable;

2.Fixed sequence manipulation mechanisms which are automated moving devices, operating according to mechanically fixed programmed motions. The programme is mechanically limited by fixed stops, such as pins or cams. The sequence of motions and the selection of paths or angles are not variable or changeable by mechanical, electronic or electrical means;

3.Mechanically controlled variable sequence manipulation mechanisms which are automated moving devices, operating according to mechanically fixed programmed motions. The programme is mechanically limited by fixed, but adjustable stops, such as pins or cams. The sequence of motions and the selection of paths or angles are variable within the fixed programme pattern. Variations or modifications of the programme pattern (e.g., changes of pins or exchanges of cams) in one or more motion axes are accomplished only through mechanical operations;

4.Non-servo-controlled variable sequence manipulation mechanisms which are automated moving devices, operating according to mechanically fixed programmed motions. The programme is variable but the sequence proceeds only by the binary signal from mechanically fixed electrical binary devices or adjustable stops;

5.Stacker cranes defined as Cartesian coordinate manipulator systems manufactured as an integral part of a vertical array of storage bins and designed to access the contents of those bins for storage or retrieval.

«Rotary atomisation» (1) means a process to reduce a stream or pool of molten metal to droplets to a diameter of 500 micrometre or less by centrifugal force.

«Roving» (1) is a bundle (typically 12-120) of approximately parallel «strands».

N.B.:«Strand» is a bundle of «monofilaments» (typically over 200) arranged approximately parallel.

«Run-out» (2) (out-of-true running) means radial displacement in one revolution of the main spindle measured in a plane perpendicular to the spindle axis at a point on the external or internal revolving surface to be tested (Reference: ISO 230/1 1986, paragraph 5.61).

«Scale factor» (gyro or accelerometer) (7) means the ratio of change in output to a change in the input intended to be measured. Scale factor is generally evaluated as the slope of the straight line that can be fitted by the method of least squares to input-output data obtained by varying the input cyclically over the input range.

«Settling time» (3) means the time required for the output to come within one-half bit of the final value when switching between any two levels of the converter.

«SHPL» is equivalent to «super high power laser».

«Signal analysers» (3) means apparatus capable of measuring and displaying basic properties of the single-frequency components of multi-frequency signals.

«Signal processing» (3 4 5 6) means the processing of externally derived information-bearing signals by algorithms such as time compression, filtering, extraction, selection, correlation, convolution or transformations between domains (e.g., fast Fourier transform or Walsh transform).

«Software» (GSN All) means a collection of one or more «programmes» or «microprogrammes» fixed in any tangible medium of expression.

N.B.:«Microprogramme» means a sequence of elementary instructions, maintained in a special storage, the execution of which is initiated by the introduction of its reference instruction into an instruction register.

«Source code» (or source language) (4 6 7 9) is a convenient expression of one or more processes which may be turned by a programming system into equipment executable form («object code» (or object language)).

«Spacecraft» (7 9) means active and passive satellites and space probes.

«Space qualified» (3 6) refers to products designed, manufactured and tested to meet the special electrical, mechanical or environmental requirements for use in the launch and deployment of satellites or high altitude flight systems operating at altitudes of 100 km or higher.

«Special fissile material» (0) means plutonium-239, uranium-233, «uranium enriched in the isotopes 235 or 233», and any material containing the foregoing.

«Specific modulus» (0 1 9) is Young's modulus in pascals, equivalent to N/m2 divided by specific weight in N/m3, measured at a temperature of (296 ± 2) K ((23 ± 2) °C) and a relative humidity of (50 ± 5) %.

«Specific tensile strength» (0 1 9) is ultimate tensile strength in pascals, equivalent to N/m2 divided by specific weight in N/m3, measured at a temperature of (296 ± 2) K ((23 ± 2) °C) and a relative humidity of (50 ± 5) %.

«Splat Quenching» (1) means a process to «solidify rapidly» a molten metal stream impinging upon a chilled block, forming a flake-like product.

N.B.:«Solidify rapidly» solidification of molten material at cooling rates exceeding 1000 K/s.

«Spread spectrum» (5) means the technique whereby energy in a relatively narrow-band communication channel is spread over a much wider energy spectrum.

«Spread spectrum» radar (6) - see «Radar spread spectrum»

«Stability» (7) means the standard deviation (1 sigma) of the variation of a particular parameter from its calibrated value measured under stable temperature conditions. This can be expressed as a function of time.

«States (not) Party to the Chemical Weapon Convention» (1) are those states for which the Convention on the Prohibition of the Development, Production, Stockpiling and Use of Chemical Weapons has (not) entered into force. (See www.opcw.org)

«Substrate» (3) means a sheet of base material with or without an interconnection pattern and on which or within which «discrete components» or integrated circuits or both can be located.

N.B. 1:«Discrete component»: a separately packaged «circuit element» with its own external connections.

N.B. 2:«Circuit element»: a single active or passive functional part of an electronic circuit, such as one diode, one transistor, one resistor, one capacitor, etc.

«Substrate blanks» (6) means monolithic compounds with dimensions suitable for the production of optical elements such as mirrors or optical windows.

«Sub-unit of toxin» (1) is a structurally and functionally discrete component of a whole «toxin».

«Superalloys» (2 9) means nickel-, cobalt- or iron-base alloys having strengths superior to any alloys in the AISI 300 series at temperatures over 922 K (649 °C) under severe environmental and operating conditions.

«Superconductive» (1 3 6 8) means materials, i.e., metals, alloys or compounds, which can lose all electrical resistance, i.e., which can attain infinite electrical conductivity and carry very large electrical currents without Joule heating.

N.B.: The «superconductive» state of a material is individually characterised by a «critical temperature», a critical magnetic field, which is a function of temperature, and a critical current density which is, however, a function of both magnetic field and temperature.

«Super High Power Laser» («SHPL») (6) means a «laser» capable of delivering (the total or any portion of) the output energy exceeding 1 kJ within 50 ms or having an average or CW power exceeding 20 kW.

«Superplastic forming» (1 2) means a deformation process using heat for metals that are normally characterised by low values of elongation (less than 20 %) at the breaking point as determined at room temperature by conventional tensile strength testing, in order to achieve elongations during processing which are at least 2 times those values.

«Symmetric algorithm» (5) means a cryptographic algorithm using an identical key for both encryption and decryption.

N.B.: A common use of «symmetric algorithms» is confidentiality of data.

«System tracks» (6) means processed, correlated (fusion of radar target data to flight plan position) and updated aircraft flight position report available to the Air Traffic Control centre controllers.

«Systolic array computer» (4) means a computer where the flow and modification of the data is dynamically controllable at the logic gate level by the user.

«Tape» (1) is a material constructed of interlaced or unidirectional «monofilaments», «strands», «rovings», «tows», or «yarns», etc., usually preimpregnated with resin.

N.B.:«Strand» is a bundle of «monofilaments» (typically over 200) arranged approximately parallel.

«Technology» (GTN NTN All) means specific information necessary for the «development», «production» or «use» of goods. This information takes the form of «technical data» or «technical assistance».

N.B. 1:«Technical assistance» may take forms such as instructions, skills, training, working knowledge and consulting services and may involve the transfer of «technical data».

N.B. 2:«Technical data» may take forms such as blueprints, plans, diagrams, models, formulae, tables, engineering designs and specifications, manuals and instructions written or recorded on other media or devices such as disk, tape, read-only memories.

«Tilting spindle» (2) means a tool-holding spindle which alters, during the machining process, the angular position of its centre line with respect to any other axis.

«Time constant» (6) is the time taken from the application of a light stimulus for the current increment to reach a value of 1-1/e times the final value (i.e., 63 % of the final value).

«Total control of flight» ( 7) means an automated control of «aircraft» state variables and flight path to meet mission objectives responding to real time changes in data regarding objectives, hazards or other «aircraft».

«Total digital transfer rate» (5) means the number of bits, including line coding, overhead and so forth per unit time passing between corresponding equipment in a digital transmission system.

N.B.: See also «digital transfer rate».

«Tow» (1) is a bundle of «monofilaments», usually approximately parallel.

«Toxins» (1 2) means toxins in the form of deliberately isolated preparations or mixtures, no matter how produced, other than toxins present as contaminants of other materials such as pathological specimens, crops, foodstuffs or seed stocks of «microorganisms».

«Transfer laser» (6) means a «laser» in which the lasing species is excited through the transfer of energy by collision of a non-lasing atom or molecule with a lasing atom or molecule species.

«Tunable» (6) means the ability of a «laser» to produce a continuous output at all wavelengths over a range of several «laser» transitions. A line selectable «laser» produces discrete wavelengths within one «laser» transition and is not considered «tunable».

«Unmanned Aerial Vehicle» («UAV») (9) means any aircraft capable of initiating flight and sustaining controlled flight and navigation without any human presence on board.

«Uranium enriched in the isotopes 235 or 233» (0) means uranium containing the isotopes 235 or 233, or both, in an amount such that the abundance ratio of the sum of these isotopes to the isotope 238 is more than the ratio of the isotope 235 to the isotope 238 occurring in nature (isotopic ratio 0,71 per cent).

«Use» (GTN NTN All) means operation, installation (including on-site installation), maintenance (checking), repair, overhaul and refurbishing.

«User accessible programmability» (6) means the facility allowing a user to insert, modify or replace «programmes» by means other than:

a. A physical change in wiring or interconnections; or

b. The setting of function controls including entry of parameters.

«Vaccine» (1) is a medicinal product in a pharmaceutical formulation licensed by, or having marketing or clinical trial authorisation from, the regulatory authorities of either the country of manufacture or of use, which is intended to stimulate a protective immunological response in humans or animals in order to prevent disease in those to whom or to which it is administered.

«Vacuum Atomisation» (1) means a process to reduce a molten stream of metal to droplets of a diameter of 500 micrometre or less by the rapid evolution of a dissolved gas upon exposure to a vacuum.

«Variable geometry airfoils» (7) means the use of trailing edge flaps or tabs, or leading edge slats or pivoted nose droop, the position of which can be controlled in flight.

«Yarn» (1) is a bundle of twisted «strands».

N.B.:«Strand» is a bundle of «monofilaments» (typically over 200) arranged approximately parallel.

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS ANNEX

An acronym or abbreviation, when used as a defined term, will be found in «Definitions of Terms used in this Annex».

Acronym or abbreviation | Meaning |

ABEC | Annular Bearing Engineers Committee |

AGMA | American Gear Manufacturers' Association |

AHRS | attitude and heading reference systems |

AISI | American Iron and Steel Institute |

ALU | arithmetic logic unit |

ANSI | American National Standards Institute |

ASTM | the American Society for Testing and Materials |

ATC | air traffic control |

AVLIS | atomic vapour laser isotope separation |

CAD | computer-aided-design |

CAS | Chemical Abstracts Service |

CCITT | International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee |

CDU | control and display unit |

CEP | circular error probable |

CNTD | controlled nucleation thermal deposition |

CRISLA | chemical reaction by isotope selective laser activation |

CVD | chemical vapour deposition |

CW | chemical warfare |

CW (for lasers) | continuous wave |

DME | distance measuring equipment |

DS | directionally solidified |

EB-PVD | electron beam physical vapour deposition |

EBU | European Broadcasting Union |

ECM | electro-chemical machining |

ECR | electron cyclotron resonance |

EDM | electrical discharge machines |

EEPROMS | electrically erasable programmable read only memory |

EIA | Electronic Industries Association |

EMC | electromagnetic compatibility |

ETSI | European Telecommunications Standards Institute |

FFT | Fast Fourier Transform |

GLONASS | global navigation satellite system |

GPS | global positioning system |

HBT | hetero-bipolar transistors |

HDDR | high density digital recording |

HEMT | high electron mobility transistors |

ICAO | International Civil Aviation Organisation |

IEC | International Electro-technical Commission |

IEEE | Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers |

IFOV | instantaneous-field-of-view |

ILS | instrument landing system |

IRIG | inter-range instrumentation group |

ISAR | inverse synthetic aperture radar |

ISO | International for Standardization |

ITU | International Telecommunication Union |

JIS | Japanese Industrial Standard |

JT | Joule-Thomson |

LIDAR | light detection and ranging |

LRU | line replaceable unit |

MAC | message authentication code |

Mach | ratio of speed of an object to speed of sound (after Ernst Mach) |

MLIS | molecular laser isotopic separation |

MLS | microwave landing systems |

MOCVD | metal organic chemical vapour deposition |

MRI | magnetic resonance imaging |

MTBF | mean-time-between-failures |

Mtops | million theoretical operations per second |

MTTF | mean-time-to-failure |

NBC | Nuclear, Biological and Chemical |

NDT | non-destructive test |

PAR | precision approach radar |

PIN | personal identification number |

ppm | parts per million |

PSD | power spectral density |

QAM | quadrature-amplitude-modulation |

RF | radio frequency |

SACMA | Suppliers of Advanced Composite Materials Association |

SAR | synthetic aperture radar |

SC | single crystal |

SLAR | sidelooking airborne radar |

SMPTE | Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers |

SRA | shop replaceable assembly |

SRAM | static random access memory |

SRM | SACMA Recommended Methods |

SSB | single sideband |

SSR | secondary surveillance radar |

TCSEC | trusted computer system evaluation criteria |

TIR | total indicated reading |

UV | ultraviolet |

UTS | ultimate tensile strength |

VOR | very high frequency omni-directional range |

YAG | yttrium/aluminium garnet |

CATEGORY 0

NUCLEAR MATERIALS, FACILITIES, AND EQUIPMENT

0ASystems, Equipment and Components

0A001«Nuclear reactors» and specially designed or prepared equipment and components therefor, as follows:

a.«Nuclear reactors» capable of operation so as to maintain a controlled self-sustaining fission chain reaction;

b. Metal vessels, or major shop-fabricated parts therefor, specially designed or prepared to contain the core of a «nuclear reactor», including the reactor vessel head for a reactor pressure vessel;

c. Manipulative equipment specially designed or prepared for inserting or removing fuel in a «nuclear reactor»;

d. Control rods specially designed or prepared for the control of the fission process in a «nuclear reactor», support or suspension structures therefor, rod drive mechanisms and rod guide tubes;

e. Pressure tubes specially designed or prepared to contain fuel elements and the primary coolant in a «nuclear reactor» at an operating pressure in excess of 5,1 MPa;

f. Zirconium metal and alloys in the form of tubes or assemblies of tubes in which the ratio of hafnium to zirconium is less than 1:500 parts by weight, specially designed or prepared for use in a «nuclear reactor»;

g. Coolant pumps specially designed or prepared for circulating the primary coolant of «nuclear reactors»;

h.«Nuclear reactor internals» specially designed or prepared for use in a «nuclear reactor», including support columns for the core, fuel channels, thermal shields, baffles, core grid plates, and diffuser plates;

Note: In 0A001.h. «nuclear reactor internals» means any major structure within a reactor vessel which has one or more functions such as supporting the core, maintaining fuel alignment, directing primary coolant flow, providing radiation shields for the reactor vessel, and guiding in-core instrumentation.

i. Heat exchangers (steam generators) specially designed or prepared for use in the primary coolant circuit of a «nuclear reactor»;

j. Neutron detection and measuring instruments specially designed or prepared for determining neutron flux levels within the core of a «nuclear reactor».

0BTest, Inspection and Production Equipment

0B001Plant for the separation of isotopes of «natural uranium», «depleted uranium» and «special fissile materials», and specially designed or prepared equipment and components therefor, as follows:

a. Plant specially designed for separating isotopes of «natural uranium», «depleted uranium», and «special fissile materials», as follows:

1. Gas centrifuge separation plant;

2. Gaseous diffusion separation plant;

3. Aerodynamic separation plant;

4. Chemical exchange separation plant;

5. Ion-exchange separation plant;

6. Atomic vapour «laser» isotope separation (AVLIS) plant;

7. Molecular «laser» isotope separation (MLIS) plant;

8. Plasma separation plant;

9. Electro magnetic separation plant;

b. Gas centrifuges and assemblies and components, specially designed or prepared for gas centrifuge separation process, as follows:

Note: In 0B001.b. «high strength-to-density ratio material» means any of the following:

a.Maraging steel capable of an ultimate tensile strength of 2050 MPa or more;

b.Aluminium alloys capable of an ultimate tensile strength of 460 MPa or more; or

c.«Fibrous or filamentary materials» with a «specific modulus» of more than 3,18 × 10 6 m and a «specific tensile strength» greater than 76,2 × 10 3 m;

1. Gas centrifuges;

2. Complete rotor assemblies;

3. Rotor tube cylinders with a wall thickness of 12 mm or less, a diameter of between 75 mm and 400 mm, made from «high strength-to-density ratio materials»;

4. Rings or bellows with a wall thickness of 3 mm or less and a diameter of between 75 mm and 400 mm and designed to give local support to a rotor tube or to join a number together, made from «high strength-to-density ratio materials»;

5. Baffles of between 75 mm and 400 mm diameter for mounting inside a rotor tube, made from «high strength-to-density ratio materials»;

6. Top or bottom caps of between 75 mm and 400 mm diameter to fit the ends of a rotor tube, made from «high strength-to-density ratio materials»;

7. Magnetic suspension bearings consisting of an annular magnet suspended within a housing made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6» containing a damping medium and having the magnet coupling with a pole piece or second magnet fitted to the top cap of the rotor;

8. Specially prepared bearings comprising a pivot-cup assembly mounted on a damper;

9. Molecular pumps comprised of cylinders having internally machined or extruded helical grooves and internally machined bores;

10. Ring-shaped motor stators for multiphase AC hysteresis (or reluctance) motors for synchronous operation within a vacuum in the frequency range of 600 to 2000 Hz and a power range of 50 to 1000 Volt-Amps;

11. Centrifuge housing/recipients to contain the rotor tube assembly of a gas centrifuge, consisting of a rigid cylinder of wall thickness up to 30 mm with precision machined ends and made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6»;

12. Scoops consisting of tubes of up to 12 mm internal diameter for the extraction of UF6 gas from within a centrifuge rotor tube by a Pitot tube action, made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6»;

13. Frequency changers (converters or inverters) specially designed or prepared to supply motor stators for gas centrifuge enrichment, having all of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

a. Multiphase output of 600 to 2000 Hz;

b. Frequency control better than 0,1 %;

c. Harmonic distortion of less than 2 %; and

d. An efficiency greater than 80 %;

c. Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for gaseous diffusion separation process, as follows:

1. Gaseous diffusion barriers made of porous metallic, polymer or ceramic «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6» with a pore size of 10 to 100 nm, a thickness of 5 mm or less, and, for tubular forms, a diameter of 25 mm or less;

2. Gaseous diffuser housings made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6»;

3. Compressors (positive displacement, centrifugal and axial flow types) or gas blowers with a suction volume capacity of 1 m3/min or more of UF6, and discharge pressure up to 666,7 kPa, made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6»;

4. Rotary shaft seals for compressors or blowers specified in 0B001.c.3. and designed for a buffer gas in-leakage rate of less than 1000 cm3/min.;

5. Heat exchangers made of aluminium, copper, nickel, or alloys containing more than 60 per cent nickel, or combinations of these metals as clad tubes, designed to operate at sub-atmospheric pressure with a leak rate that limits the pressure rise to less than 10 Pa per hour under a pressure differential of 100 kPa;

6. Bellow valves made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF», with a diameter of 40 mm to 1500 mm;

d. Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for aerodynamic separation process, as follows:

1. Separation nozzles consisting of slit-shaped, curved channels having a radius of curvature less than 1 mm, resistant to corrosion by UF6, and having a knife-edge contained within the nozzle which separates the gas flowing through the nozzle into two streams;

2. Tangential inlet flow-driven cylindrical or conical tubes, (vortex tubes), made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6» with a diameter of between 0,5 cm and 4 cm and a length to diameter ratio of 20:1 or less and with one or more tangential inlets;

3. Compressors (positive displacement, centrifugal and axial flow types) or gas blowers with a suction volume capacity of 2 m3/min or more, made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6», and rotary shaft seals therefor;

4. Heat exchangers made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6»;

5. Aerodynamic separation element housings, made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6» to contain vortex tubes or separation nozzles;

6. Bellows valves made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6», with a diameter of 40 mm to 1500 mm;

7. Process systems for separating UF6 from carrier gas (hydrogen or helium) to 1 ppm UF6 content or less, including:

a. Cryogenic heat exchangers and cryoseparators capable of temperatures of 153 K (– 120 °C) or less;

b. Cryogenic refrigeration units capable of temperatures of 153 K (– 120 °C) or less;

c. Separation nozzle or vortex tube units for the separation of UF6 from carrier gas;

d. UF6 cold traps capable of temperatures of 253 K (– 20 °C) or less;

e. Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for chemical exchange separation process, as follows:

1. Fast-exchange liquid-liquid pulse columns with stage residence time of 30 seconds or less and resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid (e.g. made of or protected by suitable plastic materials such as fluorocarbon polymers or glass);

2. Fast-exchange liquid-liquid centrifugal contactors with stage residence time of 30 seconds or less and resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid (e.g. made of or protected by suitable plastic materials such as fluorocarbon polymers or glass);

3. Electrochemical reduction cells resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid solutions, for reduction of uranium from one valence state to another;

4. Electrochemical reduction cells feed equipment to take U+4 from the organic stream and, for those parts in contact with the process stream, made of or protected by suitable materials (e.g. glass, fluorocarbon polymers, polyphenyl sulphate, polyether sulfone and resin-impregnated graphite);

5. Feed preparation systems for producing high purity uranium chloride solution consisting of dissolution, solvent extraction and/or ion exchange equipment for purification and electrolytic cells for reducing the uranium U+6 or U+4 to U+3;

6. Uranium oxidation systems for oxidation of U+3 to U+4;

f. Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for ion-exchange separation process, as follows:

1. Fast reacting ion-exchange resins, pellicular or porous macro-reticulated resins in which the active chemical exchange groups are limited to a coating on the surface of an inactive porous support structure, and other composite structures in any suitable form, including particles or fibres, with diameters of 0,2 mm or less, resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid and designed to have an exchange rate half-time of less than 10 seconds and capable of operating at temperatures in the range of 373 K (100 °C) to 473 K (200 °C);

2. Ion exchange columns (cylindrical) with a diameter greater than 1000 mm, made of or protected by materials resistant to concentrated hydrochloric acid (e.g. titanium or fluorocarbon plastics) and capable of operating at temperatures in the range of 373 K (100 °C) to 473 K (200 °C) and pressures above 0,7 MPa;

3. Ion exchange reflux systems (chemical or electrochemical oxidation or reduction systems) for regeneration of the chemical reducing or oxidizing agents used in ion exchange enrichment cascades;

g. Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for atomic vapour «laser» isotope separation process (AVLIS), as follows:

1. High power strip or scanning electron beam guns with a delivered power of more than 2,5 kW/cm for use in uranium vaporization systems;

2. Liquid uranium metal handling systems for molten uranium or uranium alloys, consisting of crucibles, made of or protected by suitable corrosion and heat resistant materials (e.g. tantalum, yttria-coated graphite, graphite coated with other rare earth oxides or mixtures thereof), and cooling equipment for the crucibles;

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2A225.

3. Product and tails collector systems made of or lined with materials resistant to the heat and corrosion of uranium metal vapour or liquid, such as yttria-coated graphite or tantalum;

4. Separator module housings (cylindrical or rectangular vessels) for containing the uranium metal vapour source, the electron beam gun and the product and tails collectors;

5.«Lasers» or «laser» systems for the separation of uranium isotopes with a spectrum frequency stabiliser for operation over extended periods of time;

N.B.: SEE ALSO 6A005 AND 6A205.

h. Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for molecular «laser» isotope separation process (MLIS) or chemical reaction by isotope selective laser activation (CRISLA), as follows:

1. Supersonic expansion nozzles for cooling mixtures of UF6 and carrier gas to 150 K (– 123 °C) or less and made from «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6»;

2. Uranium pentafluoride (UF5) product collectors consisting of filter, impact, or cyclone-type collectors or combinations thereof, and made of «materials resistant to corrosion by UF5/UF6»;

3. Compressors made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6», and rotary shaft seals therefor;

4. Equipment for fluorinating UF5 (solid) to UF6 (gas);

5. Process systems for separating UF6 from carrier gas (e.g. nitrogen or argon) including:

a. Cryogenic heat exchangers and cryoseparators capable of temperatures of 153 K (– 120 °C) or less;

b. Cryogenic refrigeration units capable of temperatures of 153 K (– 120 °C) or less;

c. UF6 cold traps capable of temperatures of 253 K (– 20 °C) or less;

6.«Lasers» or «laser» systems for the separation of uranium isotopes with a spectrum frequency stabiliser for operation over extended periods of time;

N.B.: SEE ALSO 6A005 AND 6A205.

i. Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for plasma separation process, as follows:

1. Microwave power sources and antennae for producing or accelerating ions, with an output frequency greater than 30 GHz and mean power output greater than 50 kW;

2. Radio frequency ion excitation coils for frequencies of more than 100 kHz and capable of handling more than 40 kW mean power;

3. Uranium plasma generation systems;

4. Liquid metal handling systems for molten uranium or uranium alloys, consisting of crucibles, made of or protected by suitable corrosion and heat resistant materials (e.g. tantalum, yttria-coated graphite, graphite coated with other rare earth oxides or mixtures thereof), and cooling equipment for the crucibles;

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2A225.

5. Product and tails collectors made of or protected by materials resistant to the heat and corrosion of uranium vapour such as yttria-coated graphite or tantalum;

6. Separator module housings (cylindrical) for containing the uranium plasma source, radio-frequency drive coil and the product and tails collectors and made of a suitable non-magnetic material (e.g. stainless steel);

j. Equipment and components, specially designed or prepared for electromagnetic separation process, as follows:

1. Ion sources, single or multiple, consisting of a vapour source, ioniser, and beam accelerator made of suitable non-magnetic materials (e.g. graphite, stainless steel, or copper) and capable of providing a total ion beam current of 50 mA or greater;

2. Ion collector plates for collection of enriched or depleted uranium ion beams, consisting of two or more slits and pockets and made of suitable non-magnetic materials (e.g. graphite or stainless steel);

3. Vacuum housings for uranium electromagnetic separators made of non-magnetic materials (e.g. stainless steel) and designed to operate at pressures of 0,1 Pa or lower;

4. Magnet pole pieces with a diameter greater than 2 m;

5. High voltage power supplies for ion sources, having all of the following characteristics:

a. Capable of continuous operation;

b. Output voltage of 20000 V or greater;

c. Output current of 1 A or greater; and

d. Voltage regulation of better than 0,01 % over a period of 8 hours;

N.B.: SEE ALSO 3A227.

6. Magnet power supplies (high power, direct current) having all of the following characteristics:

a. Capable of continuous operation with a current output of 500 A or greater at a voltage of 100 V or greater; and

b. Current or voltage regulation better than 0,01 % over a period of 8 hours.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 3A226.

0B002Specially designed or prepared auxiliary systems, equipment and components, as follows, for isotope separation plant specified in 0B001, made of or protected by «materials resistant to corrosion by UF6»:

a. Feed autoclaves, ovens or systems used for passing UF6 to the enrichment process;

b. Desublimers or cold traps, used to remove UF6 from the enrichment process for subsequent transfer upon heating;

c. Product and tails stations for transferring UF6 into containers;

d. Liquefaction or solidification stations used to remove UF6 from the enrichment process by compressing, cooling and converting UF6 to a liquid or solid form;

e. Piping systems and header systems specially designed for handling UF6 within gaseous diffusion, centrifuge or aerodynamic cascades;

f.

1. Vacuum manifolds or vacuum headers having a suction capacity of 5 m3/minute or more; or

2. Vacuum pumps specially designed for use in UF6 bearing atmospheres;

g. UF6 mass spectrometers/ion sources specially designed or prepared for taking on-line samples of feed, product or tails from UF6 gas streams and having all of the following characteristics:

1. Unit resolution for mass of more than 320 amu;

2. Ion sources constructed of or lined with nichrome or monel, or nickel plated;

3. Electron bombardment ionisation sources; and

4. Collector system suitable for isotopic analysis.

0B003Plant for the conversion of uranium and equipment specially designed or prepared therefor, as follows:

a. Systems for the conversion of uranium ore concentrates to UO3;

b. Systems for the conversion of UO3 to UF6;

c. Systems for the conversion of UO3 to UO2;

d. Systems for the conversion of UO2 to UF4;

e. Systems for the conversion of UF4 to UF6;

f. Systems for the conversion of UF4 to uranium metal;

g. Systems for the conversion of UF6 to UO2;

h. Systems for the conversion of UF6 to UF4;

i. Systems for the conversion of UO2 to UCl4.

0B004Plant for the production or concentration of heavy water, deuterium and deuterium compounds and specially designed or prepared equipment and components therefor, as follows:

a. Plant for the production of heavy water, deuterium or deuterium compounds, as follows:

1. Water-hydrogen sulphide exchange plants;

2. Ammonia-hydrogen exchange plants;

b. Equipment and components, as follows:

1. Water-hydrogen sulphide exchange towers fabricated from fine carbon steel (e.g. ASTM A516) with diameters of 6 m to 9 m, capable of operating at pressures greater than or equal to 2 MPa and with a corrosion allowance of 6 mm or greater;

2. Single stage, low head (i.e. 0,2 MPa) centrifugal blowers or compressors for hydrogen sulphide gas circulation (i.e. gas containing more than 70 % H2S) with a throughput capacity greater than or equal to 56 m3/second when operating at pressures greater than or equal to 1,8 MPa suction and having seals designed for wet H2S service;

3. Ammonia-hydrogen exchange towers greater than or equal to 35 m in height with diameters of 1,5 m to 2,5 m capable of operating at pressures greater than 15 MPa;

4. Tower internals, including stage contactors, and stage pumps, including those which are submersible, for heavy water production utilising the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process;

5. Ammonia crackers with operating pressures greater than or equal to 3 MPa for heavy water production utilizing the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process;

6. Infrared absorption analysers capable of on-line hydrogen/deuterium ratio analysis where deuterium concentrations are equal to or greater than 90 %;

7. Catalytic burners for the conversion of enriched deuterium gas into heavy water utilising the ammonia-hydrogen exchange process;

8. Complete heavy water upgrade systems, or columns therefor, for the upgrade of heavy water to reactor-grade deuterium concentration.

0B005Plant specially designed for the fabrication of «nuclear reactor» fuel elements and specially designed or prepared equipment therefor.

Note: A plant for the fabrication of «nuclear reactor» fuel elements includes equipment which:

a.Normally comes into direct contact with or directly processes or controls the production flow of nuclear materials;

b.Seals the nuclear materials within the cladding;

c.Checks the integrity of the cladding or the seal; or

d.Checks the finish treatment of the sealed fuel.

0B006Plant for the reprocessing of irradiated «nuclear reactor» fuel elements, and specially designed or prepared equipment and components therefor.

Note: 0B006 includes:

a.Plant for the reprocessing of irradiated «nuclear reactor» fuel elements including equipment and components which normally come into direct contact with and directly control the irradiated fuel and the major nuclear material and fission product processing streams;

b.Fuel element chopping or shredding machines, i.e. remotely operated equipment to cut, chop, shred or shear irradiated «nuclear reactor» fuel assemblies, bundles or rods;

c.Dissolvers, critically safe tanks (e.g. small diameter, annular or slab tanks) specially designed or prepared for the dissolution of irradiated «nuclear reactor» fuel, which are capable of withstanding hot, highly corrosive liquids, and which can be remotely loaded and maintained;

d.Counter-current solvent extractors and ion-exchange processing equipment specially designed or prepared for use in a plant for the reprocessing of irradiated «natural uranium», «depleted uranium» or «special fissile materials»;

e.Holding or storage vessels specially designed to be critically safe and resistant to the corrosive effects of nitric acid;

Note: Holding or storage vessels may have the following features:

1.Walls or internal structures with a boron equivalent (calculated for all constituent elements as defined in the note to 0C004) of at least two per cent;

2.A maximum diameter of 175 mm for cylindrical vessels; or

3.A maximum width of 75 mm for either a slab or annular vessel.

f.Process control instrumentation specially designed or prepared for monitoring or controlling the reprocessing of irradiated «natural uranium», «depleted uranium» or «special fissile materials».

0B007Plant for the conversion of plutonium and equipment specially designed or prepared therefor, as follows:

a. Systems for the conversion of plutonium nitrate to oxide;

b. Systems for plutonium metal production.

0CMaterials

0C001«Natural uranium» or «depleted uranium» or thorium in the form of metal, alloy, chemical compound or concentrate and any other material containing one or more of the foregoing;

Note: 0C001 does not control the following:

a.Four grammes or less of «natural uranium» or «depleted uranium» when contained in a sensing component in instruments;

b.«Depleted uranium» specially fabricated for the following civil non-nuclear applications:

1.Shielding;

2.Packaging;

3.Ballasts having a mass not greater than 100 kg;

4.Counter-weights having a mass not greater than 100 kg;

c.Alloys containing less than 5 % thorium;

d.Ceramic products containing thorium, which have been manufactured for non-nuclear use.

0C002«Special fissile materials»

Note: 0C002 does not control four «effective grammes» or less when contained in a sensing component in instruments.

0C003Deuterium, heavy water (deuterium oxide) and other compounds of deuterium, and mixtures and solutions containing deuterium, in which the isotopic ratio of deuterium to hydrogen exceeds 1:5000.

0C004Graphite, nuclear grade, having a purity level of less than 5 parts per million «boron equivalent» and with a density greater than 1,5 g/cm3.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1C107.

Note 1: 0C004 does not control the following:

a.Manufactures of graphite having a mass less than 1 kg, other than those specially designed or prepared for use in a nuclear reactor;

b.Graphite powder.

Note 2: In 0C004, «boron equivalent» (BE) is defined as the sum of BE z for impurities (excluding BE carbon since carbon is not considered an impurity) including boron, where:

BE z (ppm) = CF × concentration of element Z in ppm;

where CF is the conversion factor = (σ Z A B )/(σ B A Z )

and σ B and σ Z are the thermal neutron capture cross sections (in barns) for naturally occurring boron and element Z respectively; and A B and A Z are the atomic masses of naturally occurring boron and element Z respectively.

0C005Specially prepared compounds or powders for the manufacture of gaseous diffusion barriers, resistant to corrosion by UF6 (e.g. nickel or alloy containing 60 weight per cent or more nickel, aluminium oxide and fully fluorinated hydrocarbon polymers), having a purity of 99,9 weight per cent or more and a mean particle size of less than 10 micrometres measured by American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B330 standard and a high degree of particle size uniformity.

0DSoftware

0D001«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development», «production» or «use» of goods specified in this Category.

0ETechnology

0E001«Technology» according to the Nuclear Technology Note for the «development», «production» or «use» of goods specified in this Category.

CATEGORY 1

MATERIALS, CHEMICALS, «MICROORGANISMS» AND «TOXINS»

1ASystems, Equipment and Components

1A001Components made from fluorinated compounds, as follows:

a. Seals, gaskets, sealants or fuel bladders specially designed for «aircraft» or aerospace use made from more than 50 % by weight of any of the materials specified in 1C009.b. or 1C009.c.;

b. Piezoelectric polymers and copolymers made from vinylidene fluoride materials specified in 1C009.a.:

1. In sheet or film form; and

2. With a thickness exceeding 200 μm;

c. Seals, gaskets, valve seats, bladders or diaphragms made from fluoroelastomers containing at least one vinylether group as a constitutional unit, specially designed for «aircraft», aerospace or «missile» use.

Note: In 1A001.c., «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems.

1A002«Composite» structures or laminates, having any of the following:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1A202, 9A010 and 9A110

a. An organic «matrix» and made from materials specified in 1C010.c., 1C010.d. or 1C010.e.; or

b. A metal or carbon «matrix» and made from:

1. Carbon «fibrous or filamentary materials» with:

a. A «specific modulus» exceeding 10,15 × 106 m; and

b. A «specific tensile strength» exceeding 17,7 × 104 m; or

2. Materials specified in 1C010.c.

Note 1: 1A002 does not control composite structures or laminates made from epoxy resin impregnated carbon «fibrous or filamentary materials» for the repair of aircraft structures or laminates, provided the size does not exceed 1 m 2 .

Note 2: 1A002 does not control finished or semi-finished items specially designed for purely civilian applications as follows:

a.Sporting goods;

b.Automotive industry;

c.Machine tool industry;

d.Medical applications.

1A003Manufactures of non-fluorinated polymeric substances specified in 1C008.a.3. in film, sheet, tape or ribbon form with either of the following characteristics:

a. With a thickness exceeding 0,254 mm; or

b. Coated or laminated with carbon, graphite, metals or magnetic substances.

Note: 1A003 does not control manufactures when coated or laminated with copper and designed for the production of electronic printed circuit boards.

1A004Protective and detection equipment and components, other than those specified in military goods controls, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B351 AND 2B352.

a. Gas masks, filter canisters and decontamination equipment therefor designed or modified for defence against biological agents or radioactive materials «adapted for use in war» or chemical warfare (CW) agents and specially designed components therefor;

b. Protective suits, gloves and shoes specially designed or modified for defence against biological agents or radioactive materials «adapted for use in war» or chemical warfare (CW) agents;

c. Nuclear, biological and chemical (NBC) detection systems specially designed or modified for detection or identification of biological agents or radioactive materials «adapted for use in war» or chemical warfare (CW) agents and specially designed components therefor.

Note: 1A004 does not control:

a.Personal radiation monitoring dosimeters;

b.Equipment limited by design or function to protect against hazards specific to civil industries, such as mining, quarrying, agriculture, pharmaceuticals, medical, veterinary, environmental, waste management, or to the food industry.

1A005Body armour, and specially designed components therefor, other than those manufactured to military standards or specifications or to their equivalents in performance.

N.B.: SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.

N.B.: For «fibrous or filamentary materials» used in the manufacture of body armour, see 1C010.

Note 1: 1A005 does not control body armour or protective garments when accompanying their user for the user's own personal protection.

Note 2: 1A005 does not control body armour designed to provide frontal protection only from both fragment and blast from non-military explosive devices.

1A102Resaturated pyrolized carbon-carbon components designed for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

1A202Composite structures, other than those specified in 1A002, in the form of tubes and having both of the following characteristics:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A010 AND 9A110.

a. An inside diameter of between 75 mm and 400 mm; and

b. Made with any of the «fibrous or filamentary materials» specified in 1C010.a. or b. or 1C210.a. or with carbon prepreg materials specified in 1C210.c.

1A225Platinized catalysts specially designed or prepared for promoting the hydrogen isotope exchange reaction between hydrogen and water for the recovery of tritium from heavy water or for the production of heavy water.

1A226Specialised packings which may be used in separating heavy water from ordinary water, having both of the following characteristics:

a. Made of phosphor bronze mesh chemically treated to improve wettability; and

b. Designed to be used in vacuum distillation towers.

1A227High-density (lead glass or other) radiation shielding windows, having all of the following characteristics, and specially designed frames therefor:

a. A «cold area» greater than 0,09 m2;

b. A density greater than 3 g/cm3; and

c. A thickness of 100 mm or greater.

Technical Note:

In 1A227 the term «cold area» means the viewing area of the window exposed to the lowest level of radiation in the design application.

1BTest, Inspection and Production Equipment

1B001Equipment for the production of fibres, prepregs, preforms or «composites» specified in 1A002 or 1C010, as follows, and specially designed components and accessories therefor:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1B101 AND 1B201.

a. Filament winding machines of which the motions for positioning, wrapping and winding fibres are coordinated and programmed in three or more axes, specially designed for the manufacture of «composite» structures or laminates from «fibrous or filamentary materials»;

b. Tape-laying or tow-placement machines of which the motions for positioning and laying tape, tows or sheets are coordinated and programmed in two or more axes, specially designed for the manufacture of «composite» airframe or «missile» structures;

Note: In 1B001.b., «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems.

c. Multidirectional, multidimensional weaving machines or interlacing machines, including adapters and modification kits, for weaving, interlacing or braiding fibres to manufacture «composite» structures;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 1B001.c. the technique of interlacing includes knitting.

Note: 1B001.c. does not control textile machinery not modified for the above end-uses.

d. Equipment specially designed or adapted for the production of reinforcement fibres, as follows:

1. Equipment for converting polymeric fibres (such as polyacrylonitrile, rayon, pitch or polycarbosilane) into carbon fibres or silicon carbide fibres, including special equipment to strain the fibre during heating;

2. Equipment for the chemical vapour deposition of elements or compounds on heated filamentary substrates to manufacture silicon carbide fibres;

3. Equipment for the wet-spinning of refractory ceramics (such as aluminium oxide);

4. Equipment for converting aluminium containing precursor fibres into alumina fibres by heat treatment;

e. Equipment for producing prepregs specified in 1C010.e. by the hot melt method;

f. Non-destructive inspection equipment capable of inspecting defects three dimensionally, using ultrasonic or X-ray tomography and specially designed for «composite» materials.

1B002Equipment for producing metal alloys, metal alloy powder or alloyed materials, specially designed to avoid contamination and specially designed for use in one of the processes specified in 1C002.c.2.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1B102.

1B003Tools, dies, moulds or fixtures, for «superplastic forming» or «diffusion bonding» titanium or aluminium or their alloys, specially designed for the manufacture of:

a. Airframe or aerospace structures;

b.«Aircraft» or aerospace engines; or

c. Specially designed components for those structures or engines.

1B101Equipment, other than that specified in 1B001, for the «production» of structural composites as follows; and specially designed components and accessories therefor:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1B201.

Note: Components and accessories specified in 1B101 include moulds, mandrels, dies, fixtures and tooling for the preform pressing, curing, casting, sintering or bonding of composite structures, laminates and manufactures thereof.

a. Filament winding machines of which the motions for positioning, wrapping and winding fibres can be coordinated and programmed in three or more axes, designed to fabricate composite structures or laminates from fibrous or filamentary materials, and coordinating and programming controls;

b. Tape-laying machines of which the motions for positioning and laying tape and sheets can be coordinated and programmed in two or more axes, designed for the manufacture of composite airframe and «missile» structures;

c. Equipment designed or modified for the «production» of «fibrous or filamentary materials» as follows:

1. Equipment for converting polymeric fibres (such as polyacrylonitrile, rayon or polycarbosilane) including special provision to strain the fibre during heating;

2. Equipment for the vapour deposition of elements or compounds on heated filament substrates;

3. Equipment for the wet-spinning of refractory ceramics (such as aluminium oxide);

d. Equipment designed or modified for special fibre surface treatment or for producing prepregs and preforms specified in entry 9C110.

Note: 1B101.d. includes rollers, tension stretchers, coating equipment, cutting equipment and clicker dies.

1B102Metal powder «production equipment», other than that specified in 1B002, and components as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1B115.b.

a. Metal powder «production equipment» usable for the «production», in a controlled environment, of spherical or atomised materials specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111.a.1., 1C111.a.2. or in the Military Goods Controls.

b. Specially designed components for «production equipment» specified in 1B002 or 1B102.a.

Note: 1B102 includes:

a.Plasma generators (high frequency arc-jet) usable for obtaining sputtered or spherical metallic powders with organisation of the process in an argon-water environment;

b.Electroburst equipment usable for obtaining sputtered or spherical metallic powders with organisation of the process in an argon-water environment;

c.Equipment usable for the «production» of spherical aluminium powders by powdering a melt in an inert medium (e.g. nitrogen).

1B115Equipment, other than that specified in 1B002 or 1B102, for the production of propellant and propellant constituents, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:

a.«Production equipment» for the «production», handling or acceptance testing of liquid propellants or propellant constituents specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 or in the Military Goods Controls;

b.«Production equipment» for the «production», handling, mixing, curing, casting, pressing, machining, extruding or acceptance testing of solid propellants or propellant constituents specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 or in the Military Goods Controls.

Note: 1B115.b. does not control batch mixers, continuous mixers or fluid energy mills. For the control of batch mixers, continuous mixers and fluid energy mills see 1B117, 1B118 and 1B119.

Note 1: For equipment specially designed for the production of military goods, see the Military Goods Controls.

Note 2: 1B115 does not control equipment for the «production», handling and acceptance testing of boron carbide.

1B116Specially designed nozzles for producing pyrolitically derived materials formed on a mould, mandrel or other substrate from precursor gases which decompose in the 1573 K (1300 °C) to 3173 K (2900 °C) temperature range at pressures of 130 Pa to 20 kPa.

1B117Batch mixers with provision for mixing under vacuum in the range of zero to 13,326 kPa and with temperature control capability of the mixing chamber and having all of the following, and specially designed components therefor:

a. A total volumetric capacity of 110 litres or more; and

b. At least one mixing/kneading shaft mounted off centre.

1B118Continuous mixers with provision for mixing under vacuum in the range of zero to 13,326 kPa and with a temperature control capability of the mixing chamber having any of the following, and specially designed components therefor:

a. Two or more mixing/kneading shafts; or

b. A single rotating shaft which oscillates and having kneading teeth/pins on the shaft as well as inside the casing of the mixing chamber.

1B119Fluid energy mills usable for grinding or milling substances specified in 1C011.a., 1C011.b., 1C111 or in the Military Goods Controls, and specially designed components therefor.

1B201Filament winding machines, other than those specified in 1B001 or 1B101, and related equipment, as follows:

a. Filament winding machines having all of the following characteristics:

1. Having motions for positioning, wrapping, and winding fibres coordinated and programmed in two or more axes;

2. Specially designed to fabricate composite structures or laminates from «fibrous or filamentary materials»; and

3. Capable of winding cylindrical rotors of diameter between 75 and 400 mm and lengths of 600 mm or greater;

b. Coordinating and programming controls for the filament winding machines specified in 1B201.a.;

c. Precision mandrels for the filament winding machines specified in 1B201.a.

1B225Electrolytic cells for fluorine production with an output capacity greater than 250 g of fluorine per hour.

1B226Electromagnetic isotope separators designed for, or equipped with, single or multiple ion sources capable of providing a total ion beam current of 50 mA or greater.

Note: 1B226 includes separators:

a.Capable of enriching stable isotopes;

b.With the ion sources and collectors both in the magnetic field and those configurations in which they are external to the field.

1B227Ammonia synthesis converters or ammonia synthesis units, in which the synthesis gas (nitrogen and hydrogen) is withdrawn from an ammonia/hydrogen high-pressure exchange column and the synthesized ammonia is returned to said column.

1B228Hydrogen-cryogenic distillation columns having all of the following characteristics:

a. Designed for operation with internal temperatures of 35 K (– 238 °C) or less;

b. Designed for operation at an internal pressure of 0,5 to 5 MPa;

c. Constructed of either:

1. Stainless steel of the 300 series with low sulphur content and with an austenitic ASTM (or equivalent standard) grain size number of 5 or greater; or

2. Equivalent materials which are both cryogenic and H2-compatible; and

d. With internal diameters of 1 m or greater and effective lengths of 5 m or greater.

1B229Water-hydrogen sulphide exchange tray columns and «internal contactors», as follows:

N.B.: For columns which are specially designed or prepared for the production of heavy water see 0B004.

a. Water-hydrogen sulphide exchange tray columns, having all of the following characteristics:

1. Can operate at pressures of 2 MPa or greater;

2. Constructed of carbon steel having an austenitic ASTM (or equivalent standard) grain size number of 5 or greater; and

3. With a diameter of 1,8 m or greater;

b.«Internal contactors» for the water-hydrogen sulphide exchange tray columns specified in 1B229.a.

Technical Note:

«Internal contactors» of the columns are segmented trays which have an effective assembled diameter of 1,8 m or greater, are designed to facilitate countercurrent contacting and are constructed of stainless steels with a carbon content of 0,03 % or less. These may be sieve trays, valve trays, bubble cap trays, or turbogrid trays.

1B230Pumps capable of circulating solutions of concentrated or dilute potassium amide catalyst in liquid ammonia (KNH2/NH3), having all of the following characteristics:

a. Airtight (i.e., hermetically sealed);

b. A capacity greater than 8,5 m3/h; and

c. Either of the following characteristics:

1. For concentrated potassium amide solutions (1 % or greater), an operating pressure of 1,5 to 60 MPa; or

2. For dilute potassium amide solutions (less than 1 %), an operating pressure of 20 to 60 MPa.

1B231Tritium facilities or plants, and equipment therefor, as follows:

a. Facilities or plants for the production, recovery, extraction, concentration, or handling of tritium;

b. Equipment for tritium facilities or plants, as follows:

1. Hydrogen or helium refrigeration units capable of cooling to 23 K (– 250 °C) or less, with heat removal capacity greater than 150 W;

2. Hydrogen isotope storage or purification systems using metal hydrides as the storage or purification medium.

1B232Turboexpanders or turboexpander-compressor sets having both of the following characteristics:

a. Designed for operation with an outlet temperature of 35 K (– 238 °C) or less; and

b. Designed for a throughput of hydrogen gas of 1000 kg/h or greater.

1B233Lithium isotope separation facilities or plants, and equipment therefor, as follows:

a. Facilities or plants for the separation of lithium isotopes;

b. Equipment for the separation of lithium isotopes, as follows:

1. Packed liquid-liquid exchange columns specially designed for lithium amalgams;

2. Mercury or lithium amalgam pumps;

3. Lithium amalgam electrolysis cells;

4. Evaporators for concentrated lithium hydroxide solution.

1CMaterials

Technical Note:

Metals and alloys:

Unless provision to the contrary is made, the words «metals» and «alloys» in 1C001 to 1C012 cover crude and semi-fabricated forms, as follows:

Crude forms:

Anodes, balls, bars (including notched bars and wire bars), billets, blocks, blooms, brickets, cakes, cathodes, crystals, cubes, dice, grains, granules, ingots, lumps, pellets, pigs, powder, rondelles, shot, slabs, slugs, sponge, sticks;

Semi-fabricated forms (whether or not coated, plated, drilled or punched):

a.Wrought or worked materials fabricated by rolling, drawing, extruding, forging, impact extruding, pressing, graining, atomising, and grinding, i.e.: angles, channels, circles, discs, dust, flakes, foils and leaf, forging, plate, powder, pressings and stampings, ribbons, rings, rods (including bare welding rods, wire rods, and rolled wire), sections, shapes, sheets, strip, pipe and tubes (including tube rounds, squares, and hollows), drawn or extruded wire;

b.Cast material produced by casting in sand, die, metal, plaster or other types of moulds, including high pressure castings, sintered forms, and forms made by powder metallurgy.

The object of the control should not be defeated by the export of non-listed forms alleged to be finished products but representing in reality crude forms or semi-fabricated forms.

1C001Materials specially designed for use as absorbers of electromagnetic waves, or intrinsically conductive polymers, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1C101.

a. Materials for absorbing frequencies exceeding 2 × 108 Hz but less than 3 × 1012 Hz;

Note 1: 1C001.a. does not control:

a.Hair type absorbers, constructed of natural or synthetic fibres, with non-magnetic loading to provide absorption;

b.Absorbers having no magnetic loss and whose incident surface is non-planar in shape, including pyramids, cones, wedges and convoluted surfaces;

c.Planar absorbers, having all of the following characteristics:

1.Made from any of the following:

a.Plastic foam materials (flexible or non-flexible) with carbon-loading, or organic materials, including binders, providing more than 5 % echo compared with metal over a bandwidth exceeding ±15 % of the centre frequency of the incident energy, and not capable of withstanding temperatures exceeding 450 K (177 °C); or

b.Ceramic materials providing more than 20 % echo compared with metal over a bandwidth exceeding ±15 % of the centre frequency of the incident energy, and not capable of withstanding temperatures exceeding 800 K (527 °C);

Technical Note:

Absorption test samples for 1C001.a. Note: 1.c.1. should be a square at least 5 wavelengths of the centre frequency on a side and positioned in the far field of the radiating element.

2.Tensile strength less than 7 × 10 6 N/m 2 ; and

3.Compressive strength less than 14 × 10 6 N/m 2 ;

d.Planar absorbers made of sintered ferrite, having:

1.A specific gravity exceeding 4,4; and

2.A maximum operating temperature of 548 K (275 °C).

Note 2: Nothing in Note 1 to 1C001.a. releases magnetic materials to provide absorption when contained in paint.

b. Materials for absorbing frequencies exceeding 1,5 × 1014 Hz but less than 3,7 × 1014 Hz and not transparent to visible light;

c. Intrinsically conductive polymeric materials with a «bulk electrical conductivity» exceeding 10000 S/m (Siemens per metre) or a «sheet (surface) resistivity» of less than 100 ohms/square, based on any of the following polymers:

1. Polyaniline;

2. Polypyrrole;

3. Polythiophene;

4. Poly phenylene-vinylene; or

5. Poly thienylene-vinylene.

Technical Note:

«Bulk electrical conductivity» and «sheet (surface) resistivity» should be determined using ASTM D-257 or national equivalents.

1C002Metal alloys, metal alloy powder and alloyed materials, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1C202.

Note: 1C002 does not control metal alloys, metal alloy powder and alloyed materials for coating substrates.

Technical Notes:

1.The metal alloys in 1C002 are those containing a higher percentage by weight of the stated metal than of any other element.

2.Stress-rupture life should be measured in accordance with ASTM standard E-139 or national equivalents.

3.Low cycle fatigue life should be measured in accordance with ASTM Standard E-606 «Recommended Practice for Constant-Amplitude Low-Cycle Fatigue Testing» or national equivalents. Testing should be axial with an average stress ratio equal to 1 and a stress-concentration factor (K t ) equal to 1. The average stress is defined as maximum stress minus minimum stress divided by maximum stress.

a. Aluminides, as follows:

1. Nickel aluminides containing a minimum of 15 weight percent aluminium, a maximum of 38 weight percent aluminium and at least one additional alloying element;

2. Titanium aluminides containing 10 weight percent or more aluminium and at least one additional alloying element;

b. Metal alloys, as follows, made from material specified in 1C002.c.:

1. Nickel alloys with:

a. A stress-rupture life of 10000 hours or longer at 923 K (650 °C) at a stress of 676 MPa; or

b. A low cycle fatigue life of 10000 cycles or more at 823 K (550 °C) at a maximum stress of 1,095 MPa;

2. Niobium alloys with:

a. A stress-rupture life of 10000 hours or longer at 1073 K (800 °C) at a stress of 400 MPa; or

b. A low cycle fatigue life of 10000 cycles or more at 973 K (700 °C) at a maximum stress of 700 MPa;

3. Titanium alloys with:

a. A stress-rupture life of 10000 hours or longer at 723 K (450 °C) at a stress of 200 MPa; or

b. A low cycle fatigue life of 10000 cycles or more at 723 K (450 °C) at a maximum stress of 400 MPa;

4. Aluminium alloys with a tensile strength of:

a. 240 MPa or more at 473 K (200 °C); or

b. 415 MPa or more at 298 K (25 °C);

5. Magnesium alloys with:

a. A tensile strength of 345 MPa or more; and

b. A corrosion rate of less than 1 mm/year in 3 % sodium chloride aqueous solution measured in accordance with ASTM standard G-31 or national equivalents;

c. Metal alloy powder or particulate material, having all of the following characteristics:

1. Made from any of the following composition systems:

Technical Note:

X in the following equals one or more alloying elements.

a. Nickel alloys (Ni-Al-X, Ni-X-Al) qualified for turbine engine parts or components, i.e. with less than 3 non-metallic particles (introduced during the manufacturing process) larger than 100 μm in 109 alloy particles;

b. Niobium alloys (Nb-Al-X or Nb-X-Al, Nb-Si-X or Nb-X-Si, Nb-Ti-X or Nb-X-Ti);

c. Titanium alloys (Ti-Al-X or Ti-X-Al);

d. Aluminium alloys (Al-Mg-X or Al-X-Mg, Al-Zn-X or Al-X-Zn, Al-Fe-X or Al-X-Fe); or

e. Magnesium alloys (Mg-Al-X or Mg-X-Al);

2. Made in a controlled environment by any of the following processes:

a.«Vacuum atomisation»;

b.«Gas atomisation»;

c.«Rotary atomisation»;

d.«Splat quenching»;

e.«Melt spinning» and «comminution»;

f.«Melt extraction» and «comminution»; or

g.«Mechanical alloying»; and

3. Capable of forming materials specified in 1C002.a. or 1C002.b.

d. Alloyed materials having all of the following characteristics:

1. Made from any of the composition systems specified in 1C002.c.1.;

2. In the form of uncomminuted flakes, ribbons or thin rods; and

3. Produced in a controlled environment by any of the following:

a.«Splat quenching»;

b.«Melt spinning»; or

c.«Melt extraction».

1C003Magnetic metals, of all types and of whatever form, having any of the following characteristics:

a. Initial relative permeability of 120000 or more and a thickness of 0,05 mm or less;

Technical Note:

Measurement of initial permeability must be performed on fully annealed materials.

b. Magnetostrictive alloys, having any of the following characteristics:

1. A saturation magnetostriction of more than 5 × 10-4; or

2. A magnetomechanical coupling factor (k) of more than 0,8; or

c. Amorphous or «nanocrystalline» alloy strips, having all of the following characteristics:

1. A composition having a minimum of 75 weight percent of iron, cobalt or nickel;

2. A saturation magnetic induction (Bs) of 1,6 T or more; and

3. Any of the following:

a. A strip thickness of 0,02 mm or less; or

b. An electrical resistivity of 2 × 10-4 ohm cm or more.

Technical Note:

«Nanocrystalline» materials in 1C003.c. are those materials having a crystal grain size of 50 nm or less, as determined by X-ray diffraction.

1C004Uranium titanium alloys or tungsten alloys with a «matrix» based on iron, nickel or copper, having all of the following:

a. A density exceeding 17,5 g/cm3;

b. An elastic limit exceeding 880 MPa;

c. An ultimate tensile strength exceeding 1270 MPa; and

d. An elongation exceeding 8 %.

1C005«Superconductive»«composite» conductors in lengths exceeding 100 m or with a mass exceeding 100 g, as follows:

a. Multifilamentary «superconductive»«composite» conductors containing one or more niobium-titanium filaments:

1. Embedded in a «matrix» other than a copper or copper-based mixed «matrix»; or

2. Having a cross-section area less than 0,28 × 10-4 mm2 (6 μm in diameter for circular filaments);

b.«Superconductive»«composite» conductors consisting of one or more «superconductive» filaments other than niobium-titanium, having all of the following:

1. A «critical temperature» at zero magnetic induction exceeding 9,85 K (– 263,31 °C) but less than 24 K (– 249,16 °C);

2. A cross-section area less than 0,28 × 10-4 mm2; and

3. Remaining in the «superconductive» state at a temperature of 4,2 K (– 268,96 °C) when exposed to a magnetic field corresponding to a magnetic induction of 12 T.

1C006Fluids and lubricating materials, as follows:

a. Hydraulic fluids containing, as their principal ingredients, any of the following compounds or materials:

1. Synthetic silahydrocarbon oils, having all of the following:

Technical Note:

For the purpose of 1C006.a.1., silahydrocarbon oils contain exclusively silicon, hydrogen and carbon.

a. A flash point exceeding 477 K (204 °C);

b. A pour point at 239 K (– 34 °C) or less;

c. A viscosity index of 75 or more; and

d. A thermal stability at 616 K (343 °C); or

2. Chlorofluorocarbons, having all of the following:

Technical Note:

For the purpose of 1C006.a.2., chlorofluorocarbons contain exclusively carbon, fluorine and chlorine.

a. No flash point;

b. An autogenous ignition temperature exceeding 977 K (704 °C);

c. A pour point at 219 K (– 54 °C) or less;

d. A viscosity index of 80 or more; and

e. A boiling point at 473 K (200 °C) or higher;

b. Lubricating materials containing, as their principal ingredients, any of the following compounds or materials:

1. Phenylene or alkylphenylene ethers or thio-ethers, or their mixtures, containing more than two ether or thio-ether functions or mixtures thereof; or

2. Fluorinated silicone fluids with a kinematic viscosity of less than 5000 mm2/s (5000 centistokes) measured at 298 K (25 °C);

c. Damping or flotation fluids with a purity exceeding 99,8 %, containing less than 25 particles of 200 μm or larger in size per 100 ml and made from at least 85 % of any of the following compounds or materials:

1. Dibromotetrafluoroethane;

2. Polychlorotrifluoroethylene (oily and waxy modifications only); or

3. Polybromotrifluoroethylene;

d. Fluorocarbon electronic cooling fluids, having all of the following characteristics:

1. Containing 85 % by weight or more of any of the following, or mixtures thereof:

a. Monomeric forms of perfluoropolyalkylether-triazines or perfluoroaliphatic-ethers;

b. Perfluoroalkylamines;

c. Perfluorocycloalkanes; or

d. Perfluoroalkanes;

2. Density at 298 K (25 °C) of 1,5 g/ml or more;

3. In a liquid state at 273 K (0 °C); and

4. Containing 60 % or more by weight of fluorine.

Technical Note:

For the purpose of 1C006:

a.Flash point is determined using the Cleveland Open Cup Method described in ASTM D-92 or national equivalents;

b.Pour point is determined using the method described in ASTM D-97 or national equivalents;

c.Viscosity index is determined using the method described in ASTM D-2270 or national equivalents;

d.Thermal stability is determined by the following test procedure or national equivalents:

Twenty ml of the fluid under test is placed in a 46 ml type 317 stainless steel chamber containing one each of 12,5 mm (nominal) diameter balls of M-10 tool steel, 52100 steel and naval bronze (60 % Cu, 39 % Zn, 0,75 % Sn);

The chamber is purged with nitrogen, sealed at atmospheric pressure and the temperature raised to and maintained at 644 ± 6 K (371 ± 6 °C) for six hours;

The specimen will be considered thermally stable if, on completion of the above procedure, all of the following conditions are met:

1.The loss in weight of each ball is less than 10 mg/mm 2 of ball surface;

2.The change in original viscosity as determined at 311 K (38 °C) is less than 25 %; and

3.The total acid or base number is less than 0,40;

e.Autogenous ignition temperature is determined using the method described in ASTM E-659 or national equivalents.

1C007Ceramic base materials, non-«composite» ceramic materials, ceramic-«matrix»«composite» materials and precursor materials, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1C107.

a. Base materials of single or complex borides of titanium having total metallic impurities, excluding intentional additions, of less than 5000 ppm, an average particle size equal to or less than 5 μm and no more than 10 % of the particles larger than 10 μm;

b. Non- «composite» ceramic materials in crude or semi-fabricated form, composed of borides of titanium with a density of 98 % or more of the theoretical density;

Note: 1C007.b. does not control abrasives.

c. Ceramic-ceramic «composite» materials with a glass or oxide-«matrix» and reinforced with fibres having all of the following:

1. Made from any of the following materials:

a. Si-N;

b. Si-C;

c. Si-Al-O-N; or

d. Si-O-N; and

2. Having a specific tensile strength exceeding 12,7 × 103m;

d. Ceramic-ceramic «composite» materials, with or without a continuous metallic phase, incorporating particles, whiskers or fibres, where carbides or nitrides of silicon, zirconium or boron form the «matrix»;

e. Precursor materials (i.e., special purpose polymeric or metallo-organic materials) for producing any phase or phases of the materials specified in 1C007.c., as follows:

1. Polydiorganosilanes (for producing silicon carbide);

2. Polysilazanes (for producing silicon nitride);

3. Polycarbosilazanes (for producing ceramics with silicon, carbon and nitrogen components);

f. Ceramic-ceramic «composite» materials with an oxide or glass «matrix» reinforced with continuous fibres from any of the following systems:

1. Al2O3; or

2. Si-C-N.

Note: 1C007.f. does not control «composites» containing fibres from these systems with a fibre tensile strength of less than 700 MPa at 1273 K (1000 °C) or fibre tensile creep resistance of more than 1 % creep strain at 100 MPa load and 1273 K (1000 °C) for 100 hours.

1C008Non-fluorinated polymeric substances, as follows:

a.

1. Bismaleimides;

2. Aromatic polyamide-imides;

3. Aromatic polyimides;

4. Aromatic polyetherimides having a glass transition temperature (Tg) exceeding 513 K (240 °C);

Note: 1C008.a. does not control non-fusible compression moulding powders or moulded forms.

b. Thermoplastic liquid crystal copolymers having a heat distortion temperature exceeding 523 K (250 °C) measured according to ISO 75-3 (2004), or national equivalents, with a load of 1,82 N/mm2 and composed of:

1. Any of the following:

a. Phenylene, biphenylene or naphthalene; or

b. Methyl, tertiary-butyl or phenyl substituted phenylene, biphenylene or naphthalene; and

2. Any of the following acids:

a. Terephthalic acid;

b. 6-hydroxy-2 naphthoic acid; or

c. 4-hydroxybenzoic acid;

c. Polyarylene ether ketones, as follows:

1. Not used;

2. Polyether ketone ketone (PEKK);

3. Polyether ketone (PEK);

4. Polyether ketone ether ketone ketone (PEKEKK);

d. Polyarylene ketones;

e. Polyarylene sulphides, where the arylene group is biphenylene, triphenylene or combinations thereof;

f. Polybiphenylenethersulphone having a glass transition temperature (Tg) exceeding 513 K (240°C).

Technical Note:

The glass transition temperature (T g ) for 1C008 materials is determined using the method described in ISO 11357-2 (1999) or national equivalents.

1C009Unprocessed fluorinated compounds, as follows:

a. Copolymers of vinylidene fluoride having 75 % or more beta crystalline structure without stretching;

b. Fluorinated polyimides containing 10 % by weight or more of combined fluorine;

c. Fluorinated phosphazene elastomers containing 30 % by weight or more of combined fluorine.

1C010«Fibrous or filamentary materials» which may be used in organic «matrix», metallic «matrix» or carbon «matrix»«composite» structures or laminates, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1C210.

a. Organic «fibrous or filamentary materials», having all of the following:

1. A «specific modulus» exceeding 12,7 × 106 m; and

2. A «specific tensile strength» exceeding 23,5 × 104 m;

Note: 1C010.a. does not control polyethylene.

b. Carbon «fibrous or filamentary materials», having all of the following:

1. A «specific modulus» exceeding 12,7 × 106 m; and

2. A «specific tensile strength» exceeding 23,5 × 104 m;

Note: 1C010.b. does not control fabric made from «fibrous or filamentary materials» for the repair of aircraft structures or laminates, in which the size of individual sheets does not exceed 50 cm × 90 cm.

Technical Note:

Properties for materials described in 1C010.b. should be determined using SACMA recommended methods SRM 12 to 17, or national equivalent tow tests, such as Japanese Industrial Standard JIS-R-7601, Paragraph 6.6.2., and based on lot average.

c. Inorganic «fibrous or filamentary materials», having all of the following:

1. A «specific modulus» exceeding 2,54 × 106 m; and

2. A melting, softening, decomposition or sublimation point exceeding 1922 K (1649 °C) in an inert environment;

Note: 1C010.c. does not control:

1.Discontinuous, multiphase, polycrystalline alumina fibres in chopped fibre or random mat form, containing 3 weight percent or more silica, with a specific modulus of less than 10 × 10 6 m;

2.Molybdenum and molybdenum alloy fibres;

3.Boron fibres;

4.Discontinuous ceramic fibres with a melting, softening, decomposition or sublimation point lower than 2043 K (1770 °C) in an inert environment.

d.«Fibrous or filamentary materials»:

1. Composed of any of the following:

a. Polyetherimides specified in 1C008.a.; or

b. Materials specified in 1C008.b. to 1C008.f.; or ;

2. Composed of materials specified in 1C010.d.1.a. or 1C010.d.1.b. and «commingled» with other fibres specified in 1C010.a., 1C010.b. or 1C010.c.;

e. Resin-impregnated or pitch-impregnated fibres (prepregs), metal or carbon-coated fibres (preforms) or «carbon fibre preforms», as follows:

1. Made from «fibrous or filamentary materials» specified in 1C010.a., 1C010.b. or 1C010.c.;

2. Made from organic or carbon «fibrous or filamentary materials»:

a. With a «specific tensile strength» exceeding 17,7 × 104 m;

b. With a «specific modulus» exceeding 10,15 × 106 m;

c. Not controlled by 1C010.a. or 1C010.b.; and

d. When impregnated with materials specified in 1C008 or 1C009.b., having a glass transition temperature (Tg) exceeding 383 K (110 °C) or with phenolic or epoxy resins, having a glass transition temperature (Tg) equal to or exceeding 418 K (145 °C).

Notes: 1C010.e. does not control:

a.Epoxy resin «matrix» impregnated carbon «fibrous or filamentary materials» (prepregs) for the repair of aircraft structures or laminates, in which the size of individual sheets of prepreg does not exceed 50 cm × 90 cm;

b.Prepregs when impregnated with phenolic or epoxy resins having a glass transition temperature (T g ) less than 433 K (160 °C) and a cure temperature lower than the glass transition temperature.

Technical Note:

The glass transition temperature (T g ) for 1C010.e. materials is determined using the method described in ASTM D 3418 using the dry method. The glass transition temperature for phenolic and epoxy resins is determined using the method described in ASTM D 4065 at a frequency of 1 Hz and a heating rate of 2 K (°C) per minute using the dry method.

1C011Metals and compounds, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS and 1C111.

a. Metals in particle sizes of less than 60 μm whether spherical, atomised, spheroidal, flaked or ground, manufactured from material consisting of 99 % or more of zirconium, magnesium and alloys of these;

Technical Note:

The natural content of hafnium in the zirconium (typically 2 % to 7 %) is counted with the zirconium.

Note: The metals or alloys listed in 1C011.a. are controlled whether or not the metals or alloys are encapsulated in aluminium, magnesium, zirconium or beryllium.

b. Boron or boron carbide of 85 % purity or higher and a particle size of 60 μm or less;

Note: The metals or alloys listed in 1C011.b. are controlled whether or not the metals or alloys are encapsulated in aluminium, magnesium, zirconium or beryllium.

c. Guanidine nitrate;

d. Nitroguanidine (NQ) (CAS 556-88-7).

1C012Materials as follows:

Technical Note:

These materials are typically used for nuclear heat sources.

a. Plutonium in any form with a plutonium isotopic assay of plutonium-238 of more than 50 % by weight;

Note: 1C012.a. does not control:

a.Shipments with a plutonium content of 1 g or less;

b.Shipments of 3 «effective grammes» or less when contained in a sensing component in instruments.

b.«Previously separated» neptunium-237 in any form.

Note: 1C012.b. does not control shipments with a neptunium-237 content of 1 g or less.

1C101Materials and devices for reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures, other than those specified in 1C001, usable in «missiles», «missile» subsystems or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012.

Note 1: 1C101 includes:

a.Structural materials and coatings specially designed for reduced radar reflectivity;

b.Coatings, including paints, specially designed for reduced or tailored reflectivity or emissivity in the microwave, infrared or ultraviolet regions of the electromagnetic spectrum.

Note 2: 1C101 does not include coatings when specially used for the thermal control of satellites.

Technical Note:

In 1C101 «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

1C102Resaturated pyrolized carbon-carbon materials designed for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

1C107Graphite and ceramic materials, other than those specified in 1C007, as follows:

a. Fine grain graphites with a bulk density of 1,72 g/cm3 or greater, measured at 288 K (15 °C), and having a grain size of 100 μm or less, usable for rocket nozzles and re-entry vehicle nose tips, which can be machined to any of the following products:

1. Cylinders having a diameter of 120 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater;

2. Tubes having an inner diameter of 65 mm or greater and a wall thickness of 25 mm or greater and a length of 50 mm or greater; or

3. Blocks having a size of 120 mm × 120 mm × 50 mm or greater;

N.B.: See also 0C004

b. Pyrolytic or fibrous reinforced graphites, usable for «missile» nozzles and re-entry vehicle nose tips;

N.B.: See also 0C004

c. Ceramic composite materials (dielectric constant less than 6 at any frequency from 100 MHz to 100 GHz) usable for «missile» radomes;

d. Bulk machinable silicon-carbide reinforced unfired ceramic, usable for «missile» nose tips.

1C111Propellants and constituent chemicals for propellants, other than those specified in 1C011, as follows:

a. Propulsive substances:

1. Spherical aluminium powder, other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, with particles of uniform diameter of less than 200 μm and an aluminium content of 97 % by weight or more, if at least 10 % of the total weight is made up of particles of less than 63 μm, according to ISO 2591:1988 or national equivalents;

Technical Note:

A particle size of 63 μm (ISO R-565) corresponds to 250 mesh (Tyler) or 230 mesh (ASTM standard E-11).

2. Metal fuels, other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls, in particle sizes of less than 60 μm, whether spherical, atomised, spheroidal, flaked or ground, consisting 97 % by weight or more of any of the following:

a. Zirconium;

b. Beryllium;

c. Magnesium; or

d. Alloys of the metals specified by a. to c. above;

Technical Note:

The natural content of hafnium in the zirconium (typically 2 % to 7 %) is counted with the zirconium.

3. Liquid oxidiser substances as follows:

a. Dinitrogen trioxide;

b. Nitrogen dioxide/dinitrogen tetroxide;

c. Dinitrogen pentoxide;

d. Mixed Oxides of Nitrogen (MON);

Technical Note:

Mixed Oxides of Nitrogen (MON) are solutions of Nitric Oxide (NO) in Dinitrogen Tetroxide/Nitrogen Dioxide (N 2 O 4 /NO 2 ) that can be used in missile systems. There are a range of compositions that can be denoted as MONi or MONij, where i and j are integers representing the percentage of Nitric Oxide in the mixture (e.g., MON3 contains 3 % Nitric Oxide, MON25 25 % Nitric Oxide. An upper limit is MON40, 40 % by weight).

e. See Military Goods Controls for Inhibited Red Fuming Nitric Acid (IRFNA);

f. See Military Goods Controls and 1C238 for Compounds composed of fluorine and one or more of other halogens, oxygen or nitrogen;

4. Hydrazine derivatives usable as rocket fuel substances, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls;

b. Polymeric substances:

1. Carboxy-terminated polybutadiene (CTPB);

2. Hydroxy-terminated polybutadiene (HTPB), other than that specified in the Military Goods Controls;

3. Polybutadiene-acrylic acid (PBAA);

4. Polybutadiene-acrylic acid-acrylonitrile (PBAN);

c. Other propellant additives and agents:

1.See Military Goods Controls for Carboranes, decaboranes, pentaboranes and derivatives thereof;

2. Triethylene glycol dinitrate (TEGDN);

3. 2-Nitrodiphenylamine;

4. Trimethylolethane trinitrate (TMETN);

5. Diethylene glycol dinitrate (DEGDN);

6. Ferrocene derivatives as follows:

a.See Military Goods Controls for catocene;

b. Ethyl ferrocene;

c. Propyl ferrocene;

d.See Military Goods Controls for n-butyl ferrocene;

e. Pentyl ferrocene;

f. Dicyclopentyl ferrocene;

g. Dicyclohexyl ferrocene;

h. Diethyl ferrocene;

i. Dipropyl ferrocene;

j. Dibutyl ferrocene;

k. Dihexyl ferrocene;

l. Acetyl ferrocenes;

m.See Military Goods Controls for ferrocene Carboxylic acids;

n.See Military Goods Controls for butacene;

o. Other ferrocene derivatives usable as rocket propellant burning rate modifiers, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls.

Note: For propellants and constituent chemicals for propellants not specified in 1C111, see the Military Goods Controls.

1C116Maraging steels (steels generally characterised by high nickel, very low carbon content and the use of substitutional elements or precipitates to produce age-hardening) having an ultimate tensile strength of 1,500 MPa or greater, measured at 293 K (20 °C), in the form of sheet, plate or tubing with a wall or plate thickness equal to or less than 5 mm.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1C216.

1C117Tungsten, molybdenum and alloys of these metals in the form of uniform spherical or atomized particles of 500 micrometre diameter or less with a purity of 97 % or greater for fabrication of «missile» motor components, i.e., heat shields, nozzle substrates, nozzle throats and thrust vector control surfaces.

1C118Titanium-stabilised duplex stainless steel (Ti-DSS) having all of the following:

a. Having all of the following characteristics:

1. Containing 17,0-23,0 weight percent chromium and 4,5-7,0 weight percent nickel;

2. Having a titanium content of greater than 0,10 weight percent; and

3. A ferritic-austenitic microstructure (also referred to as a two-phase microstructure ) of which at least 10 percent is austenite by volume (according to ASTM E-1181-87 or national equivalents); and

b. Having any of the following forms:

1. Ingots or bars having a size of 100 mm or more in each dimension;

2. Sheets having a width of 600 mm or more and a thickness of 3 mm or less; or

3. Tubes having an outer diameter of 600 mm or more and a wall thickness of 3 mm or less.

1C202Alloys, other than those specified in 1C002.b.3. or .b.4., as follows:

a. Aluminium alloys having both of the following characteristics:

1.«Capable of» an ultimate tensile strength of 460 MPa or more at 293 K (20 °C); and

2. In the form of tubes or cylindrical solid forms (including forgings) with an outside diameter of more than 75 mm;

b. Titanium alloys having both of the following characteristics:

1.«Capable of» an ultimate tensile strength of 900 MPa or more at 293 K (20 °C); and

2. In the form of tubes or cylindrical solid forms (including forgings) with an outside diameter of more than 75 mm.

Technical Note:

The phrase alloys «capable of» encompasses alloys before or after heat treatment.

1C210«Fibrous or filamentary materials» or prepregs, other than those specified in 1C010.a., b. or e., as follows:

a. Carbon or aramid «fibrous or filamentary materials» having either of the following characteristics:

1. A «specific modulus» of 12,7 × 106 m or greater; or

2. A «specific tensile strength» of 235 × 103 m or greater;

Note: 1C210.a. does not control aramid «fibrous or filamentary materials» having 0,25 percent or more by weight of an ester based fibre surface modifier;

b. Glass «fibrous or filamentary materials» having both of the following characteristics:

1. A «specific modulus» of 3,18 × 106 m or greater; and

2. A «specific tensile strength» of 76,2 × 103 m or greater;

c. Thermoset resin impregnated continuous «yarns», «rovings», «tows» or «tapes» with a width of 15 mm or less (prepregs), made from carbon or glass «fibrous or filamentary materials» specified in 1C210.a. or b.

Technical Note:

The resin forms the matrix of the composite.

Note: In 1C210, «fibrous or filamentary materials» is restricted to continuous «monofilaments», «yarns», «rovings», «tows» or «tapes».

1C216Maraging steel, other than that specified in 1C116, «capable of» an ultimate tensile strength of 2050 MPa or more, at 293 K (20 °C).

Note: 1C216 does not control forms in which all linear dimensions are 75 mm or less.

Technical Note:

The phrase maraging steel «capable of» encompasses maraging steel before or after heat treatment.

1C225Boron enriched in the boron-10 (10B) isotope to greater than its natural isotopic abundance, as follows: elemental boron, compounds, mixtures containing boron, manufactures thereof, waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.

Note: In 1C225 mixtures containing boron include boron loaded materials.

Technical Note:

The natural isotopic abundance of boron-10 is approximately 18,5 weight per cent (20 atom per cent).

1C226Tungsten, tungsten carbide, and alloys containing more than 90 % tungsten by weight, having both of the following characteristics:

a. In forms with a hollow cylindrical symmetry (including cylinder segments) with an inside diameter between 100 mm and 300 mm; and

b. A mass greater than 20 kg.

Note: 1C226 does not control manufactures specially designed as weights or gamma-ray collimators.

1C227Calcium having both of the following characteristics:

a. Containing less than 1000 parts per million by weight of metallic impurities other than magnesium; and

b. Containing less than 10 parts per million by weight of boron.

1C228Magnesium having both of the following characteristics:

a. Containing less than 200 parts per million by weight of metallic impurities other than calcium; and

b. Containing less than 10 parts per million by weight of boron.

1C229Bismuth having both of the following characteristics:

a. A purity of 99,99 % or greater by weight; and

b. Containing less than 10 parts per million by weight of silver.

1C230Beryllium metal, alloys containing more than 50 % beryllium by weight, beryllium compounds, manufactures thereof, and waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.

Note: 1C230 does not control the following:

a.Metal windows for X-ray machines, or for bore-hole logging devices;

b.Oxide shapes in fabricated or semi-fabricated forms specially designed for electronic component parts or as substrates for electronic circuits;

c.Beryl (silicate of beryllium and aluminium) in the form of emeralds or aquamarines.

1C231Hafnium metal, alloys containing more than 60 % hafnium by weight, hafnium compounds containing more than 60 % hafnium by weight, manufactures thereof, and waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.

1C232Helium-3 (3He), mixtures containing helium-3, and products or devices containing any of the foregoing.

Note: 1C232 does not control a product or device containing less than 1 g of helium-3.

1C233Lithium enriched in the lithium-6 (6Li) isotope to greater than its natural isotopic abundance, and products or devices containing enriched lithium, as follows: elemental lithium, alloys, compounds, mixtures containing lithium, manufactures thereof, waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.

Note: 1C233 does not control thermoluminescent dosimeters.

Technical Note:

The natural isotopic abundance of lithium-6 is approximately 6,5 weight per cent (7,5 atom per cent).

1C234Zirconium with a hafnium content of less than 1 part hafnium to 500 parts zirconium by weight, as follows: metal, alloys containing more than 50 % zirconium by weight, compounds, manufactures thereof, waste or scrap of any of the foregoing.

Note: 1C234 does not control zirconium in the form of foil having a thickness of 0,10 mm or less.

1C235Tritium, tritium compounds, mixtures containing tritium in which the ratio of tritium to hydrogen atoms exceeds 1 part in 1000, and products or devices containing any of the foregoing.

Note: 1C235 does not control a product or device containing less than 1,48 × 10 3 GBq (40 Ci) of tritium.

1C236Alpha-emitting radionuclides having an alpha half-life of 10 days or greater but less than 200 years, in the following forms:

a. Elemental;

b. Compounds having a total alpha activity of 37 GBq/kg (1 Ci/kg) or greater;

c. Mixtures having a total alpha activity of 37 GBq/kg (1 Ci/kg) or greater;

d. Products or devices containing any of the foregoing.

Note: 1C236 does not control a product or device containing less than 3,7 GBq (100 millicuries) of alpha activity.

1C237Radium-226 (226Ra), radium-226 alloys, radium-226 compounds, mixtures containing radium-226, manufactures thereof, and products or devices containing any of the foregoing.

Note: 1C237 does not control the following:

a.Medical applicators;

b.A product or device containing less than 0,37 GBq (10 millicuries) of radium-226.

1C238Chlorine trifluoride (ClF3).

1C239High explosives, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls, or substances or mixtures containing more than 2 % by weight thereof, with a crystal density greater than 1,8 g/cm3 and having a detonation velocity greater than 8000 m/s.

1C240Nickel powder and porous nickel metal, other than those specified in 0C005, as follows:

a. Nickel powder having both of the following characteristics:

1. A nickel purity content of 99,0 % or greater by weight; and

2. A mean particle size of less than 10 micrometres measured by American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B330 standard;

b. Porous nickel metal produced from materials specified in 1C240.a.

Note: 1C240 does not control the following:

a.Filamentary nickel powders;

b.Single porous nickel sheets with an area of 1000 cm 2 per sheet or less.

Technical Note:

1C240.b. refers to porous metal formed by compacting and sintering the materials in 1C240.a. to form a metal material with fine pores interconnected throughout the structure.

1C350Chemicals, which may be used as precursors for toxic chemical agents, as follows, and «chemical mixtures» containing one or more thereof:

N.B.: SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS AND 1C450.

1. Thiodiglycol (111-48-8);

2. Phosphorus oxychloride (10025-87-3);

3. Dimethyl methylphosphonate (756-79-6);

4. SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Methyl phosphonyl difluoride (676-99-3);

5. Methyl phosphonyl dichloride (676-97-1);

6. Dimethyl phosphite (DMP) (868-85-9);

7. Phosphorus trichloride (7719-12-2);

8. Trimethyl phosphite (TMP) (121-45-9);

9. Thionyl chloride (7719-09-7);

10. 3-Hydroxy-1-methylpiperidine (3554-74-3);

11. N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride (96-79-7);

12. N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol (5842-07-9);

13. 3-Quinuclidinol (1619-34-7);

14. Potassium fluoride (7789-23-3);

15. 2-Chloroethanol (107-07-3);

16. Dimethylamine (124-40-3);

17. Diethyl ethylphosphonate (78-38-6);

18. Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate (2404-03-7);

19. Diethyl phosphite (762-04-9);

20. Dimethylamine hydrochloride (506-59-2);

21. Ethyl phosphinyl dichloride (1498-40-4);

22. Ethyl phosphonyl dichloride (1066-50-8);

23. SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR Ethyl phosphonyl difluoride (753-98-0);

24. Hydrogen fluoride (7664-39-3);

25. Methyl benzilate (76-89-1);

26. Methyl phosphinyl dichloride (676-83-5);

27. N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-amino ethanol (96-80-0);

28. Pinacolyl alcohol (464-07-3);

29. SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR O-Ethyl-2-diisopropylaminoethyl methyl phosphonite (QL) (57856-11-8);

30. Triethyl phosphite (122-52-1);

31. Arsenic trichloride (7784-34-1);

32. Benzilic acid (76-93-7);

33. Diethyl methylphosphonite (15715-41-0);

34. Dimethyl ethylphosphonate (6163-75-3);

35. Ethyl phosphinyl difluoride (430-78-4);

36. Methyl phosphinyl difluoride (753-59-3);

37. 3-Quinuclidone (3731-38-2);

38. Phosphorus pentachloride (10026-13-8);

39. Pinacolone (75-97-8);

40. Potassium cyanide (151-50-8);

41. Potassium bifluoride (7789-29-9);

42. Ammonium hydrogen fluoride or ammonium bifluoride (1341-49-7);

43. Sodium fluoride (7681-49-4);

44. Sodium bifluoride (1333-83-1);

45. Sodium cyanide (143-33-9);

46. Triethanolamine (102-71-6);

47. Phosphorus pentasulphide (1314-80-3);

48. Di-isopropylamine (108-18-9);

49. Diethylaminoethanol (100-37-8);

50. Sodium sulphide (1313-82-2);

51. Sulphur monochloride (10025-67-9);

52. Sulphur dichloride (10545-99-0);

53. Triethanolamine hydrochloride (637-39-8);

54. N,N-Diisopropyl-(Beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride (4261-68-1);

55. Methylphosphonic acid (993-13-5);

56. Diethyl methylphosphonate (683-08-9);

57. N,N-Dimethylaminophosphoryl dichloride (677-43-0);

58. Triisopropyl phosphite (116-17-6);

59. Ethyldiethanolamine (139-87-7);

60. O,O-Diethyl phosphorothioate (2465-65-8);

61. O,O-Diethyl phosphorodithioate (298-06-6);

62. Sodium hexafluorosilicate (16893-85-9);

63. Methylphosphonothioic dichloride (676-98-2).

Note 1: For exports to «States not Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention», 1C350 does not control «chemical mixtures» containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C350.1, .3, .5, .11, .12, .13, .17, .18, .21, .22, .26, .27, .28, .31, .32, .33, .34, .35, .36, .54, .55, .56, .57 and .63 in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 10 % by the weight of the mixture.

Note 2: For exports to «States Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention», 1C350 does not control «chemical mixtures» containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C350.1, .3, .5, .11, .12, .13, .17, .18, .21, .22, .26, .27, .28, .31, .32, .33, .34, .35, .36, .54, .55, .56, .57 and .63 in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30 % by the weight of the mixture.

Note 3: 1C350 does not control «chemical mixtures» containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C350 .2, .6, .7, .8, .9, .10, .14, .15, .16, .19, .20, .24, .25, .30, .37, .38, .39, .40, .41, .42, .43, .44, .45, .46, .47, .48, .49, .50, .51, .52, .53, .58, .59, .60, .61 and .62 in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30 % by the weight of the mixture.

Note 4: 1C350 does not control products identified as consumer goods packaged for retail sale for personal use or packaged for individual use.

1C351Human pathogens, zoonoses and «toxins», as follows:

a. Viruses, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of «isolated live cultures» or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1. Chikungunya virus;

2. Congo-Crimean haemorrhagic fever virus;

3. Dengue fever virus;

4. Eastern equine encephalitis virus;

5. Ebola virus;

6. Hantaan virus;

7. Junin virus;

8. Lassa fever virus;

9. Lymphocytic choriomeningitis virus;

10. Machupo virus;

11. Marburg virus;

12. Monkey pox virus;

13. Rift Valley fever virus;

14. Tick-borne encephalitis virus (Russian Spring-Summer encephalitis virus);

15. Variola virus;

16. Venezuelan equine encephalitis virus;

17. Western equine encephalitis virus;

18. White pox;

19. Yellow fever virus;

20. Japanese encephalitis virus;

21. Kyasanur Forest virus;

22. Louping ill virus;

23. Murray Valley encephalitis virus;

24. Omsk haemorrhagic fever virus;

25. Oropouche virus;

26. Powassan virus;

27. Rocio virus;

28. St Louis encephalitis virus;

29. Hendra virus (Equine morbillivirus);

30. South American haemorrhagic fever (Sabia, Flexal, Guanarito);

31. Pulmonary & renal syndrome-haemorrhagic fever viruses (Seoul, Dobrava, Puumala, Sin Nombre);

32. Nipah virus.

b. Rickettsiae, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of «isolated live cultures» or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1. Coxiella burnetii;

2. Bartonella quintana (Rochalimaea quintana, Rickettsia quintana);

3. Rickettsia prowasecki;

4. Rickettsia rickettsii;

c. Bacteria, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of «isolated live cultures» or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1. Bacillus anthracis;

2. Brucella abortus;

3. Brucella melitensis;

4. Brucella suis;

5. Chlamydia psittaci;

6. Clostridium botulinum;

7. Francisella tularensis;

8. Burkholderia mallei (Pseudomonas mallei);

9. Burkholderia pseudomallei (Pseudomonas pseudomallei);

10. Salmonella typhi;

11. Shigella dysenteriae;

12. Vibrio cholerae;

13. Yersinia pestis;

14. Clostridium perfringens epsilon toxin producing types;

15. Enterohaemorrhagic Escherichia coli, serotype O157 and other verotoxin producing serotypes.

d.«Toxins», as follows, and «sub-unit of toxins» thereof:

1. Botulinum toxins;

2. Clostridium perfringens toxins;

3. Conotoxin;

4. Ricin;

5. Saxitoxin;

6. Shiga toxin;

7. Staphylococcus aureus toxins;

8. Tetrodotoxin;

9. Verotoxin;

10. Microcystin (Cyanginosin);

11. Aflatoxins;

12. Abrin;

13. Cholera toxin;

14. Diacetoxyscirpenol toxin;

15. T-2 toxin;

16. HT-2 toxin;

17. Modeccin;

18. Volkensin;

19. Viscum album Lectin 1 (Viscumin).

Note: 1C351.d. does not control botulinum toxins or conotoxins in product form meeting all of the following criteria:

1.Are pharmaceutical formulations designed for human administration in the treatment of medical conditions;

2.Are pre-packaged for distribution as medical products;

3.Are authorised by a state authority to be marketed as medical products.

Note: 1C351 does not control «vaccines» or «immunotoxins».

1C352Animal pathogens, as follows:

a. Viruses, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of «isolated live cultures» or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1. African swine fever virus;

2. Avian influenza virus, which are:

a. Uncharacterised; or

b. Defined in EC Directive 92/40/EC (OJ L 16, 23.1.1992, p. 19) as having high pathogenicity, as follows:

1. Type A viruses with an IVPI (intravenous pathogenicity index) in 6-week-old chickens of greater than 1,2; or

2. Type A viruses H5 or H7 subtype for which nucletide sequencing has demonstrated multiple basic amino acids at the cleavage site of haemagglutinin;

3. Bluetongue virus;

4. Foot and mouth disease virus;

5. Goat pox virus;

6. Porcine herpes virus (Aujeszky's disease);

7. Swine fever virus (Hog cholera virus);

8. Lyssa virus;

9. Newcastle disease virus;

10. Peste des petits ruminants virus;

11. Porcine enterovirus type 9 (swine vesicular disease virus);

12. Rinderpest virus;

13. Sheep pox virus;

14. Teschen disease virus;

15. Vesicular stomatitis virus;

16. Lumpy skin disease virus;

17. African horse sickness virus.

b. Mycoplasma mycoides, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of «isolated live cultures» or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such Mycoplasma mycoides.

Note: 1C352 does not control «vaccines».

1C353Genetic elements and genetically modified organisms, as follows:

a. Genetically modified organisms or genetic elements that contain nucleic acid sequences associated with pathogenicity of organisms specified in 1C351.a. to c. or 1C352 or 1C354;

b. Genetically modified organisms or genetic elements that contain nucleic acid sequences coding for any of the «toxins» specified in 1C351.d. or «sub-units of toxins» thereof.

Technical Notes:

1. Genetic elements include, inter alia, chromosomes, genomes, plasmids, transposons and vectors whether genetically modified or unmodified.

2. Nucleic acid sequences associated with the pathogenicity of any of the micro-organisms specified in 1C351.a. to c. or 1C352 or 1C354 means any sequence specific to the specified micro-organism that:

a. In itself or through its transcribed or translated products represents a significant hazard to human, animal or plant health; or

b. Is known to enhance the ability of a specified micro-organism, or any other organism into which it may be inserted or otherwise integrated, to cause serious harm to humans, animals or plant health.

Note: 1C353 does not apply to nucleic acid sequences associated with the pathogenicity of enterohaemorrhagic Escherichia coli, serotype O157 and other verotoxin producing strains, other than those coding for the verotoxin, or for its sub-units.

1C354Plant pathogens, as follows:

a. Viruses, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of «isolated live cultures» or as material including living material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1. Potato Andean latent tymovirus;

2. Potato spindle tuber viroid;

b. Bacteria, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of «isolated live cultures» or as material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1. Xanthomonas albilineans;

2. Xanthomonas campestris pv. citri including strains referred to as Xanthomonas campestris pv. citri types A,B,C,D,E or otherwise classified as Xanthomonas citri, Xanthomonas campestris pv. aurantifolia or Xanthomonas campestris pv. citrumelo;

3. Xanthomonas oryzae pv. Oryzae (Pseudomonas campestris pv. Oryzae);

4. Clavibacter michiganensis subsp. Sepedonicus (Corynebacterium michiganensis subsp. Sepedonicum or Corynebacterium Sepedonicum);

5. Ralstonia solanacearum Races 2 and 3 (Pseudomonas solanacearum Races 2 and 3 or Burkholderia solanacearum Races 2 and 3);

c. Fungi, whether natural, enhanced or modified, either in the form of «isolated live cultures» or as material which has been deliberately inoculated or contaminated with such cultures, as follows:

1. Colletotrichum coffeanum var. virulans (Colletotrichum kahawae);

2. Cochliobolus miyabeanus (Helminthosporium oryzae);

3. Microcyclus ulei (syn. Dothidella ulei);

4. Puccinia graminis (syn. Puccinia graminis f. sp. tritici);

5. Puccinia striiformis (syn. Puccinia glumarum);

6. Magnaporthe grisea (pyricularia grisea/pyricularia oryzae).

1C450Toxic chemicals and toxic chemical precursors, as follows, and «chemical mixtures» containing one or more thereof:

N.B.: SEE ALSO ENTRY 1C350, 1C351.d. AND MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS.

a. Toxic chemicals, as follows:

1. Amiton: O,O-Diethyl S-[2-(diethylamino) ethyl] phosphorothiolate (78-53-5) and corresponding alkylated or protonated salts;

2. PFIB: 1,1,3,3,3-Pentafluoro-2-(trifluoromethyl)-1-propene (382-21-8);

3. SEE MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS FOR BZ: 3-Quinuclidinyl benzilate (6581-06-2);

4. Phosgene: Carbonyl dichloride (75-44-5);

5. Cyanogen chloride (506-77-4);

6. Hydrogen cyanide (74-90-8);

7. Chloropicrin: Trichloronitromethane (76-06-2);

Note 1: For exports to «States not Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention», 1C450 does not control «chemical mixtures» containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.a.1. and .a.2. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 1 % by the weight of the mixture.

Note 2: For exports to «States Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention», 1C450 does not control «chemical mixtures» containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.a.1. and .a.2. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30 % by the weight of the mixture.

Note 3: 1C450 does not control «chemical mixtures» containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.a.4., .a.5., .a.6. and .a.7. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30 % by the weight of the mixture.

b. Toxic chemical precursors, as follows:

1. Chemicals, other than those specified in the Military Goods Controls or in 1C350, containing a phosphorus atom to which is bonded one methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso) group but not further carbon atoms;

Note: 1C450.b.1. does not control Fonofos: O-Ethyl S-phenyl ethylphosphonothiolothionate (944-22-9);

2. N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] phosphoramidic dihalides;

3. Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] N,N-dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)]-phosphoramidates, other than Diethyl-N,N-dimethylphosphoramidate which is specified in 1C350;

4. N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethyl-2-chlorides and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride or N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethyl chloride hydrochloride which are specified in 1C350;

5. N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-ols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethanol (96-80-0) and N,N-Diethylaminoethanol (100-37-8) which are specified in 1C350;

Note: 1C450.b.5. does not control the following:

a.N,N-Dimethylaminoethanol (108-01-0) and corresponding protonated salts;

b.Protonated salts of N,N-Diethylaminoethanol (100-37-8);

6. N,N-Dialkyl [methyl, ethyl or propyl (normal or iso)] aminoethane-2-thiols and corresponding protonated salts, other than N,N-Diisopropyl-(beta)-aminoethane thiol which is specified in 1C350;

7. See 1C350 for ethyldiethanolamine (139-87-7);

8. Methyldiethanolamine (105-59-9).

Note 1: For exports to «States not Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention», 1C450 does not control «chemical mixtures» containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.b.1., .b.2., .b.3., .b.4., .b.5. and .b.6. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 10 % by the weight of the mixture.

Note 2: For exports to «States Party to the Chemical Weapons Convention», 1C450 does not control «chemical mixtures» containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entries 1C450.b.1., .b.2., .b.3., .b.4., .b.5. and .b.6. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30 % by the weight of the mixture.

Note 3: 1C450 does not control «chemical mixtures» containing one or more of the chemicals specified in entry 1C450.b.8. in which no individually specified chemical constitutes more than 30 % by the weight of the mixture.

Note: 1C450 does not control products identified as consumer goods packaged for retail sale for personal use or packaged for individual use.

1DSoftware

1D001«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment specified in 1B001 to 1B003.

1D002«Software» for the «development» of organic «matrix», metal «matrix» or carbon «matrix» laminates or «composites».

1D101«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of goods specified in 1B101, 1B102, 1B115, 1B117, 1B118 or 1B119.

1D103«Software» specially designed for analysis of reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures.

1D201«Software» specially designed for the «use» of goods specified in 1B201.

1ETechnology

1E001«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» or «production» of equipment or materials specified in 1A001.b., 1A001.c., 1A002 to 1A005, 1B or 1C.

1E002Other «technology», as follows:

a.«Technology» for the «development» or «production» of polybenzothiazoles or polybenzoxazoles;

b.«Technology» for the «development» or «production» of fluoroelastomer compounds containing at least one vinylether monomer;

c.«Technology» for the design or «production» of the following base materials or non-«composite» ceramic materials:

1. Base materials having all of the following characteristics:

a. Any of the following compositions:

1. Single or complex oxides of zirconium and complex oxides of silicon or aluminium;

2. Single nitrides of boron (cubic crystalline forms);

3. Single or complex carbides of silicon or boron; or

4. Single or complex nitrides of silicon;

b. Total metallic impurities, excluding intentional additions, of less than:

1.1000 ppm for single oxides or carbides; or

2.5000 ppm for complex compounds or single nitrides; and

c. Being any of the following:

1. Zirconia with an average particle size equal to or less than 1 μm and no more than 10 % of the particles larger than 5 μm;

2. Other base materials with an average particle size equal to or less than 5 μm and no more than 10 % of the particles larger than 10 μm; or

3. Having all of the following:

a. Platelets with a length to thickness ratio exceeding 5;

b. Whiskers with a length to diameter ratio exceeding 10 for diameters less than 2 μm; and

c. Continuous or chopped fibres less than 10 μm in diameter;

2. Non-«composite» ceramic materials composed of the materials described in 1E002.c.1.;

Note: 1E002.c.2. does not control «technology» for the design or production of abrasives.

d.«Technology» for the «production» of aromatic polyamide fibres;

e.«Technology» for the installation, maintenance or repair of materials specified in 1C001;

f.«Technology» for the repair of «composite» structures, laminates or materials specified in 1A002, 1C007.c. or 1C007.d.

Note: 1E002.f. does not control «technology» for the repair of «civil aircraft» structures using carbon «fibrous or filamentary materials» and epoxy resins, contained in aircraft manufacturers' manuals.

1E101«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of goods specified in 1A102, 1B001, 1B101, 1B102, 1B115 to 1B119, 1C001, 1C101, 1C107, 1C111 to 1C117, 1D101 or 1D103.

1E102«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» of «software» specified in 1D001, 1D101 or 1D103.

1E103«Technology» for the regulation of temperature, pressure or atmosphere in autoclaves or hydroclaves, when used for the «production» of «composites» or partially processed «composites».

1E104«Technology» relating to the «production» of pyrolytically derived materials formed on a mould, mandrel or other substrate from precursor gases which decompose in the 1573 K (1300 °C) to 3173 K (2900 °C) temperature range at pressures of 130 Pa to 20 kPa.

Note: 1E104 includes «technology» for the composition of precursor gases, flow-rates and process control schedules and parameters.

1E201«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of goods specified in 1A002, 1A202, 1A225 to 1A227, 1B201, 1B225 to 1B233, 1C002.b.3. or b. 4., 1C010.b., 1C202, 1C210, 1C216, 1C225 to 1C240 or 1D201.

1E202«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» or «production» of goods specified in 1A202 or 1A225 to 1A227.

1E203«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» of «software» specified in 1D201.

CATEGORY 2

MATERIALS PROCESSING

2ASystems, Equipment and Components

N.B.: For quiet running bearings, see the Military Goods Controls

2A001Anti-friction bearings and bearing systems, as follows, and components therefor:

Note: 2A001 does not control balls with tolerances specified by the manufacturer in accordance with ISO 3290 as grade 5 or worse.

a. Ball bearings and solid roller bearings having all tolerances specified by the manufacturer in accordance with ISO 492 Tolerance Class 4 (or ANSI/ABMA Std 20 Tolerance Class ABEC-7 or RBEC-7, or other national equivalents), or better, and having both rings and rolling elements (ISO 5593) made from monel or beryllium;

Note: 2A001.a. does not control tapered roller bearings.

b. Other ball bearings and solid roller bearings having all tolerances specified by the manufacturer in accordance with ISO 492 Tolerance Class 2 (or ANSI/ABMA Std 20 Tolerance Class ABEC-9 or RBEC-9, or other national equivalents), or better;

Note: 2A001.b. does not control tapered roller bearings.

c. Active magnetic bearing systems using any of the following:

1. Materials with flux densities of 2.0 T or greater and yield strengths greater than 414 MPa;

2. All-electromagnetic 3D homopolar bias designs for actuators; or

3. High temperature (450 K (117 °C) and above) position sensors.

2A225Crucibles made of materials resistant to liquid actinide metals, as follows:

a. Crucibles having both of the following characteristics:

1. A volume of between 150 cm3 and 8000 cm3; and

2. Made of or coated with any of the following materials, having a purity of 98 % or greater by weight:

a. Calcium fluoride (CaF2);

b. Calcium zirconate (metazirconate) (CaZrO3);

c. Cerium sulphide (Ce2S3);

d. Erbium oxide (erbia) (Er2O3);

e. Hafnium oxide (hafnia) (HfO2);

f. Magnesium oxide (MgO);

g. Nitrided niobium-titanium-tungsten alloy (approximately 50 % Nb, 30 % Ti, 20 % W);

h. Yttrium oxide (yttria) (Y2O3); or

i. Zirconium oxide (zirconia) (ZrO2);

b. Crucibles having both of the following characteristics:

1. A volume of between 50 cm3 and 2000 cm3; and

2. Made of or lined with tantalum, having a purity of 99,9 % or greater by weight;

c. Crucibles having all of the following characteristics:

1. A volume of between 50 cm3 and 2000 cm3;

2. Made of or lined with tantalum, having a purity of 98 % or greater by weight; and

3. Coated with tantalum carbide, nitride, boride, or any combination thereof.

2A226Valves having all of the following characteristics:

a. A «nominal size» of 5 mm or greater;

b. Having a bellows seal; and

c. Wholly made of or lined with aluminium, aluminium alloy, nickel, or nickel alloy containing more than 60 % nickel by weight.

Technical Note:

For valves with different inlet and outlet diameters, the «nominal size» in 2A226 refers to the smallest diameter .

2BTest, Inspection and Production Equipment

Technical Notes:

1.Secondary parallel contouring axes, (e.g., the w-axis on horizontal boring mills or a secondary rotary axis the centre line of which is parallel to the primary rotary axis) are not counted in the total number of contouring axes. Rotary axes need not rotate over 360°. A rotary axis can be driven by a linear device (e.g., a screw or a rack-and-pinion).

2.For the purposes of 2B, the number of axes which can be co-ordinated simultaneously for «contouring control» is the number of axes along or around which, during processing of the workpiece, simultaneous and interrelated motions are performed between the workpiece and a tool. This does not include any additional axes along or around which other relative movement within the machine are performed such as:

a.Wheel-dressing systems in grinding machines;

b.Parallel rotary axes designed for mounting of separate workpieces;

c.Co-linear rotary axes designed for manipulating the same workpiece by holding it in a chuck from different ends.

3.Axis nomenclature shall be in accordance with International Standard ISO 841, «Numerical Control Machines — Axis and Motion Nomenclature».

4.For the purposes of 2B001 to 2B009 a «tilting spindle» is counted as a rotary axis.

5.Stated positioning accuracy levels derived from measurements made according to ISO 230/2 (1988)[10] or national equivalents may be used for each machine tool model instead of individual machine tests. Stated positioning accuracy means the accuracy value provided to the competent authorities of the Member State in which the exporter is established as representative of the accuracy of a machine model.

Determination of Stated Values

a.Select five machines of a model to be evaluated;

b.Measure the linear axis accuracies according to ISO 230/2 (1988) [11];

c.Determine the A-values for each axis of each machine. The method of calculating the A-value is described in the ISO standard;

d.Determine the mean value of the A-value of each axis. This mean value  becomes the stated value of each axis for the model (Âx Ây...);

e.Since the Category 2 list refers to each linear axis there will be as many stated values as there are linear axes;

f.If any axis of a machine model not controlled by 2B001.a. to 2B001.c. or 2B201 has a stated accuracy  of 6 microns for grinding machines and 8 microns for milling and turning machines or better, the manufacturer should be required to reaffirm the accuracy level once every eighteen months.

2B001Machine tools and any combination thereof, for removing (or cutting) metals, ceramics or «composites», which, according to the manufacturer’s technical specification, can be equipped with electronic devices for «numerical control», and specially designed components as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B201.

Note 1: 2B001 does not control special purpose machine tools limited to the manufacture of gears. For such machines see 2B003.

Note 2: 2B001 does not control special purpose machine tools limited to the manufacture of any of the following parts:

a.Crankshafts or camshafts;

b.Tools or cutters;

c.Extruder worms;

d.Engraved or facetted jewellery parts.

Note 3: A machine tool having at least two of the three turning, milling or grinding capabilities (e.g., a turning machine with milling capability), must be evaluated against each applicable entry 2B001.a., b. or c.

a. Machine tools for turning, having all of the following characteristics:

1. Positioning accuracy with «all compensations available» equal to or less (better) than 6 μm according to ISO 230/2 (1988)[12] or national equivalents along any linear axis; and

2. Two or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control»;

Note: 2B001.a. does not control turning machines specially designed for the production of contact lenses.

b. Machine tools for milling, having any of the following characteristics:

1. Having all of the following:

a. Positioning accuracy with «all compensations available» equal to or less (better) than 6 μm according to ISO 230/2 (1988)[13] or national equivalents along any linear axis; and

b. Three linear axes plus one rotary axis which can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control»;

2. Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control»;

3. A positioning accuracy for jig boring machines, with all «compensations available», equal to or less (better) than 4 μm according to ISO 230/2 (1988)[14] or national equivalents along any linear axis; or

4. Fly cutting machines, having all of the following characteristics:

a. Spindle«run-out» and «camming» less (better) than 0,0004 mm TIR; and

b. Angular deviation of slide movement (yaw, pitch and roll) less (better) than 2 seconds of arc, TIR over 300 mm of travel.

c. Machine tools for grinding, having any of the following characteristics:

1. Having all of the following:

a. Positioning accuracy with «all compensations available» equal to or less (better) than 4 μm according to ISO 230/2 (1988)[15] or national equivalents along any linear axis; and

b. Three or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control»; or

2. Five or more axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control»;

Note: 2B001.c. does not control grinding machines, as follows:

1.Cylindrical external, internal, and external-internal grinding machines having all the following characteristics:

a.Limited to cylindrical grinding; and

b.Limited to a maximum workpiece capacity of 150 mm outside diameter or length.

2.Machines designed specifically as jig grinders that do not have a z-axis or a w-axis, with a positioning accuracy with «all compensations available» less (better) than 4 μm according to ISO 230/2 (1988)[16] or national equivalents.

3.Surface grinders.

d. Electrical discharge machines (EDM) of the non-wire type which have two or more rotary axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control»;

e. Machine tools for removing metals, ceramics or «composites» having all of the following characteristics:

1. Removing material by means of any of the following:

a. Water or other liquid jets, including those employing abrasive additives;

b. Electron beam; or

c.«Laser» beam; and

2. Having two or more rotary axes which:

a. Can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control»; and

b. Have a positioning accuracy of less (better) than 0,003°;

f. Deep-hole-drilling machines and turning machines modified for deep-hole-drilling, having a maximum depth-of-bore capability exceeding 5000 mm and specially designed components therefor.

2B002Numerically controlled machine tools using a magnetorheological finishing (MRF) process equipped to produce non-spherical surfaces and having any of the following characteristics:

a. Finishing the form to less (better) than 1.0 μm; or

b. Finishing to a roughness less (better) than 100 nm rms.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 2B002, MRF is a material removal process using an abrasive magnetic fluid whose viscosity is controlled by a magnetic field.

2B003«Numerically controlled» or manual machine tools, and specially designed components, controls and accessories therefor, specially designed for the shaving, finishing, grinding or honing of hardened (Rc = 40 or more) spur, helical and double-helical gears with a pitch diameter exceeding 1250 mm and a face width of 15 % of pitch diameter or larger finished to a quality of AGMA 14 or better (equivalent to ISO 1328 class 3).

2B004Hot«isostatic presses», having all of the following, and specially designed components and accessories therefor:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B104 and 2B204.

a. A controlled thermal environment within the closed cavity and a chamber cavity with an inside diameter of 406 mm or more; and

b. Any of the following:

1. A maximum working pressure exceeding 207 MPa;

2. A controlled thermal environment exceeding 1773 K (1500 °C); or

3. A facility for hydrocarbon impregnation and removal of resultant gaseous degradation products.

Technical Note:

The inside chamber dimension is that of the chamber in which both the working temperature and the working pressure are achieved and does not include fixtures. That dimension will be the smaller of either the inside diameter of the pressure chamber or the inside diameter of the insulated furnace chamber, depending on which of the two chambers is located inside the other.

N.B.: For specially designed dies, moulds and tooling see 1B003, 9B009 and the Military Goods Controls.

2B005Equipment specially designed for the deposition, processing and in-process control of inorganic overlays, coatings and surface modifications, as follows, for non-electronic substrates, by processes shown in the Table and associated Notes following 2E003.f., and specially designed automated handling, positioning, manipulation and control components therefor:

a. Chemical vapour deposition (CVD) production equipment having all of the following:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B105.

1. Process modified for one of the following:

a. Pulsating CVD;

b. Controlled nucleation thermal deposition (CNTD); or

c. Plasma enhanced or plasma assisted CVD; and

2. Any of the following:

a. Incorporating high vacuum (equal to or less than 0.01 Pa) rotating seals; or

b. Incorporating in situ coating thickness control;

b. Ion implantation production equipment having beam currents of 5 mA or more;

c. Electron beam physical vapour deposition (EB-PVD) production equipment incorporating power systems rated for over 80 kW, having any of the following:

1. A liquid pool level «laser» control system which regulates precisely the ingots feed rate; or

2. A computer controlled rate monitor operating on the principle of photo-luminescence of the ionised atoms in the evaporant stream to control the deposition rate of a coating containing two or more elements;

d. Plasma spraying production equipment having any of the following characteristics:

1. Operating at reduced pressure controlled atmosphere (equal to or less than 10 kPa measured above and within 300 mm of the gun nozzle exit) in a vacuum chamber capable of evacuation down to 0.01 Pa prior to the spraying process; or

2. Incorporating in situ coating thickness control;

e. Sputter deposition production equipment capable of current densities of 0,1 mA/mm2 or higher at a deposition rate of 15 μm/h or more;

f. Cathodic arc deposition production equipment incorporating a grid of electromagnets for steering control of the arc spot on the cathode;

g. Ion plating production equipment allowing for the in situ measurement of any of the following:

1. Coating thickness on the substrate and rate control; or

2. Optical characteristics.

Note: 2B005 does not control chemical vapour deposition, cathodic arc, sputter deposition, ion plating or ion implantation equipment specially designed for cutting or machining tools.

2B006Dimensional inspection or measuring systems, equipment, and «electronic assemblies», as follows:

a. Computer controlled or «numerically controlled» co-ordinate measuring machines (CMM), having a three dimensional (volumetric) maximum permissible error of indication (MPEE) at any point within the operating range of the machine (i.e., within the length of axes) equal to or less (better) than (1,7 + L/1000) μm (L is the measured length in mm), tested according to ISO 10360-2 (2001);

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B206.

b. Linear and angular displacement measuring instruments, as follows:

1. Linear displacement measuring instruments having any of the following:

Technical Note:

For the purpose of 2B006.b.1. «linear displacement» means the change of distance between the measuring probe and the measured object.

a. Non-contact type measuring systems with a «resolution» equal to or less (better) than 0,2 μm within a measuring range up to 0,2 mm;

b. Linear voltage differential transformer systems having all of the following characteristics:

1.«Linearity» equal to or less (better) than 0,1 % within a measuring range up to 5 mm; and

2. Drift equal to or less (better) than 0.1% per day at a standard ambient test room temperature ± 1 K; or

c. Measuring systems having all of the following:

1. Containing a «laser»; and

2. Maintaining, for at least 12 hours, over a temperature range of ± 1 K around a standard temperature and at a standard pressure, all of the following:

a. A «resolution» over their full scale of 0,1 μm or less (better); and

b. A «measurement uncertainty» equal to or less (better) than (0,2 + L/2000) μm (L is the measured length in mm);

d.« Electronic assemblies » specially designed to provide feedback capability in systems specified in 2B006.b.1.c.;

Note: 2B006.b.1. does not control measuring interferometer systems, with an automatic control system that is designed to use no feedback techniques, containing a «laser» to measure slide movement errors of machine-tools, dimensional inspection machines or similar equipment.

2. Angular displacement measuring instruments having an «angular position deviation» equal to or less (better) than 0,00025°;

Note: 2B006.b.2. does not control optical instruments, such as autocollimators, using collimated light (e.g. laser light) to detect angular displacement of a mirror.

c. Equipment for measuring surface irregularities, by measuring optical scatter as a function of angle, with a sensitivity of 0,5 nm or less (better).

Note: Machine tools which can be used as measuring machines are controlled if they meet or exceed the criteria specified for the machine tool function or the measuring machine function.

2B007«Robots» having any of the following characteristics and specially designed controllers and «end-effectors» therefor:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B207.

a. Capable in real time of full three-dimensional image processing or full three-dimensional «scene analysis» to generate or modify «programmes» or to generate or modify numerical programme data;

Technical Note:

The «scene analysis» limitation does not include approximation of the third dimension by viewing at a given angle, or limited grey scale interpretation for the perception of depth or texture for the approved tasks (2 1 / 2 D).

b. Specially designed to comply with national safety standards applicable to explosive munitions environments;

c. Specially designed or rated as radiation-hardened to withstand a total radiation dose greater than 5 × 103 Gy (silicon) without operational degradation; or

Technical Note:

The term Gy(silicon) refers to the energy in Joules per kilogram absorbed by an unshielded silicon sample when exposed to ionising radiation.

d. Specially designed to operate at altitudes exceeding 30000 m.

2B008Assemblies or units, specially designed for machine tools, or dimensional inspection or measuring systems and equipment, as follows:

a. Linear position feedback units (e.g., inductive type devices, graduated scales, infrared systems or «laser» systems) having an overall «accuracy» less (better) than (800 + (600 × L × 10 –3)) nm (L equals the effective length in mm);

N.B.: For «laser» systems see also Note to 2B006.b.1.

b. Rotary position feedback units (e.g., inductive type devices, graduated scales, infrared systems or «laser» systems) having an «accuracy» less (better) than 0,00025°;

N.B.: For «laser» systems see also Note to 2B006.b.1.

c.«Compound rotary tables» and «tilting spindles», capable of upgrading, according to the manufacturer's specifications, machine tools to or above the levels specified in 2B.

2B009Spin-forming machines and flow-forming machines, which, according to the manufacturer's technical specification, can be equipped with «numerical control» units or a computer control and having all of the following:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B109 AND 2B209.

a. Two or more controlled axes of which at least two can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control»; and

b. A roller force more than 60 kN.

Technical Note:

Machines combining the function of spin-forming and flow-forming are for the purpose of 2B009 regarded as flow-forming machines.

2B104«Isostatic presses», other than those specified in 2B004, having all of the following:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B204.

a. Maximum working pressure of 69 MPa or greater;;

b. Designed to achieve and maintain a controlled thermal environment of 873 K (600 °C) or greater; and

c. Possessing a chamber cavity with an inside diameter of 254 mm or greater.

2B105Chemical vapour deposition (CVD) furnaces, other than those specified in 2B005.a., designed or modified for the densification of carbon-carbon composites.

2B109Flow-forming machines, other than those specified in 2B009, and specially designed components as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B209.

a. Flow-forming machines having all of the following:

1. According to the manufacturer's technical specification, can be equipped with «numerical control» units or a computer control, even when not equipped with such units; and

2. With more than two axes which can be coordinated simultaneously for «contouring control».

b. Specially designed components for flow-forming machines specified in 2B009 or 2B109.a.

Note: 2B109 does not control machines that are not usable in the production of propulsion components and equipment (e.g. motor cases) for systems specified in 9A005, 9A007.a. or 9A105.a.

Technical Note:

Machines combining the function of spin-forming and flow-forming are for the purpose of 2B109 regarded as flow-forming machines.

2B116Vibration test systems, equipment and components therefor, as follows:

a. Vibration test systems employing feedback or closed loop techniques and incorporating a digital controller, capable of vibrating a system at an acceleration equal to or greater than 10 g rms between 20 Hz and 2 kHz and imparting forces equal to or greater than 50 kN, measured «bare table»;

b. Digital controllers, combined with specially designed vibration test software, with a «real time bandwidth» greater than 5 kHz designed for use with vibration test systems specified in 2B116.a.;

c. Vibration thrusters (shaker units), with or without associated amplifiers, capable of imparting a force equal to or greater than 50 kN, measured «bare table», and usable in vibration test systems specified in 2B116.a.;

d. Test piece support structures and electronic units designed to combine multiple shaker units in a system capable of providing an effective combined force equal to or greater than 50 kN, measured «bare table», and usable in vibration systems specified in 2B116.a.

Technical Note:

In 2B116, «bare table» means a flat table, or surface, with no fixture or fittings.

2B117Equipment and process controls, other than those specified in 2B004, 2B005.a., 2B104 or 2B105, designed or modified for densification and pyrolysis of structural composite rocket nozzles and re-entry vehicle nose tips.

2B119Balancing machines and related equipment, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 2B219.

a. Balancing machines having all the following characteristics:

1. Not capable of balancing rotors/assemblies having a mass greater than 3 kg;

2. Capable of balancing rotors/assemblies at speeds greater than 12500 rpm;

3. Capable of correcting unbalance in two planes or more; and

4. Capable of balancing to a residual specific unbalance of 0,2 g mm per kg of rotor mass;

Note: 2B119.a. does not control balancing machines designed or modified for dental or other medical equipment.

b. Indicator heads designed or modified for use with machines specified in 2B119.a.

Technical Note:

Indicator heads are sometimes known as balancing instrumentation.

2B120Motion simulators or rate tables having all of the following characteristics:

a. Two axes or more;

b. Slip rings capable of transmitting electrical power and/or signal information; and

c. Having any of the following characteristics:

1. For any single axis having all of the following:

a. Capable of rates of 400 degrees/s or more, or 30 degrees/s or less; and

b. A rate resolution equal to or less than 6 degrees/s and an accuracy equal to or less than 0,6 degrees/s;

2. Having a worst-case rate stability equal to or better (less) than plus or minus 0,05 % averaged over 10 degrees or more; or

3. A positioning accuracy equal to or better than 5 arc second.

Note: 2B120 does not control rotary tables designed or modified for machine tools or for medical equipment. For controls on machine tool rotary tables see 2B008.

2B121Positioning tables (equipment capable of precise rotary positioning in any axes), other than those specified in 2B120, having all the following characteristics:

a. Two axes or more; and

b. A positioning accuracy equal to or better than 5 arc second.

Note: 2B121 does not control rotary tables designed or modified for machine tools or for medical equipment. For controls on machine tool rotary tables see 2B008.

2B122Centrifuges capable of imparting accelerations above 100 g and having slip rings capable of transmitting electrical power and signal information.

2B201Machine tools and any combination thereof, other than those specified in 2B001, as follows, for removing or cutting metals, ceramics or «composites», which, according to the manufacturer’s technical specification, can be equipped with electronic devices for simultaneous «contouring control» in two or more axes:

a. Machine tools for milling, having any of the following characteristics:

1. Positioning accuracies with «all compensations available» equal to or less (better) than 6 μm according to ISO 230/2 (1988)[17] or national equivalents along any linear axis; or

2. Two or more contouring rotary axes;

Note: 2B201.a. does not control milling machines having the following characteristics:

a.X-axis travel greater than 2 m; and

b.Overall positioning accuracy on the x-axis more (worse) than 30 μm.

b. Machine tools for grinding, having any of the following characteristics:

1. Positioning accuracies with «all compensations available» equal to or less (better) than 4 μm according to ISO 230/2 (1988)[18] or national equivalents along any linear axis; or

2. Two or more contouring rotary axes.

Note: 2B201.b. does not control the following grinding machines:

a.Cylindrical external, internal, and external-internal grinding machines having all of the following characteristics:

1.Limited to a maximum workpiece capacity of 150 mm outside diameter or length; and

2.Axes limited to x, z and c;

b.Jig grinders that do not have a z-axis or a w-axis with an overall positioning accuracy less (better) than 4 μm according to ISO 230/2 (1988)[19] or national equivalents.

Note 1: 2B201 does not control special purpose machine tools limited to the manufacture of any of the following parts:

a.Gears;

b.Crankshafts or camshafts;

c.Tools or cutters;

d.Extruder worms.

Note 2: A machine tool having at least two of the three turning, milling or grinding capabilities (e.g., a turning machine with milling capability), must be evaluated against each applicable entry 2B001.a. or 2B201.a. or b.

2B204«Isostatic presses», other than those specified in 2B004 or 2B104, and related equipment, as follows:

a.«Isostatic presses» having both of the following characteristics:

1. Capable of achieving a maximum working pressure of 69 MPa or greater; and

2. A chamber cavity with an inside diameter in excess of 152 mm;

b. Dies, moulds and controls, specially designed for «isostatic presses» specified in 2B204.a.

Technical Note:

In 2B204 the inside chamber dimension is that of the chamber in which both the working temperature and the working pressure are achieved and does not include fixtures. That dimension will be the smaller of either the inside diameter of the pressure chamber or the inside diameter of the insulated furnace chamber, depending on which of the two chambers is located inside the other.

2B206Dimensional inspection machines, instruments or systems, other than those specified in 2B006, as follows:

a. Computer controlled or numerically controlled dimensional inspection machines having both of the following characteristics:

1. Two or more axes; and

2. A one-dimensional length «measurement uncertainty» equal to or less (better) than (1,25 + L/1000) μm tested with a probe of an «accuracy» of less (better) than 0,2 μm (L is the measured length in millimetres) (Ref.: VDI/VDE 2617 Parts 1 and 2);

b. Systems for simultaneous linear-angular inspection of hemishells, having both of the following characteristics:

1.«Measurement uncertainty» along any linear axis equal to or less (better) than 3,5 μm per 5 mm; and

2.«Angular position deviation» equal to or less than 0,02°.

Note 1: Machine tools that can be used as measuring machines are controlled if they meet or exceed the criteria specified for the machine tool function or the measuring machine function.

Note 2: A machine specified in 2B206 is controlled if it exceeds the control threshold anywhere within its operating range.

Technical Notes:

1.The probe used in determining the measurement uncertainty of a dimensional inspection system shall be described in VDI/VDE 2617 parts 2, 3 and 4.

2.All parameters of measurement values in 2B206 represent plus/minus i.e., not total band.

2B207«Robots», «end-effectors» and control units, other than those specified in 2B007, as follows:

a.«Robots» or «end-effectors» specially designed to comply with national safety standards applicable to handling high explosives (for example, meeting electrical code ratings for high explosives);

b. Control units specially designed for any of the «robots» or «end-effectors» specified in 2B207.a.

2B209Flow forming machines, spin forming machines capable of flow forming functions, other than those specified in 2B009 or 2B109, and mandrels, as follows:

a. Machines having both of the following characteristics:

1. Three or more rollers (active or guiding); and

2. Which, according to the manufacturer's technical specification, can be equipped with «numerical control» units or a computer control;

b. Rotor-forming mandrels designed to form cylindrical rotors of inside diameter between 75 mm and 400 mm.

Note: 2B209.a. includes machines which have only a single roller designed to deform metal plus two auxiliary rollers which support the mandrel, but do not participate directly in the deformation process.

2B219Centrifugal multiplane balancing machines, fixed or portable, horizontal or vertical, as follows:

a. Centrifugal balancing machines designed for balancing flexible rotors having a length of 600 mm or more and having all of the following characteristics:

1. Swing or journal diameter greater than 75 mm;

2. Mass capability of from 0,9 to 23 kg; and

3. Capable of balancing speed of revolution greater than 5000 r.p.m.;

b. Centrifugal balancing machines designed for balancing hollow cylindrical rotor components and having all of the following characteristics:

1. Journal diameter greater than 75 mm;

2. Mass capability of from 0,9 to 23 kg;

3. Capable of balancing to a residual imbalance equal to or less than 0,01 kg × mm/kg per plane; and

4. Belt drive type.

2B225Remote manipulators that can be used to provide remote actions in radiochemical separation operations or hot cells, having either of the following characteristics:

a. A capability of penetrating 0,6 m or more of hot cell wall (through-the-wall operation); or

b. A capability of bridging over the top of a hot cell wall with a thickness of 0,6 m or more (over-the-wall operation).

Technical Note:

Remote manipulators provide translation of human operator actions to a remote operating arm and terminal fixture. They may be of «master/slave» type or operated by joystick or keypad.

2B226Controlled atmosphere (vacuum or inert gas) induction furnaces, and power supplies therefor, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 3B.

a. Furnaces having all of the following characteristics:

1. Capable of operation above 1123 K (850 °C);

2. Induction coils 600 mm or less in diameter; and

3. Designed for power inputs of 5 kW or more;

b. Power supplies, with a specified power output of 5 kW or more, specially designed for furnaces specified in 2B226.a.

Note: 2B226.a. does not control furnaces designed for the processing of semiconductor wafers.

2B227Vacuum or other controlled atmosphere metallurgical melting and casting furnaces and related equipment as follows:

a. Arc remelt and casting furnaces having both of the following characteristics:

1. Consumable electrode capacities between 1000 cm3 and 20000 cm3, and

2. Capable of operating with melting temperatures above 1973 K (1700 °C);

b. Electron beam melting furnaces and plasma atomization and melting furnaces, having both of the following characteristics:

1. A power of 50 kW or greater; and

2. Capable of operating with melting temperatures above 1473 K (1200 °C).

c. Computer control and monitoring systems specially configured for any of the furnaces specified in 2B227.a. or b.

2B228Rotor fabrication or assembly equipment, rotor straightening equipment, bellows-forming mandrels and dies, as follows:

a. Rotor assembly equipment for assembly of gas centrifuge rotor tube sections, baffles, and end caps;

Note: 2B228.a. includes precision mandrels, clamps, and shrink fit machines.

b. Rotor straightening equipment for alignment of gas centrifuge rotor tube sections to a common axis;

Technical Note:

In 2B228.b. such equipment normally consists of precision measuring probes linked to a computer that subsequently controls the action of, for example, pneumatic rams used for aligning the rotor tube sections.

c. Bellows-forming mandrels and dies for producing single-convolution bellows.

Technical Note:

In 2B228.c. the bellows have all of the following characteristics:

1.Inside diameter between 75 mm and 400 mm;

2. Length equal to or greater than 12,7 mm;

3. Single convolution depth greater than 2 mm; and

4. Made of high-strength aluminium alloys, maraging steel or high-strength «fibrous or filamentary materials».

2B230«Pressure transducers» capable of measuring absolute pressures at any point in the range 0 to 13 kPa and having both of the following characteristics:

a. Pressure sensing elements made of or protected by aluminium, aluminium alloy, nickel or nickel alloy with more than 60 % nickel by weight; and

b. Having either of the following characteristics:

1. A full scale of less than 13 kPa and an«accuracy» of better than ± 1 % of full scale; or

2. A full scale of 13 kPa or greater and an «accuracy» of better than ± 130 Pa.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 2B230, «accuracy» includes non-linearity, hysteresis and repeatability at ambient temperature.

2B231Vacuum pumps having all of the following characteristics:

a. Input throat size equal to or greater than 380 mm;

b. Pumping speed equal to or greater than 15 m3/s; and

c. Capable of producing an ultimate vacuum better than 13 mPa.

Technical Notes:

1.The pumping speed is determined at the measurement point with nitrogen gas or air.

2.The ultimate vacuum is determined at the input of the pump with the input of the pump blocked off.

2B232Multistage light gas guns or other high-velocity gun systems (coil, electromagnetic, and electrothermal types, and other advanced systems) capable of accelerating projectiles to 2 km/s or greater.

2B350Chemical manufacturing facilities, equipment and components, as follows:

a. Reaction vessels or reactors, with or without agitators, with total internal (geometric) volume greater than 0,1 m3 (100 litres) and less than 20 m3 (20000 litres), where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight;

2. Fluoropolymers;

3. Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coating or glass lining);

4. Nickel or alloys with more than 40 % nickel by weight;

5. Tantalum or tantalum alloys;

6. Titanium or titanium alloys; or

7. Zirconium or zirconium alloys;

b. Agitators for use in reaction vessels or reactors specified in 2B350.a.; and impellers, blades or shafts designed for such agitators, where all surfaces of the agitator that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight;

2. Fluoropolymers;

3. Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4. Nickel or alloys with more than 40 % nickel by weight;

5. Tantalum or tantalum alloys;

6. Titanium or titanium alloys; or

7. Zirconium or zirconium alloys;

c. Storage tanks, containers or receivers with a total internal (geometric) volume greater than 0,1 m3 (100 litres) where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight;

2. Fluoropolymers;

3. Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4. Nickel or alloys with more than 40 % nickel by weight;

5. Tantalum or tantalum alloys;

6. Titanium or titanium alloys; or

7. Zirconium or zirconium alloys;

d. Heat exchangers or condensers with a heat transfer surface area greater than 0,15 m2, and less than 20 m2; and tubes, plates, coils or blocks (cores) designed for such heat exchangers or condensers, where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight;

2. Fluoropolymers;

3. Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4. Graphite or «carbon graphite»;

5. Nickel or alloys with more than 40 % nickel by weight;

6. Tantalum or tantalum alloys;

7. Titanium or titanium alloys;

8. Zirconium or zirconium alloys;

9. Silicon carbide; or

10. Titanium carbide;

e. Distillation or absorption columns of internal diameter greater than 0,1 m; and liquid distributers, vapour distributers or liquid collectors designed for such distillation or absorbtion columns, where all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight;

2. Fluoropolymers;

3. Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4. Graphite or «carbon graphite»;

5. Nickel or alloys with more than 40 % nickel by weight;

6. Tantalum or tantalum alloys;

7. Titanium or titanium alloys; or

8. Zirconium or zirconium alloys;

f. Remotely operated filling equipment in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight; or

2. Nickel or alloys with more than 40 % nickel by weight;

g. Valves with nominal sizes greater than 10 mm and casings (valve bodies) or preformed casing liners designed for such valves, in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight;

2. Fluoropolymers;

3. Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4. Nickel or alloys with more than 40 % nickel by weight;

5. Tantalum or tantalum alloys;

6. Titanium or titanium alloys; or

7. Zirconium or zirconium alloys;

h. Multi-walled piping incorporating a leak detection port, in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed or contained are made from any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight;

2. Fluoropolymers;

3. Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

4. Graphite or «carbon graphite»;

5. Nickel or alloys with more than 40 % nickel by weight;

6. Tantalum or tantalum alloys;

7. Titanium or titanium alloys; or

8. Zirconium or zirconium alloys;

i. Multiple-seal, and seal-less pumps, with manufacturer's specified maximum flow-rate greater than 0,6 m3/hour, or vacuum pumps with manufacturer's specified maximum flow-rate greater than 5 m3/hour (under standard temperature (273 K (0 °C)) and pressure (101,3 kPa) conditions); and casings (pump bodies), preformed casing liners, impellers, rotors or jet pump nozzles designed for such pumps, in which all surfaces that come in direct contact with the chemical(s) being processed are made from any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight;

2. Ceramics;

3. Ferrosilicon;

4. Fluoropolymers;

5. Glass (including vitrified or enamelled coatings or glass lining);

6. Graphite or «carbon graphite»;

7. Nickel or alloys with more than 40 % nickel by weight;

8. Tantalum or tantalum alloys;

9. Titanium or titanium alloys; or

10. Zirconium or zirconium alloys;

j. Incinerators designed to destroy chemicals specified in entry 1C350, having specially designed waste supply systems, special handling facilities and an average combustion chamber temperature greater than 1273 K (1000 °C), in which all surfaces in the waste supply system that come into direct contact with the waste products are made from or lined with any of the following materials:

1. Alloys with more than 25 % nickel and 20 % chromium by weight;

2. Ceramics; or

3. Nickel or alloys with more than 40% nickel by weight.

Technical Note:

«Carbon graphite» is a composition consisting of amorphous carbon and graphite, in which the graphite content is eight percent or more by weight.

2B351Toxic gas monitoring systems, as follows; and dedicated detectors therefor:

a. Designed for continuous operation and usable for the detection of chemical warfare agents or chemicals specified in 1C350, at concentrations of less than 0,3 mg/m3; or

b. Designed for the detection of cholinesterase-inhibiting activity.

2B352Equipment capable of use in handling biological materials, as follows:

a. Complete biological containment facilities at P3, P4 containment level;

Technical Note:

P3 or P4 (BL3, BL4, L3, L4) containment levels are as specified in the WHO Laboratory Biosafety manual (2nd edition, Geneva 1993).

b. Fermenters capable of cultivation of pathogenic «micro-organisms», viruses or capable of toxin production, without the propagation of aerosols, and having a total capacity of 20 litres or more;

Technical Note:

Fermenters include bioreactors, chemostats and continuous-flow systems.

c. Centrifugal separators, capable of continuous separation without the propagation of aerosols, having all the following characteristics:

1. Flow rate exceeding 100 litres per hour;

2. Components of polished stainless steel or titanium;

3. One or more sealing joints within the steam containment area; and

4. Capable of in-situ steam sterilisation in a closed state;

Technical Note:

Centrifugal separators include decanters.

d. Cross (tangential) flow filtration equipment and components as follows:

1. Cross (tangential) flow filtration equipment capable of separation of pathogenic micro-organisms, viruses, toxins or cell cultures, without the propagation of aerosols, having both of the following characteristics:

a. A total filtration area equal to or greater than 1 m2; and

b. Capable of being sterilised or disinfected in-situ;

Technical Note:

In 2B352.d.1.b. sterlised denotes the elimination of all viable microbes from the equipment through the use of either physical (e.g. steam) or chemical agents. Disinfected denotes the destruction of potential microbial infectivity in the equipment through the use of chemical agents with a germicidal effect. Disinfection and sterilisation are distinct from sanitisation, the latter referring to cleaning procedures designed to lower the microbial content of equipment without necessarily achieving elimination of all microbial infectivity or viability.

2. Cross (tangential) flow filtration components (e.g. modules, elements, cassettes, cartridges, units or plates) with filtration area equal to or greater than 0,2 m2 for each component and designed for use in cross (tangential) flow filtration equipment specified in 2B352.d.;

Note: 2B352.d. does not control reverse osmosis equipment, as specified by the manufacturer.

e. Steam sterilisable freeze drying equipment with a condenser capacity exceeding 10 kg of ice in 24 hours and less than 1000 kg of ice in 24 hours;

f. Protective and containment equipment, as follows:

1. Protective full or half suits, or hoods dependent upon a tethered external air supply and operating under positive pressure;

Note: 2B352.f.1. does not control suits designed to be worn with self-contained breathing apparatus.

2. Class III biological safety cabinets or isolators with similar performance standards;

Note: In 2B352.f.2., isolators include flexible isolators, dry boxes, anaerobic chambers, glove boxes and laminar flow hoods (closed with vertical flow).

g. Chambers designed for aerosol challenge testing with «micro-organisms», viruses or «toxins», and having a capacity of 1 m3 or greater.

2CMaterials

None.

2DSoftware

2D001«Software», other than that specified in 2D002, specially designed or modified for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment specified in 2A001 or 2B001 to 2B009.

2D002«Software» for electronic devices, even when residing in an electronic device or system, enabling such devices or systems to function as a «numerical control» unit, capable of co-ordinating simultaneously more than four axes for «contouring control».

Note 1: 2D002 does not control «software» specially designed or modified for the operation of machine tools not specified in Category 2.

Note 2: 2D002 does not control «software» for items specified in 2B002. See 2D001 for control of «software» for items specified in 2B002.

2D101«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of equipment specified in 2B104, 2B105, 2B109, 2B116, 2B117 or 2B119 to 2B122.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9D004.

2D201«Software» specially designed for the «use» of equipment specified in 2B204, 2B206, 2B207, 2B209, 2B219 or 2B227.

2D202«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment specified in 2B201.

2ETechnology

2E001«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» of equipment or «software» specified in 2A, 2B or 2D.

2E002«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «production»of equipment specified in 2A or 2B.

2E003Other «technology», as follows:

a.«Technology» for the «development» of interactive graphics as an integrated part in «numerical control» units for preparation or modification of part programmes;

b.«Technology» for metal-working manufacturing processes, as follows:

1.«Technology» for the design of tools, dies or fixtures specially designed for any of the following processes:

a.«Superplastic forming»;

b.«Diffusion bonding»; or

c.«Direct-acting hydraulic pressing»;

2. Technical data consisting of process methods or parameters as listed below used to control:

a.«Superplastic forming» of aluminium alloys, titanium alloys or «superalloys»:

1. Surface preparation;

2. Strain rate;

3. Temperature;

4. Pressure;

b.«Diffusion bonding» of «superalloys» or titanium alloys:

1. Surface preparation;

2. Temperature;

3. Pressure;

c.«Direct-acting hydraulic pressing» of aluminium alloys or titanium alloys:

1. Pressure;

2. Cycle time;

d.«Hot isostatic densification» of titanium alloys, aluminium alloys or «superalloys»:

1. Temperature;

2. Pressure;

3. Cycle time;

c.«Technology» for the «development» or «production» of hydraulic stretch-forming machines and dies therefor, for the manufacture of airframe structures;

d.«Technology» for the «development» of generators of machine tool instructions (e.g., part programmes) from design data residing inside «numerical control» units;

e.«Technology» for the «development» of integration «software» for incorporation of expert systems for advanced decision support of shop floor operations into «numerical control» units;

f.«Technology» for the application of inorganic overlay coatings or inorganic surface modification coatings (specified in column 3 of the following table) to non-electronic substrates (specified in column 2 of the following table), by processes specified in column 1 of the following table and defined in the Technical Note.

Note: The table and Technical Note appear after entry 2E301.

2E101«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment or «software» specified in 2B004, 2B009, 2B104, 2B109, 2B116, 2B119 to 2B122 or 2D101.

2E201«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment or«software» specified in 2A225, 2A226, 2B001, 2B006, 2B007.b., 2B007.c., 2B008, 2B009, 2B201, 2B204, 2B206, 2B207, 2B209, 2B225 to 2B232, 2D201 or 2D202.

2E301«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of goods specified in 2B350 to 2B352.

Table |

Deposition techniques |

1. Coating Process (1)[20] | 2. Substrate | 3. Resultant Coating |

A. Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) | «Superalloys» | Aluminides for internal passages |

Ceramics (19) and Low-expansion glasses (14) | Silicides Carbides Dielectric layers (15) Diamond Diamond-like carbon (17) |

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal «matrix»«composites» | Silicides Carbides Refractory metals Mixtures thereof (4) Dielectric layers (15) Aluminides Alloyed aluminides (2) Boron nitride |

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide (18) | Carbides Tungsten Mixtures thereof (4) Dielectric layers (15) |

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys | Dielectric layers (15) |

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys | Dielectric layers (15) Diamond Diamond-like carbon (17) |

Sensor window materials (9) | Dielectric layers (15) Diamond Diamond-like carbon (17) |

B. Thermal-Evaporation Physical Vapour Deposition (TE-PVD) |

B.1. Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD): Electron-Beam (EB-PVD) | «Superalloys» | Alloyed silicides Alloyed aluminides (2) MCrAlX (5) Modified zirconia (12) Silicides Aluminides Mixtures thereof (4) |

Ceramics (19) and Low expansion glasses (14) | Dielectric layers (15) |

Corrosion resistant steel (7) | MCrAlX (5) Modified zirconia (12) Mixtures thereof (4) |

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal «matrix»«composites» | Silicides Carbides Refractory metals Mixtures thereof (4) Dielectric layers (15) Boron nitride |

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide (18) | Carbides Tungsten Mixtures thereof (4) Dielectric layers (15) |

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys | Dielectric layers (15) |

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys | Dielectric layers (15) Borides Beryllium |

Sensor window materials (9) | Dielectric layers (15) |

Titanium alloys (13) | Borides Nitrides |

B.2. Ion assisted resistive heating Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD) (Ion Plating) | Ceramics (19) and Low-expansion glasses (14) | Dielectric layers (15) Diamond-like carbon (17) |

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal «matrix»«composites» | Dielectric layers (15) |

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide | Dielectric layers (15) |

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys | Dielectric layers (15) |

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys | Dielectric layers (15) |

Sensor window materials (9) | Dielectric layers (15) Diamond-like carbon (17) |

B.3. Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD): «Laser» Vaporisation | Ceramics (19) and Low-expansion glasses (14) | Silicides Dielectric layers (15) Diamond-like carbon (17) |

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal «matrix»«composites» | Dielectric layers (15) |

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide | Dielectric layers (15) |

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys | Dielectric layers (15) |

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys | Dielectric layers (15) |

Sensor window materials (9) | Dielectric layers (15) Diamond-like carbon |

B.4. Physical Vapour Deposition (PVD): Cathodic Arc Discharge | «Superalloys» | Alloyed silicides Alloyed aluminides (2) MCrAlX (5) |

Polymers (11) and Organic«matrix»«composites» | Borides Carbides Nitrides Diamond-like carbon (17) |

C. Pack cementation (see A above for out-of-pack cementation) (10) | Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal «matrix»«composites» | Silicides Carbides Mixtures thereof (4) |

Titanium alloys (13) | Silicides Aluminides Alloyed aluminides (2) |

Refractory metals and alloys (8) | Silicides Oxides |

D. Plasma spraying | «Superalloys» | MCrAlX (5) Modified zirconia (12) Mixtures thereof (4) Abradable Nickel-Graphite Abradable materials containing Ni-Cr-Al Abradable Al-Si-Polyester Alloyed aluminides (2) |

Aluminium alloys (6) | MCrAlX (5) Modified zirconia (12) Silicides Mixtures thereof (4) |

Refractory metals and alloys (8) | Aluminides Silicides Carbides |

Corrosion resistant steel (7) | MCrAlX (5) Modified zirconia (12) Mixtures thereof (4) |

Titanium alloys (13) | Carbides Aluminides Silicides Alloyed aluminides (2) Abradable Nickel-Graphite Abradable materials containing Ni-Cr-Al Abradable Al-Si-Polyester |

E. Slurry Deposition | Refractory metals and alloys (8) | Fused silicides Fused aluminides except for resistance heating elements |

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal «matrix»«composites» | Silicides Carbides Mixtures thereof (4) |

F. Sputter Deposition | «Superalloys» | Alloyed silicides Alloyed aluminides (2) Noble metal modified aluminides (3) MCrAlX (5) Modified zirconia (12) Platinum Mixtures thereof (4) |

Ceramics and Low-expansion glasses (14) | Silicides Platinum Mixtures thereof (4) Dielectic layers (15) Diamond-like carbon (17) |

Titanium alloys (13) | Borides Nitrides Oxides Silicides Aluminides Alloyed aluminides (2) Carbides |

Carbon-carbon, Ceramic and Metal «matrix»«composites» | Silicides Carbides Refractory metals Mixtures thereof (4) Dielectric layers (15) Boron nitride |

Cemented tungsten carbide (16), Silicon carbide (18) | Carbides Tungsten Mixtures thereof (4) Dielectric layers (15) Boron nitride |

Molybdenum and Molybdenum alloys | Dielectric layers (15) |

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys | Borides Dielectric layers (15) Beryllium |

Sensor window materials (9) | Dielectric layers (15) Diamond-like carbon (17) |

Refractory metals and alloys (8) | Aluminides Silicides Oxides Carbides |

G. Ion Implantation | High temperature bearing steels | Additions of Chromium Tantalum or Niobium (Columbium) |

Titanium alloys (13) | Borides Nitrides |

Beryllium and Beryllium alloys | Borides |

Cemented tungsten carbide (16) | Carbides Nitrides |

Table — Deposition techniques — Notes

1. The term «coating process» includes coating repair and refurbishing as well as original coating.

2. The term «alloyed aluminide coating» includes single or multiple-step coatings in which an element or elements are deposited prior to or during application of the aluminide coating, even if these elements are deposited by another coating process. It does not, however, include the multiple use of single-step pack cementation processes to achieve alloyed aluminides.

3. The term «noble metal modified aluminide» coating includes multiple-step coatings in which the noble metal or noble metals are laid down by some other coating process prior to application of the aluminide coating.

4. The term «mixtures thereof» includes infiltrated material, graded compositions, co-deposits and multilayer deposits and are obtained by one or more of the coating processes specified in the Table.

5.«MCrAlX» refers to a coating alloy where M equals cobalt, iron, nickel or combinations thereof and X equals hafnium, yttrium, silicon, tantalum in any amount or other intentional additions over 0,01 weight percent in various proportions and combinations, except:

a. CoCrAlY coatings which contain less than 22 weight percent of chromium, less than 7 weight percent of aluminium and less than 2 weight percent of yttrium;

b. CoCrAlY coatings which contain 22 to 24 weight percent of chromium, 10 to 12 weight percent of aluminium and 0,5 to 0,7 weight percent of yttrium; or

c. NiCrAlY coatings which contain 21 to 23 weight percent of chromium, 10 to 12 weight percent of aluminium and 0,9 to 1.1 weight percent of yttrium.

6. The term «aluminium alloys» refers to alloys having an ultimate tensile strength of 190 MPa or more measured at 293 K (20 °C).

7. The term «corrosion resistant steel» refers to AISI (American Iron and Steel Institute) 300 series or equivalent national standard steels.

8.«Refractory metals and alloys» include the following metals and their alloys: niobium (columbium), molybdenum, tungsten and tantalum.

9.«Sensor window materials», as follows: alumina, silicon, germanium, zinc sulphide, zinc selenide, gallium arsenide, diamond, gallium phosphide, sapphire and the following metal halides: sensor window materials of more than 40 mm diameter for zirconium fluoride and hafnium fluoride.

10.«Technology» for single-step pack cementation of solid airfoils is not controlled by Category 2.

11.«Polymers», as follows: polyimide, polyester, polysulphide, polycarbonates and polyurethanes.

12.«Modified zirconia» refers to additions of other metal oxides (e.g., calcia, magnesia, yttria, hafnia, rare earth oxides) to zirconia in order to stabilise certain crystallographic phases and phase compositions. Thermal barrier coatings made of zirconia, modified with calcia or magnesia by mixing or fusion, are not controlled.

13.«Titanium alloys» refers only to aerospace alloys having an ultimate tensile strength of 900 MPa or more measured at 293 K (20 °C).

14.«Low-expansion glasses» refers to glasses which have a coefficient of thermal expansion of 1 × 10 –7 K–1 or less measured at 293 K (20 °C).

15.«Dielectric layers» are coatings constructed of multi-layers of insulator materials in which the interference properties of a design composed of materials of various refractive indices are used to reflect, transmit or absorb various wavelength bands. Dielectric layers refers to more than four dielectric layers or dielectric/metal «composite» layers.

16.«Cemented tungsten carbide» does not include cutting and forming tool materials consisting of tungsten carbide/(cobalt, nickel), titanium carbide/(cobalt, nickel), chromium carbide/nickel-chromium and chromium carbide/nickel.

17.«Technology» specially designed to deposit diamond-like carbon on any of the following is not controlled:

magnetic disk drives and heads, equipment for the manufacture of disposables, valves for faucets, acoustic diaphragms for speakers, engine parts for automobiles, cutting tools, punching-pressing dies, office automation equipment, microphones or medical devices or moulds, for casting or moulding of plastics, manufactured from alloys containing less than 5 % beryllium.

18.«Silicon carbide» does not include cutting and forming tool materials.

19. Ceramic substrates, as used in this entry, does not include ceramic materials containing 5 % by weight, or greater, clay or cement content, either as separate constituents or in combination.

Processes specified in Column 1 of the Table are defined as follows:

a. Chemical Vapour Deposition (CVD) is an overlay coating or surface modification coating process wherein a metal, alloy, «composite», dielectric or ceramic is deposited upon a heated substrate. Gaseous reactants are decomposed or combined in the vicinity of a substrate resulting in the deposition of the desired elemental, alloy or compound material on the substrate. Energy for this decomposition or chemical reaction process may be provided by the heat of the substrate, a glow discharge plasma, or «laser» irradiation.

N.B. 1 CVD includes the following processes: directed gas flow out-of-pack deposition, pulsating CVD, controlled nucleation thermal deposition (CNTD), plasma enhanced or plasma assisted CVD processes.

N.B. 2 Pack denotes a substrate immersed in a powder mixture.

N.B. 3 The gaseous reactants used in the out-of-pack process are produced using the same basic reactions and parameters as the pack cementation process, except that the substrate to be coated is not in contact with the powder mixture.

b. Thermal Evaporation-Physical Vapour Deposition (TE-PVD) is an overlay coating process conducted in a vacuum with a pressure less than 0,1 Pa wherein a source of thermal energy is used to vaporize the coating material. This process results in the condensation, or deposition, of the evaporated species onto appropriately positioned substrates.

The addition of gases to the vacuum chamber during the coating process to synthesize compound coatings is an ordinary modification of the process.

The use of ion or electron beams, or plasma, to activate or assist the coating's deposition is also a common modification in this technique. The use of monitors to provide in-process measurement of optical characteristics and thickness of coatings can be a feature of these processes.

Specific TE-PVD processes are as follows:

1. Electron Beam PVD uses an electron beam to heat and evaporate the material which forms the coating;

2. Ion Assisted Resistive Heating PVD employs electrically resistive heating sources in combination with impinging ion beam(s) to produce a controlled and uniform flux of evaporated coating species;

3.«Laser» Vaporization uses either pulsed or continuous wave «laser» beams to vaporize the material which forms the coating;

4. Cathodic Arc Deposition employs a consumable cathode of the material which forms the coating and has an arc discharge established on the surface by a momentary contact of a ground trigger. Controlled motion of arcing erodes the cathode surface creating a highly ionized plasma. The anode can be either a cone attached to the periphery of the cathode, through an insulator, or the chamber. Substrate biasing is used for non line-of-sight deposition.

N.B. This definition does not include random cathodic arc deposition with non-biased substrates.

5. Ion Plating is a special modification of a general TE-PVD process in which a plasma or an ion source is used to ionize the species to be deposited, and a negative bias is applied to the substrate in order to facilitate the extraction of the species from the plasma. The introduction of reactive species, evaporation of solids within the process chamber, and the use of monitors to provide in-process measurement of optical characteristics and thicknesses of coatings are ordinary modifications of the process.

c. Pack Cementation is a surface modification coating or overlay coating process wherein a substrate is immersed in a powder mixture (a pack), that consists of:

1. The metallic powders that are to be deposited (usually aluminium, chromium, silicon or combinations thereof);

2. An activator (normally a halide salt); and

3. An inert powder, most frequently alumina.

The substrate and powder mixture is contained within a retort which is heated to between 1030 K (757 °C) and 1375 K (1,102 °C) for sufficient time to deposit the coating.

d. Plasma Spraying is an overlay coating process wherein a gun (spray torch) which produces and controls a plasma accepts powder or wire coating materials, melts them and propels them towards a substrate, whereon an integrally bonded coating is formed. Plasma spraying constitutes either low pressure plasma spraying or high velocity plasma spraying.

N.B. 1 Low pressure means less than ambient atmospheric pressure.

N.B. 2 High velocity refers to nozzle-exit gas velocity exceeding 750 m/s calculated at 293 K (20 °C) at 0,1 MPa.

e. Slurry Deposition is a surface modification coating or overlay coating process wherein a metallic or ceramic powder with an organic binder is suspended in a liquid and is applied to a substrate by either spraying, dipping or painting, subsequent air or oven drying, and heat treatment to obtain the desired coating.

f. Sputter Deposition is an overlay coating process based on a momentum transfer phenomenon, wherein positive ions are accelerated by an electric field towards the surface of a target (coating material). The kinetic energy of the impacting ions is sufficient to cause target surface atoms to be released and deposited on an appropriately positioned substrate.

N.B. 1 The Table refers only to triode, magnetron or reactive sputter deposition which is used to increase adhesion of the coating and rate of deposition and to radio frequency (RF) augmented sputter deposition used to permit vaporisation of non-metallic coating materials.

N.B. 2 Low-energy ion beams (less than 5 keV) can be used to activate the deposition.

g. Ion Implantation is a surface modification coating process in which the element to be alloyed is ionised, accelerated through a potential gradient and implanted into the surface region of the substrate. This includes processes in which ion implantation is performed simultaneously with electron beam physical vapour deposition or sputter deposition.

CATEGORY 3

ELECTRONICS

3ASystems, Equipment and Components

Note 1: The control status of equipment and components described in 3A001 or 3A002, other than those described in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.10. or 3A001.a.12., which are specially designed for or which have the same functional characteristics as other equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment.

Note 2: The control status of integrated circuits described in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.9. or 3A001.a.12. which are unalterably programmed or designed for a specific function for another equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment.

N.B.: When the manufacturer or applicant cannot determine the control status of the other equipment, the control status of the integrated circuits is determined in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.9. and 3A001.a.12.

If the integrated circuit is a silicon-based «microcomputer microcircuit» or microcontroller microcircuit described in 3A001.a.3. having an operand (data) word length of 8 bit or less, the control status of the integrated circuit is determined in 3A001.a.3.

3A001Electronic components, as follows:

a. General purpose integrated circuits, as follows:

Note 1: The control status of wafers (finished or unfinished), in which the function has been determined, is to be evaluated against the parameters of 3A001.a.

Note 2: Integrated circuits include the following types:

«Monolithic integrated circuits»;

«Hybrid integrated circuits»;

«Multichip integrated circuits»;

«Film type integrated circuits», including silicon-on-sapphire integrated circuits;

«Optical integrated circuits».

1. Integrated circuits, designed or rated as radiation hardened to withstand any of the following:

a. A total dose of 5 × 103 Gy (silicon) or higher;

b. A dose rate upset of 5 × 106 Gy (silicon)/s or higher; or

c. A fluence (integrated flux) of neutrons (1 MeV equivalent) of 5 × 1013 n/cm2 or higher on silicon, or its equivalent for other materials;

Note: 3A001.a.1.c. does not apply to Metal Insulator Semiconductors (MIS).

2.«Microprocessor microcircuits», «microcomputer microcircuits», microcontroller microcircuits, storage integrated circuits manufactured from a compound semiconductor, analogue-to-digital converters, digital-to-analogue converters, electro-optical or «optical integrated circuits» designed for «signal processing», field programmable logic devices, neural network integrated circuits, custom integrated circuits for which either the function is unknown or the control status of the equipment in which the integrated circuit will be used is unknown, Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processors, electrical erasable programmable read-only memories (EEPROMs), flash memories or static random-access memories (SRAMs), having any of the following:

a. Rated for operation at an ambient temperature above 398 K (125 °C);

b. Rated for operation at an ambient temperature below 218 K (– 55 °C); or

c. Rated for operation over the entire ambient temperature range from 218 K (– 55 °C) et 398 K (125 °C);

Note: 3A001.a.2. does not apply to integrated circuits for civil automobiles or railway train applications.

3.«Microprocessor microcircuits», «microcomputer microcircuits» and microcontroller microcircuits, manufactured from a compound semiconductor and operating at a clock frequency exceeding 40 MHz ;

Note: 3A001.a.3. includes digital signal processors, digital array processors and digital coprocessors.

4. Storage integrated circuits manufactured from a compound semiconductor;

5. Analogue-to-digital and digital-to-analogue converter integrated circuits, as follows:

a. Analogue-to-digital converters having any of the following:

N.B. SEE ALSO 3A101

1. A resolution of 8 bit or more, but less than 10 bit, with an output rate greater than 500 million words per second;

2. A resolution of 10 bit or more, but less than 12 bit, with an output rate greater than 200 million words per second;

3. A resolution of 12 bit with an output rate greater than 50 million words per second;

4. A resolution of more than 12 bit, but equal to or less than 14 bit, with an output rate greater than 5 million words per second; or;

5. A resolution of more than 14 bit with an output rate greater than 1 million words per second;

b. Digital-to-analogue converters with a resolution of 12 bit or more, and a «settling time» of less than 10 ns;

Technical Notes:

1.A resolution of n bit corresponds to a quantisation of 2n levels.

2.The number of bits in the output word is equal to the resolution of the analogue-to-digital converter.

3.The output rate is the maximum output rate of the converter, regardless of the architecture or oversampling. Vendors may also refer to the output rate as sampling rate, conversion rate or throughput rate. It is often specified in megaghertz (MHz) or mega samples per second (MSPS).

4.For the purpose of measuring output rate, one output word per second is equivalent to one Hertz or one sample per second.

6. Electro-optical and «optical integrated circuits» designed for «signal processing» having all of the following:

a. One or more than one internal «laser» diode;

b. One or more than one internal light detecting element; and

c. Optical waveguides;

7. Field programmable logic devices having any of the following:

a. An equivalent usable gate count of more than 30000 (2 input gates);

b. A typical «basic gate propagation delay time» of less than 0,1 ns; or

c. A toggle frequency exceeding 133 MHz;

Note: 3A001.a.7. includes:

- Simple Programmable Logic Devices (SPLDs)

- Complex Programmable Logic Devices (CPLDs)

- Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs)

- Field Programmable Logic Arrays (FPLAs)

- Field Programmable Interconnects (FPICs)

N.B.: Field programmable logic devices are also known as field programmable gate or field programmable logic arrays.

8. Not used;

9. Neural network integrated circuits;

10. Custom integrated circuits for which the function is unknown, or the control status of the equipment in which the integrated circuits will be used is unknown to the manufacturer, having any of the following:

a. More than 1000 terminals;

b. A typical «basic gate propagation delay time» of less than 0,1 ns; or

c. An operating frequency exceeding 3 GHz;

11. Digital integrated circuits, other than those described in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.10. and 3A001.a.12., based upon any compound semiconductor and having any of the following:

a. An equivalent gate count of more than 3000 (2 input gates); or

b. A toggle frequency exceeding 1,2 GHz;

12. Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) processors having a rated execution time for an N-point complex FFT of less than (N log2N)/20480 ms, where N is the number of points;

Technical Note:

When N is equal to 1024 points, the formula in 3A001.a.12. gives an execution time of 500 μs.

b. Microwave or millimetre wave components, as follows:

1. Electronic vacuum tubes and cathodes, as follows:

Note 1: 3A001.b.1. does not control tubes designed or rated for operation in any frequency band which meets all of the following characteristics:

a.Does not exceed 31,8 GHz; and

b.Is «allocated by the ITU» for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.

Note 2: 3A001.b.1. does not control non- «space-qualified» tubes which meet all of the following characteristics:

a.An average output power equal to or less than 50 W; and

b.Designed or rated for operation in any frequency band which meets all of the following characteristics:

1.Exceeds 31,8 GHz but does not exceed 43,5 GHz; and

2.Is «allocated by the ITU» for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.

a. Travelling wave tubes, pulsed or continuous wave, as follows:

1. Operating at frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz;

2. Having a cathode heater element with a turn on time to rated RF power of less than 3 seconds;

3. Coupled cavity tubes, or derivatives thereof, with a «fractional bandwidth» of more than 7 % or a peak power exceeding 2,5 kW;

4. Helix tubes, or derivatives thereof, with any of the following characteristics:

a. An «instantaneous bandwidth» of more than one octave, and average power (expressed in kW) times frequency (expressed in GHz) of more than 0,5;

b. An «instantaneous bandwidth» of one octave or less, and average power (expressed in kW) times frequency (expressed in GHz) of more than 1; or

c. Being «space qualified»;

b. Crossed-field amplifier tubes with a gain of more than 17 dB;

c. Impregnated cathodes designed for electronic tubes producing a continuous emission current density at rated operating conditions exceeding 5 A/cm2;

2. Microwave monolithic integrated circuits (MMIC) power amplifiers having any of the following:

a. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 6 GHz and with an average output power greater than 4W (36 dBm) with a «fractional bandwidth» greater than 15 %;

b. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6 GHz up to and including 16 GHz and with an average output power greater than 1W (30 dBm) with a «fractional bandwidth» greater than 10 %;

c. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 16 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz and with an average output power greater than 0,8W (29 dBm) with a «fractional bandwidth» greater than 10 %;

d. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37,5 GHz;

e. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 37,5 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz and with an average output power greater than 0,25W (24 dBm) with a «fractional bandwidth» greater than 10 %; or

f. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 43,5 GHz.

Note 1: 3A001.b.2. does not control broadcast satellite equipment designed or rated to operate in the frequency range of 40,5 GHz to 42,5 GHz.

Note 2: The control status of the MMIC whose rated operating frequency includes frequencies listed in more than one frequency range, as defined by 3A001.b.2.a. to 3A001.b.2.f., is determined by the lowest average output power control threshold.

Note 3: Notes 1 and 2 in the chapeau to Category 3 mean that 3A001.b.2. does not control MMICs if they are specially designed for other applications, e.g., telecommunications, radar, automobiles.

3. Discrete microwave transistors having any of the following:

a. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 6 GHz and having an average output power greater than 60W (47,8 dBm);

b. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz and having an average output power greater than 20W (43 dBm);

c. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37,5 GHz and having an average output power greater than 0,5W (27 dBm);

d. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 37,5 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz and having an average output power greater than 1W (30 dBm); or

e. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 43,5 GHz.

Note: The control status of a transistor whose rated operating frequency includes frequencies listed in more than one frequency range, as defined by 3A001.b.3.a. to 3A001b.3.e., is determined by the lowest average output power control threshold.

4. Microwave solid state amplifiers and microwave assemblies/modules containing microwave amplifiers having any of the following:

a. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 3,2 GHz up to and including 6 GHz and with an average output power greater than 60W (47,8 dBm) with a «fractional bandwidth» greater than 15 %;

b. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 6 GHz up to and including 31,8 GHz and with an average output power greater than 15W (42 dBm) with a «fractional bandwidth» greater than 10 %;

c. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz up to and including 37,5 GHz;

d. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 37,.5 GHz up to and including 43,5 GHz and with an average output power greater than 1W (30 dBm) with a «fractional bandwidth» greater than 10 %;

e. Rated for operation at frequencies exceeding 43,5 GHz; or

f. Rated for operation at frequencies above 3.2 GHz and having all of the following:

1. An average output power (in watts), P, greater than 150 divided by the maximum operating frequency (in GHz) squared [P>150 W*GHz2/fGHz2];

2. A fractional bandwidth of 5 % or greater; and

3. Any two sides perpendicular to one another with length d (in cm) equal to or less than 15 divided by the lowest operating frequency in GHz [d=15cm*GHz/ fGHz].

Technical Note:

3.2 GHz should be used as the lowest operating frequency (fGHz) in the formula in 3A001.b.4.f.3., for amplifiers that have a rated operating range extending downward to 3.2 GHz and below [d≤ 15 cm*GHz/3.2 GHz].

N.B.: MMIC power amplifiers should be evaluated against the criteria in 3A001.b.2.

Note 1: 3A001.b.4. does not control broadcast satellite equipment designed or rated to operate in the frequency range of 40,5 to 42,5 GHz.

Note 2: The control status of an item whose rated operating frequency includes frequencies listed in more than one frequency range, as defined by 3A001.b.4.a. to 3A001.b.4.e., is determined by the lowest average output power control threshold.

5. Electronically or magnetically tunable band-pass or band-stop filters having more than 5 tunable resonators capable of tuning across a 1,5:1 frequency band (fmax/fmin) in less than 10 μs having any of the following:

a. A band-pass bandwidth of more than 0,5 % of centre frequency; or

b. A band-stop bandwidth of less than 0,5 % of centre frequency;

6. Not used;

7. Mixers and converters designed to extend the frequency range of equipment described in 3A002.c., 3A002.e. or 3A002.f. beyond the limits stated therein;

8. Microwave power amplifiers containing tubes specified in 3A001.b. and having all of the following:

a. Operating frequencies above 3 GHz;

b. An average output power density exceeding 80 W/kg; and

c. A volume of less than 400 cm3;

Note: 3A001.b.8. does not control equipment designed or rated for operation in any frequency band which is «allocated by the ITU» for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.

c. Acoustic wave devices, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:

1. Surface acoustic wave and surface skimming (shallow bulk) acoustic wave devices (i.e., «signal processing» devices employing elastic waves in materials), having any of the following:

a. A carrier frequency exceeding 2,5 GHz;

b. A carrier frequency exceeding 1 GHz, but not exceeding 2,5 GHz, and having any of the following:

1. A frequency side-lobe rejection exceeding 55 dB;

2. A product of the maximum delay time and the bandwidth (time in μs and bandwidth in MHz) of more than 100;

3. A bandwidth greater than 250 MHz; or

4. A dispersive delay of more than 10 μs; or

c. A carrier frequency of 1 GHz or less, having any of the following:

1. A product of the maximum delay time and the bandwidth (time in μs and bandwidth in MHz) of more than 100;

2. A dispersive delay of more than 10 μs; or

3. A frequency side-lobe rejection exceeding 55 dB and a bandwidth greater than 50 MHz;

2. Bulk (volume) acoustic wave devices (i.e., «signal processing» devices employing elastic waves) which permit the direct processing of signals at frequencies exceeding 1 GHz;

3. Acoustic-optic «signal processing» devices employing interaction between acoustic waves (bulk wave or surface wave) and light waves which permit the direct processing of signals or images, including spectral analysis, correlation or convolution;

d. Electronic devices and circuits containing components, manufactured from «superconductive» materials specially designed for operation at temperatures below the «critical temperature» of at least one of the «superconductive» constituents, with any of the following:

1. Current switching for digital circuits using «superconductive» gates with a product of delay time per gate (in seconds) and power dissipation per gate (in watts) of less than 10– 14 J; or

2. Frequency selection at all frequencies using resonant circuits with Q-values exceeding 10000;

e. High energy devices, as follows:

1. Batteries and photovoltaic arrays, as follows:

Note: 3A001.e.1. does not control batteries with volumes equal to or less than 27 cm 3 (e.g., standard C-cells or R14 batteries).

a. Primary cells and batteries having an «energy density» exceeding 480 Wh/kg and rated for operation in the temperature range from below 243 K (– 30 °C) to above de 343 K (70 °C);

b. Rechargeable cells and batteries having an «energy density» exceeding 150 Wh/kg after 75 charge/discharge cycles at a discharge current equal to C/5 hours (C being the nominal capacity in ampere hours) when operating in the temperature range from below 253 K (– 20 °C) to above 333 K (60 °C);

Technical Note:

«Energy density» is obtained by multiplying the average power in watts (average voltage in volts times average current in amperes) by the duration of the discharge in hours to 75 % of the open circuit voltage divided by the total mass of the cell (or battery) in kg.

c.«Space qualified» and radiation hardened photovoltaic arrays with a specific power exceeding 160 W/m2 at an operating temperature of 301 K (28 °C) under a tungsten illumination of 1 kW/m2 at 2800 K (2527 °C);

2. High energy storage capacitors, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 3A201.a.

a. Capacitors with a repetition rate of less than 10 Hz (single shot capacitors) having all of the following:

1. A voltage rating equal to or more than 5 kV;

2. An energy density equal to or more than 250 J/kg; and

3. A total energy equal to or more than 25 kJ;

b. Capacitors with a repetition rate of 10 Hz or more (repetition rated capacitors) having all of the following:

1. A voltage rating equal to or more than 5 kV;

2. An energy density equal to or more than 50 J/kg;

3. A total energy equal to or more than 100 J; and

4. A charge/discharge cycle life equal to or more than 10000;

3.«Superconductive» electromagnets and solenoids specially designed to be fully charged or discharged in less than one second, having all of the following:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 3A201.b.

Note: 3A001.e.3. does not control «superconductive» electromagnets or solenoids specially designed for Magnetic Resonance Imaging (MRI) medical equipment.

a. Energy delivered during the discharge exceeding 10 kJ in the first second;

b. Inner diameter of the current carrying windings of more than 250 mm; and

c. Rated for a magnetic induction of more than 8 T or «overall current density» in the winding of more than 300 A/mm2;

f. Rotary input type shaft absolute position encoders having any of the following:

1. A resolution of better than 1 part in 265000 (18 bit resolution) of full scale; or

2. An accuracy better than ± 2,5 seconds of arc.

3A002General purpose electronic equipment, as follows:

a. Recording equipment, as follows, and specially designed test tape therefor:

1. Analogue instrumentation magnetic tape recorders, including those permitting the recording of digital signals (e.g. using a high density digital recording (HDDR) module), having any of the following:

a. A bandwidth exceeding 4 MHz per electronic channel or track;

b. A bandwidth exceeding 2 MHz per electronic channel or track and having more than 42 tracks; or

c. A time displacement (base) error, measured in accordance with applicable IRIG or EIA documents, of less than ± 0,1 μs;

Note: Analogue magnetic tape recorders specially designed for civilian video purposes are not considered to be instrumentation tape recorders.

2. Digital video magnetic tape recorders having a maximum digital interface transfer rate exceeding 360 Mbits/s;

Note: 3A002.a.2. does not control digital video magnetic tape recorders specially designed for television recording using a signal format, which may include a compressed signal format, standardised or recommended by the ITU, the IEC, the SMPTE, the EBU, the ETSI or the IEEE for civil television applications.

3. Digital instrumentation magnetic tape data recorders employing helical scan techniques or fixed head techniques, having any of the following:

a. A maximum digital interface transfer rate exceeding 175 Mbits/s; or

b. Being «space qualified»;

Note: 3A002.a.3. does not control analogue magnetic tape recorders equipped with HDDR conversion electronics and configured to record only digital data.

4. Equipment, having a maximum digital interface transfer rate exceeding 175 Mbits/s, designed to convert digital video magnetic tape recorders for use as digital instrumentation data recorders;

5. Waveform digitisers and transient recorders having all of the following:

a. Digitising rate equal to or more than 200 million samples per second and a resolution of 10 bit or more; and

b. A continuous throughput of 2 Gbit/s or more;

Technical Note:

For those instruments with a parallel bus architecture, the continuous throughput rate is the highest word rate multiplied by the number of bits in a word.

Continuous throughput is the fastest data rate the instrument can output to mass storage without the loss of any information whilst sustaining the sampling rate and analogue-to-digital conversion.

6. Digital instrumentation data recorders, using magnetic disk storage technique, having all of the following:

a. Digitising rate equal to or more than 100 million samples per second and a resolution of 8 bit or more; and

b. A continuous throughput of 1 Gbit/s or more;

b.«Frequency synthesiser»«electronic assemblies» having a «frequency switching time» from one selected frequency to another of less than 1 ms;

c. Radio frequency «signal analysers», as follows:

1.«Signal analysers»capable of analysing frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 37.5 GHz and having a 3 dB resolution bandwidth (RBW) exceeding 10 MHz;

2.«Signal analysers» capable of analysing frequencies exceeding 43.5 GHz;

3.«Dynamic signal analysers» having a «real-time bandwidth» exceeding 500 kHz;

Note: 3A002.c.3. does not control those «dynamic signal analysers» using only constant percentage bandwidth filters (also known as octave or fractional octave filters).

d. Frequency synthesised signal generators producing output frequencies, the accuracy and short term and long term stability of which are controlled, derived from or disciplined by the internal master frequency, and having any of the following:

1. A maximum synthesised frequency exceeding 31,8 GHz but not exceeding 43,5 GHz and rated to generate a pulse duration of less than 100 ns;

2. A maximum synthesised frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz;

3. A «frequency switching time» from one selected frequency to another of less than 1 ms; or

4. A single sideband (SSB) phase noise better than – (126 + 20 log10F – 20 log10f) in dBc/Hz, where F is the off-set from the operating frequency in Hz and f is the operating frequency in MHz;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 3A002.d.1., «pulse duration» is defined as the time interval between the leading edge of the pulse achieving 90 % of the peak and the trailing edge of the pulse achieving 10 % of the peak.

Note: 3A002.d. does not control equipment in which the output frequency is either produced by the addition or subtraction of two or more crystal oscillator frequencies, or by an addition or subtraction followed by a multiplication of the result.

e. Network analysers with a maximum operating frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz;

f. Microwave test receivers having all of the following:

1. A maximum operating frequency exceeding 43,5 GHz; and

2. Being capable of measuring amplitude and phase simultaneously;

g. Atomic frequency standards having any of the following:

1. Long-term stability (aging) less (better) than 1 × 10– 11/month; or

2. Being «space qualified».

Note: 3A002.g.1. does not control non-«space qualified» rubidium standards.

3A003Spray cooling thermal management systems employing closed loop fluid handling and reconditioning equipment in a sealed enclosure where a dielectric fluid is sprayed onto electronic components using specially designed spray nozzles that are designed to maintain electronic components within their operating temperature range, and specially designed components therefor.

3A101Electronic equipment, devices and components, other than those specified in 3A001, as follows:

a. Analogue to digital converters, usable in «missiles», designed to meet military specifications for ruggedised equipment;

b. Accelerators capable of delivering electromagnetic radiation produced by bremsstrahlung from accelerated electrons of 2 MeV or greater, and systems containing those accelerators.

Note: 3A101.b. above does not specify equipment specially designed for medical purposes.

3A201Electronic components, other than those specified in 3A001, as follows;

a. Capacitors having either of the following sets of characteristics:

1.

a. Voltage rating greater than 1,4 kV;

b. Energy storage greater than 10 J;

c. Capacitance greater than 0,5 μF; and

d. Series inductance less than 50 nH; or

2.

a. Voltage rating greater than 750 V;

b. Capacitance greater than 0,25 μF; and

c. Series inductance less than 10 nH;

b. Superconducting solenoidal electromagnets having all of the following characteristics:

1. Capable of creating magnetic fields greater than 2 T;

2. A ratio of length to inner diameter greater than 2;

3. Inner diameter greater than 300 mm; and

4. Magnetic field uniform to better than 1 % over the central 50 % of the inner volume;

Note: 3A201.b. does not control magnets specially designed for and exported «as parts of» medical nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) imaging systems. The phrase «as part of» does not necessarily mean physical part in the same shipment; separate shipments from different sources are allowed, provided the related export documents clearly specify that the shipments are dispatched «as part of» the imaging systems.

c. Flash X ray generators or pulsed electron accelerators having either of the following sets of characteristics:

1.

a. An accelerator peak electron energy of 500 KeV or greater but less than 25 MeV; and

b. With a «figure of merit» (K) of 0,25 or greater; or

2.

a. An accelerator peak electron energy of 25 MeV or greater; and

b. A «peak power» greater than 50 MW.

Note: 3A201.c. does not control accelerators that are component parts of devices designed for purposes other than electron beam or X-ray radiation (electron microscopy, for example) nor those designed for medical purposes.

Technical Notes:

1.The «figure of merit» K is defined as:

( K = 1,7 ×10^ { 3 } V^ { 2,65 } Q )

V is the peak electron energy in million electron volts.

If the accelerator beam pulse duration is less than or equal to 1 μs, then Q is the total accelerated charge in Coulombs. If the accelerator beam pulse duration is greater than 1 μs, then Q is the maximum accelerated charge in 1 μs.

Q equals the integral of i with respect to t, over the lesser of 1 μs or the time duration of the beam pulse (Q = ∫ idt), where i is beam current in amperes and t is time in seconds.

2.«Peak power» = (peak potential in volts) × (peak beam current in amperes).

3.In machines based on microwave accelerating cavities, the time duration of the beam pulse is the lesser of 1 μs or the duration of the bunched beam packet resulting from one microwave modulator pulse.

4.In machines based on microwave accelerating cavities, the peak beam current is the average current in the time duration of a bunched beam packet.

3A225Frequency changers or generators, other than those specified in 0B001.b.13., having all of the following characteristics:

a. Multiphase output capable of providing a power of 40 W or greater;

b. Capable of operating in the frequency range between 600 and 2000 Hz;

c. Total harmonic distortion better (less) than 10 %; and

d. Frequency control better (less) than 0,1 %.

Technical Note:

Frequency changers in 3A225 are also known as converters or inverters.

3A226High power direct current power supplies, other than those specified in 0B001.j.6., having both of the following characteristics:

a. Capable of continuously producing, over a time period of 8 hours, 100 V or greater with current output of 500 A or greater; and

b. Current or voltage stability better than 0,1 % over a time period of 8 hours.

3A227High voltage direct current power supplies, other than those specified in 0B001.j.5., having both of the following characteristics:

a. Capable of continuously producing, over a time period of 8 hours, 20 kV or greater with current output of 1 A or greater; and

b. Current or voltage stability better than 0,1 % over a time period of 8 hours.

3A228Switching devices, as follows:

a. Cold cathode tubes, whether gas filled or not, operating similarly to a spark gap, having all of the following characteristics:

1. Containing three or more electrodes;

2. Anode peak voltage rating of 2,5 kV or more;

3. Anode peak current rating of 100 A or more 100 A; and

4. Anode delay time of 10 μs or less;

Note: 3A228 includes gas krytron tubes and vacuum sprytron tubes.

b. Triggered spark-gaps having both of the following characteristics:

1. An anode delay time of 15 μs or less; and

2. Rated for a peak current of 500 A or more;

c. Modules or assemblies with a fast switching function having all of the following characteristics:

1. Anode peak voltage rating greater than 2 kV;

2. Anode peak current rating of 500 A or more; and

3. Turn on time of 1 μs or less.

3A229Firing sets and equivalent high current pulse generators as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS

a. Explosive detonator firing sets designed to drive multiple controlled detonators specified in 3A232;

b. Modular electrical pulse generators (pulsers) having all of the following characteristics:

1. Designed for portable, mobile, or ruggedised-use;

2. Enclosed in a dust tight enclosure;

3. Capable of delivering their energy in less than 15 μs;

4. Having an output greater than 100 A;

5. Having a «rise time» of less than 10 μs into loads of less than 40 ohms;

6. No dimension greater than 254 mm;

7. Weight less than 25 kg; and

8. Specified for use over an extended temperature range 223 K (– 50 °C) to 373 K (100 °C) or specified as suitable for aerospace applications.

Note: 3A229.b. includes xenon flash lamp drivers.

Technical Note:

In 3A229.b.5. «rise time» is defined as the time interval from 10 % to 90 % current amplitude when driving a resistive load.

3A230High-speed pulse generators having both of the following characteristics:

a. Output voltage greater than 6 V into a resistive load of less than 55 ohms, and

b.«Pulse transition time» less than 500 ps.

Technical Note:

In 3A230, «pulse transition time» is defined as the time interval between 10 % and 90 % voltage amplitude.

3A231Neutron generator systems, including tubes, having both of the following characteristics:

a. Designed for operation without an external vacuum system; and

b. Utilising electrostatic acceleration to induce a tritium-deuterium nuclear reaction.

3A232Detonators and multipoint initiation systems, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS

a. Electrically driven explosive detonators, as follows:

1. Exploding bridge (EB);

2. Exploding bridge wire (EBW);

3. Slapper;

4. Exploding foil initiators (EFI);

b. Arrangements using single or multiple detonators designed to nearly simultaneously initiate an explosive surface over greater than 5000 mm2 from a single firing signal with an initiation timing spread over the surface of less than 2,5 μs.

Note: 3A232 does not control detonators using only primary explosives, such as lead azide.

Technical Note:

In 3A232 the detonators of concern all utilise a small electrical conductor (bridge, bridge wire or foil) that explosively vapourises when a fast, high-current electrical pulse is passed through it. In nonslapper types, the exploding conductor starts a chemical detonation in a contacting high-explosive material such as PETN (Pentaerythritoltetranitrate). In slapper detonators, the explosive vapourisation of the electrical conductor drives a flyer or slapper across a gap and the impact of the slapper on an explosive starts a chemical detonation. The slapper in some designs is driven by a magnetic force. The term exploding foil detonator may refer to either an EB or a slapper-type detonator. Also, the word initiator is sometimes used in place of the word detonator.

3A233Mass spectrometers, other than those specified in 0B002.g., capable of measuring ions of 230 atomic mass units or greater and having a resolution of better than 2 parts in 230, as follows, and ion sources therefor:

a. Inductively coupled plasma mass spectrometers (ICP/MS);

b. Glow discharge mass spectrometers (GDMS);

c. Thermal ionization mass spectrometers (TIMS);

d. Electron bombardment mass spectrometers which have a source chamber constructed from, lined with or plated with materials resistant to UF6;

e. Molecular beam mass spectrometers having either of the following characteristics:

1. A source chamber constructed from, lined with or plated with stainless steel or molybdenum and equipped with a cold trap capable of cooling to 193 K (– 80 °C) or less; or

2. A source chamber constructed from, lined with or plated with materials resistant to UF6;

f. Mass spectrometers equipped with a microfluorination ion source designed for actinides or actinide fluorides.

3BTest, Inspection and Production Equipment

3B001Equipment for the manufacturing of semiconductor devices or materials, as follows, and specially designed components and accessories therefor:

a. Equipment designed for epitaxial growth, as follows:

1. Equipment capable of producing a layer of any material other than silicon with a thickness uniform to less than ± 2,5 % across a distance of 75 mm or more;

2. Metal organic chemical vapour deposition (MOCVD) reactors specially designed for compound semiconductor crystal growth by the chemical reaction between materials specified in 3C003 or 3C004;

3. Molecular beam epitaxial growth equipment using gas or solid sources;

b. Equipment designed for ion implantation, having any of the following:

1. A beam energy (accelerating voltage) exceeding 1 MeV;

2. Being specially designed and optimised to operate at a beam energy (accelerating voltage) of less than 2 keV;

3. Direct write capability; or

4. A beam energy of 65 keV or more and a beam current of 45 mA or more for high energy oxygen implant into a heated semiconductor material «substrate»;

c. Anisotropic plasma dry etching equipment, as follows:

1. Equipment with cassette-to-cassette operation and load-locks, and having any of the following:

a. Designed or optimised to produce critical dimensions of 180 nm or less with ± 5 % 3 sigma precision; or

b. Designed for generating less than 0,04 particles/cm2 with a measurable particle size greater than 0,1 μm in diameter;

2. Equipment specially designed for equipment specified in 3B001.e. and having any of the following:

a. Designed or optimised to produce critical dimensions of 180 nm or less with ± 5 % 3 sigma precision; or

b. Designed for generating less than 0,04 particles/cm2 with a measurable particle size greater than 0,12 μm in diameter;

d. Plasma enhanced CVD equipment, as follows:

1. Equipment with cassette-to-cassette operation and load-locks, and designed according to the manufacturer's specifications or optimised for use in the production of semiconductor devices with critical dimensions of 180 nm or less;

2. Equipment specially designed for equipment controlled by 3B001.e. and designed according to the manufacturer's specifications or optimised for use in the production of semiconductor devices with critical dimensions of 180 nm or less;

e. Automatic loading multi-chamber central wafer handling systems, having all of the following:

1. Interfaces for wafer input and output, to which more than two pieces of semiconductor processing equipment are to be connected; and

2. Designed to form an integrated system in a vacuum environment for sequential multiple wafer processing;

Note: 3B001.e. does not control automatic robotic wafer handling systems not designed to operate in a vacuum environment.

f. Lithography equipment, as follows:

1. Align and expose step and repeat (direct step on wafer) or step and scan (scanner) equipment for wafer processing using photo-optical or X-ray methods, having any of the following:

a. A light source wavelength shorter than 245 nm; or

b. Capable of producing a pattern with a«minimum resolvable feature» size of 180 nm or less;

Technical Note:

The «minimum resolvable feature» size is calculated by the following formula:

MRF = (( an exposure light source wavelength in nm ) × ( K factor ))/( numerical aperture )

where the K factor = 0,45

MRF = minimum resolvable feature size

2. Equipment specially designed for mask making or semiconductor device processing using deflected focussed electron beam, ion beam or «laser» beam, having any of the following:

a. A spot size smaller than 0,2 μm;

b. Being capable of producing a pattern with a feature size of less than 1 μm; or

c. An overlay accuracy of better than ± 0,20 μm (3 sigma);

g. Masks and reticles designed for integrated circuits specified in 3A001;

h. Multi-layer masks with a phase shift layer.

Note: 3B001.h. does not control multi-layer masks with a phase shift layer designed for the fabrication of memory devices not controlled by 3A001.

3B002Test equipment, specially designed for testing finished or unfinished semiconductor devices, as follows, and specially designed components and accessories therefor:

a. For testing S-parameters of transistor devices at frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz;

b. Not used;

c. For testing microwave integrated circuits specified in 3A001.b.2.

3CMaterials

3C001Hetero-epitaxial materials consisting of a «substrate» having stacked epitaxially grown multiple layers of any of the following:

a. Silicon;

b. Germanium;

c. Silicon carbide; or

d. III/V compounds of gallium or indium.

Technical Note:

III/V compounds are polycrystalline or binary or complex monocrystalline products consisting of elements of groups IIIA and VA of Mendeleyev's periodic classification table (e.g., gallium arsenide, gallium-aluminium arsenide, indium phosphide).

3C002Resist materials, as follows, and «substrates» coated with controlled resists:

a. Positive resists designed for semiconductor lithography specially adjusted (optimised) for use at wavelengths below 350 nm;

b. All resists designed for use with electron beams or ion beams, with a sensitivity of 0,01 μcoulomb/mm2 or better;

c. All resists designed for use with X-rays, with a sensitivity of 2,5 mJ/mm2 or better;

d. All resists optimised for surface imaging technologies, including «silylated» resists.

Technical Note:

«Silylation» techniques are defined as processes incorporating oxidation of the resist surface to enhance performance for both wet and dry developing.

3C003Organo-inorganic compounds, as follows:

a. Organo-metallic compounds of aluminium, gallium or indium having a purity (metal basis) better than 99,999 %;

b. Organo-arsenic, organo-antimony and organo-phosphorus compounds having a purity (inorganic element basis) better than 99,999 %.

Note: 3C003 only controls compounds whose metallic, partly metallic or non-metallic element is directly linked to carbon in the organic part of the molecule.

3C004Hydrides of phosphorus, arsenic or antimony, having a purity better than 99,999 %, even diluted in inert gases or hydrogen.

Note: 3C004 does not control hydrides containing 20 % molar or more of inert gases or hydrogen.

3DSoftware

3D001«Software» specially designed for the «development» or «production» of equipment specified in 3A001.b. to 3A002.g. or 3B.

3D002«Software» specially designed for the «use» of any of the following:

a. Equipment specified in 3B001.a. to f.; or

b. Equipment specified in 3B002.

3D003Physics-based simulation «software» specially designed for the «development» of lithographic, etching or deposition processes for translating masking patterns into specific topographical patterns in conductors, dielectrics or semiconductor materials.

Technical Note:

«Physics-based» in 3D003 means using computations to determine a sequence of physical cause and effect events based on physical properties (e.g., temperature, pressure, diffusion constants and semiconductor materials properties).

Note: Libraries, design attributes or associated data for the design of semiconductor devices or integrated circuits are considered as «technology».

3D004«Software» specially designed for the «development» of the equipment specified in 3A003.

3D101«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of equipment specified in 3A101.b.

3ETechnology

3E001«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» or «production» of equipment or materials specified in 3A, 3B or 3C;

Note 1: 3E001 does not control «technology» for the «production» of equipment or components controlled by 3A003.

Note 2: 3E001 does not control «technology» for the «development» or «production» of integrated circuits specified in 3A001.a.3. to 3A001.a.12., having all of the following:

1.Using «technology» of 0,5 μm or more, and

2.Not incorporating «multi-layer structures».

Technical Note:

The term «multi-layer structures» does not include devices incorporating a maximum of three metal layers and three polysilicon layers.

3E002«Technology» according to the General Technology Note other than that specified in 3E001 for the «development» or «production» of «microprocessor microcircuits», «microcomputer microcircuits» and microcontroller microcircuits having a «composite theoretical performance» («CTP») of 530 million theoretical operations per second (Mtops) or more and an arithmetic logic unit with an access width of 32 bits or more.

Note: Decontrol note 2 to 3E001 also applies to 3E002.

3E003Other «technology» for the «development» or «production» of:

a. Vacuum microelectronic devices;

b. Hetero-structure semiconductor devices such as high electron mobility transistors (HEMT), hetero-bipolar transistors (HBT), quantum well and super lattice devices;

Note: 3E003.b. does not control technology for high electron mobility transistors (HEMT) operating at frequencies lower than 31,8 GHz and hetero-junction bipolar transistors (HBT) operating at frequencies lower than 31,8 GHz.

c.«Superconductive» electronic devices;

d. Substrates of films of diamond for electronic components;

e. Substrates of silicon-on-insulator (SOI) for integrated circuits in which the insulator is silicon dioxide;

f. Substrates of silicon carbide for electronic components;

g. Electronic vacuum tubes operating at frequencies of 31,8 GHz or higher.

3E101«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment or «software» specified in 3A001.a.1. or 2., 3A101 or 3D101.

3E102«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» of «software» specified in 3D101.

3E201«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment specified in 3A001.e.2., 3A001.e.3., 3A201, 3A225 to 3A233.

CATEGORY 4

COMPUTERS

Note 1: Computers, related equipment and «software» performing telecommunications or «local area network» functions must also be evaluated against the performance characteristics of Category 5, Part 1 (Telecommunications).

Note 2: Control units which directly interconnect the buses or channels of central processing units, «main storage» or disk controllers are not regarded as telecommunications equipment described in Category 5, Part 1 (Telecommunications).

N.B.: For the control status of «software» specially designed for packet switching, see 5D001.

Note 3: Computers, related equipment and «software» performing cryptographic, cryptanalytic, certifiable multi-level security or certifiable user isolation functions, or which limit electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), must also be evaluated against the performance characteristics in Category 5, Part 2 («Information Security»).

4ASystems, Equipment and Components

4A001Electronic computers and related equipment, as follows, and «electronic assemblies» and specially designed components therefor:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 4A101.

a. Specially designed to have any of the following characteristics:

1. Rated for operation at an ambient temperature below 228 K (– 45 °C) or above 358 K (85 °C);

Note: 4A001.a.1. does not apply to computers specially designed for civil automobile or railway train applications.

2. Radiation hardened to exceed any of the following specifications:

a. | Total Dose | 5 × 103 Gy (silicon); |

b. | Dose Rate Upset | 5 × 106 Gy (silicon)/s; or |

c. | Single Event Upset | 1 × 10–7 Error/bit/day; |

b. Having characteristics or performing functions exceeding the limits in Category 5, Part 2 («Information Security»).

Note: 4A001.b. does not control electronic computers and related equipment when accompanying their user for the user's personal use.

4A003«Digital computers», «electronic assemblies», and related equipment therefor, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:

Note 1: 4A003 includes the following:

a.Vector processors;

b.Array processors;

c.Digital signal processors;

d.Logic processors;

e.Equipment designed for «image enhancement»;

f.Equipment designed for «signal processing».

Note 2: The control status of the «digital computers» and related equipment described in 4A003 is determined by the control status of other equipment or systems provided:

a.The «digital computers» or related equipment are essential for the operation of the other equipment or systems;

b.The «digital computers» or related equipment are not a «principal element» of the other equipment or systems; and

N.B. 1: The control status of «signal processing» or «image enhancement» equipment specially designed for other equipment with functions limited to those required for the other equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment even if it exceeds the «principal element» criterion.

N.B. 2: For the control status of «digital computers» or related equipment for telecommunications equipment, see Category 5, Part 1 (Telecommunications).

c.The «technology» for the «digital computers» and related equipment is determined by 4E.

a. Designed or modified for «fault tolerance»;

Note: For the purposes of 4A003.a., «digital computers» and related equipment are not considered to be designed or modified for «fault tolerance» if they utilise any of the following:

1.Error detection or correction algorithms in «main storage»;

2.The interconnection of two «digital computers» so that, if the active central processing unit fails, an idling but mirroring central processing unit can continue the system's functioning;

3.The interconnection of two central processing units by data channels or by use of shared storage to permit one central processing unit to perform other work until the second central processing unit fails, at which time the first central processing unit takes over in order to continue the system's functioning; or

4.The synchronisation of two central processing units by «software» so that one central processing unit recognises when the other central processing unit fails and recovers tasks from the failing unit.

b.«Digital computers» having an «Adjusted Peak Performance» («APP») exceeding 0.75 Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT);

c.«Electronic assemblies» specially designed or modified for enhancing performance by aggregation of processors so that the «APP» of the aggregation exceeds the limit in 4A003.b.;

Note 1: 4A003.c. applies only to «electronic assemblies» and programmable interconnections not exceeding the limit in 4A003.b. when shipped as unintegrated «electronic assemblies». It does not apply to «electronic assemblies» inherently limited by nature of their design for use as related equipment specified in 4A003.e.

Note 2: 4A003.c. does not control «electronic assemblies» specially designed for a product or family of products whose maximum configuration does not exceed the limit of 4A003.b.

d. Not used;

e. Equipment performing analogue-to-digital conversions exceeding the limits in 3A001.a.5.;

f. Not used;

g. Equipment specially designed to provide external interconnection of «digital computers» or associated equipment which allows communications at data rates exceeding 1.25 Gbyte/s.

Note: 4A003.g. does not control internal interconnection equipment (e.g. backplanes, buses), passive interconnection equipment, «network access controllers» or «communications channel controllers».

4A004Computers, as follows, and specially designed related equipment, «electronic assemblies» and components therefor:

a.«Systolic array computers»;

b.«Neural computers»;

c.«Optical computers».

4A101Analogue computers, «digital computers» or digital differential analysers, other than those specified in 4A001.a.1., which are ruggedized and designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

4A102«Hybrid computers» specially designed for modelling, simulation or design integration of space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

Note: This control only applies when the equipment is supplied with «software» specified in 7D103 or 9D103.

4BTest, Inspection and Production Equipment

None.

4CMaterials

None.

4DSoftware

Note: The control status of «software» for the «development», «production», or «use» of equipment described in other Categories is dealt with in the appropriate Category. The control status of «software» for equipment described in this Category is dealt with herein.

4D001

a.«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment or «software» specified in 4A001 to 4A004, or 4D.

b.«Software», other than that specified in 4D001.a., specially designed or modified for the «development» or «production» of:

1.«Digital computers» having an «Adjusted Peak Performance» («APP») exceeding 0.04 Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT ); or

2.«Electronic assemblies» specially designed or modified for enhancing performance by aggregation of processors so that the «APP» of the aggregation exceeds the limit in 4D001.b.1.

4D002«Software» specially designed or modified to support «technology» specified in 4E.

4D003Specific «software», as follows:

a. Operating system «software», «software» development tools and compilers specially designed for «multi-data-stream processing» equipment, in «source code»;

b. Not used;

c.«Software» having characteristics or performing functions exceeding the limits in Category 5, Part 2 («Information Security»);

Note: 4D003.c. does not control «software» when accompanying its user for the user's personal use.

4ETechnology

4E001

a.«Technology» according to the General Technology Note, for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment or «software» specified in 4A or 4D.

b.«Technology», other than that specified in 4E001.a., specially designed or modified for the «development» or «production» of:

1.«Digital computers» having an «Adjusted Peak Performance» («APP») exceeding 0.04 Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT); or

2.«Electronic assemblies» specially designed or modified for enhancing performance by aggregation of processors so that the «APP» of the aggregation exceeds the limit in 4E001.b.1.

Technical note on «Composite Theoretical Performance» («CTP»)

Abbreviations used in this Technical Note

«CE» | «computing element» (typically an arithmetic logical unit) |

FP | floating point |

XP | fixed point |

t | execution time |

XOR | exclusive OR |

CPU | central processing unit |

TP | theoretical performance (of a single «CE») |

«CTP» | «composite theoretical performance» (multiple «CEs») |

R | effective calculating rate |

WL | word length |

L | word length adjustment |

* | multiply |

Execution time «t» is expressed in microseconds, TP and «CTP» are expressed in millions of theoretical operations per second (Mtops) and WL is expressed in bits.

Outline of «CTP» calculation method

«CTP» is a measure of computational performance given in Mtops. In calculating the «CTP» of an aggregation of «CEs» the following three steps are required:

1. Calculate the effective calculating rate R for each «CE»;

2. Apply the word length adjustment (L) to the effective calculating rate (R), resulting in a Theoretical Performance (TP) for each «CE»;

3. If there is more than one «CE», combine the TPs, resulting in a «CTP» for the aggregation.

Details for these steps are given in the following sections.

Note 1: For aggregations of multiple «CEs» which have both shared and unshared memory subsystems, the calculation of «CTP» is completed hierarchically, in two steps: first, aggregate the groups of «CEs» sharing memory; second, calculate the «CTP» of the groups using the calculation method for multiple «CEs» not sharing memory.

Note 2:«CEs» that are limited to input/output and peripheral functions (e.g., disk drive, communication and video display controllers) are not aggregated into the «CTP» calculation.

TECHNICAL NOTE ON «CTP»

The following table shows the method of calculating the Effective Calculating Rate R for each «CE»:

Step 1: The effective calculating rate R

For «CEs» Implementing: Note: Every «CE» must be evaluated independently. | Effective calculating Rate, R |

XP only | (Rxp) = (1)/(3 × (txp add)) if no add is implemented use: (Rxp) = (1)/(txp mult) If neither add nor multiply is implemented use the fastest available arithmetic operation as follows: (Rxp) = (1)/(3 × (txp)) See Notes X & Z |

FP only | Rfp = max (1)/(tfp add), (1)/(tfp mult) See Notes X & Y |

Both FP and XP (R) | Calculate both Rxp, Rfp |

For simple logic processors not implementing any of the specified arithmetic operations. | R = (1)/(3 × tlog) Where tlog is the execute time of the XOR, or for logic hardware not implementing the XOR, the fastest simple logic operation. See Notes X & Z |

For special logic processors not using any of the specified arithmetic or logic operations. | R = R' × WL/64 Where R' is the number of results per second, WL is the number of bits upon which the logic operation occurs, and 64 is a factor to normalise to a 64 bit operation. |

Note W: For a pipelined «CE» capable of executing up to one arithmetic or logic operation every clock cycle after the pipeline is full, a pipelined rate can be established. The effective calculating rate (R) for such a «CE» is the faster of the pipelined rate or non-pipelined execution rate.

Note X: For a «CE» which performs multiple operations of a specific type in a single cycle (e.g., two additions per cycle or two identical logic operations per cycle), the execution time t is given by:

t = ( cycle time )/( the number of identical operations per machine cycle )

«CEs» which perform different types of arithmetic or logic operations in a single machine cycle are to be treated as multiple separate «CEs» performing simultaneously (e.g., a «CE» performing an addition and a multiplication in one cycle is to be treated as two «CEs», the first performing an addition in one cycle and the second performing a multiplication in one cycle). If a single «CE» has both scalar function and vector function, use the shorter execution time value.

Note Y: For the «CE» that does not implement FP add or FP multiply, but that performs FP divide:

Rfp = (1)/(tfp divide)

If the «CE» implements FP reciprocal but not FP add, FP multiply or FP divide, then

Rfp = (1)/(tfp reciprocal)

If none of the specified instructions is implemented, the effective FP rate is 0.

Note Z: In simple logic operations, a single instruction performs a single logic manipulation of no more than two operands of given lengths. In complex logic operations, a single instruction performs multiple logic manipulations to produce one or more results from two or more operands.

Rates should be calculated for all supported operand lengths considering both pipelined operations (if supported), and non-pipelined operations using the fastest executing instruction for each operand length based on:

1.Pipelined or register-to-register operations. Exclude extraordinarily short execution times generated for operations on a predetermined operand or operands (for example, multiplication by 0 or 1). If no register-to-register operations are implemented, continue with (2).

2.The faster of register-to-memory or memory-to-register operations; if these also do not exist, then continue with (3).

3.Memory-to-memory.

In each case above, use the shortest execution time certified by the manufacturer.

Step 2: TP for each supported operand length WL

Adjust the effective rate R (or R') by the word length adjustment L as follows:

TP = R × L,

where L = (1/3 + WL/96)

Note: The word length WL used in these calculations is the operand length in bits. (If an operation uses operands of different lengths, select the largest word length.)

The combination of a mantissa ALU and an exponent ALU of a floating point processor or unit is considered to be one «CE» with a Word Length (WL) equal to the number of bits in the data representation (typically 32 or 64) for purposes of the «CTP» calculation.

This adjustment is not applied to specialized logic processors which do not use XOR instructions. In this case TP = R.

Select the maximum resulting value of TP for:

Each XP-only «CE» (Rxp);

Each FP-only «CE» (Rfp);

Each combined FP and XP «CE» (R);

Each simple logic processor not implementing any of the specified arithmetic operations; and

Each special logic processor not using any of the specified arithmetic or logic operations.

Step 3: «CTP» for aggregations of «CEs», including CPUs

For a CPU with a single «CE»,

«CTP» = TP

(for «CEs» performing both fixed and floating point operations

TP = max (TPfp, TPxp)

«CTP» for aggregations of multiple «CEs» operating simultaneously is calculated as follows:

Note 1: For aggregations that do not allow all of the «CEs» to run simultaneously, the possible combination of «CEs» that provides the largest «CTP» should be used. The TP of each contributing «CE» is to be calculated at its maximum value theoretically possible before the «CTP» of the combination is derived.

N.B. To determine the possible combinations of simultaneously operating «CEs», generate an instruction sequence that initiates operations in multiple «CEs», beginning with the slowest «CE» (the one needing the largest number of cycles to complete its operation) and ending with the fastest «CE». At each cycle of the sequence, the combination of «CEs» that are in operation during that cycle is a possible combination. The instruction sequence must take into account all hardware and/or architectural constraints on overlapping operations.

Note 2: A single integrated circuit chip or board assembly may contain multiple «CEs».

Note 3: Simultaneous operations are assumed to exist when the computer manufacturer claims concurrent, parallel or simultaneous operation or execution in a manual or brochure for the computer.

Note 4:«CTP» values are not to be aggregated for «CE» combinations (inter) connected by «Local Area Networks», Wide Area Networks, I/O shared connections/devices, I/O controllers and any communication interconnection implemented by «software».

Note 5:«CTP» values must be aggregated for multiple «CEs» specially designed to enhance performance by aggregation, operating simultaneously and sharing memory — or multiple memory/«CE»— combinations operating simultaneously utilising specially designed hardware.

This aggregation does not apply to «electronic assemblies» described by 4A003.c.

«CTP» = TP 1 + C 2 × TP 2 + … + C n × TP n ,

where the TPs are ordered by value, with TP 1 being the highest, TP 2 being the second highest, …, and TP n being the lowest. C i is a coefficient determined by the strength of the interconnection between «CEs», as follows:

For multiple «CEs» operating simultaneously and sharing memory:

C2 = C3 = C4 = … = Cn = 0,75

Note 1: When the «CTP» calculated by the above method does not exceed 194 Mtops, the following formula may be used to calculate C i :

Ci = (0,75)/(√m) (i = 2,…,n)

where m = the number of «CEs» or groups of «CEs» sharing access.

provided:

1.The TP i of each «CE» or group of «CEs» does not exceed 30 Mtops;

2.The «CEs» or groups of «CEs» share access to main memory (excluding cache memory) over a single channel; and

3.Only one «CE» or group of «CEs» can have use of the channel at any given time.

N.B. This does not apply to items controlled under Category 3.

Note 2:«CEs» share memory if they access a common segment of solid state memory. This memory may include cache memory, main memory or other internal memory. Peripheral memory devices such as disk drives, tape drives or RAM disks are not included.

For Multiple «CEs» or groups of «CEs» not sharing memory, interconnected by one or more data channels:

Ci | = 0,75 × ki (i = 2, …, 32) (see Note below) = 0,60 × ki (i = 33, …, 64) = 0,45 × ki (i = 65, …, 256) = 0,30 × ki (i > 256) |

The value of Ci is based on the number of «CE»s, not the number of nodes.

where

ki | = | min (Si/Kr, 1), and |

Kr | = | normalising factor of 20 MByte/s. |

Si | = | sum of the maximum data rates (in units of MByte/s) for all data channels connected to the ith«CE» or group of «CEs» sharing memory. |

When calculating a Ci for a group of «CEs», the number of the first «CE» in a group determines the proper limit for Ci. For example, in an aggregation of groups consisting of 3 «CEs» each, the 22nd group will contain «CE»64, «CE»65 and «CE»66. The proper limit for Ci for this group is 0,60.

Aggregation (of «CEs» or groups of «CEs») should be from the fastest-to-slowest; i.e.:

TP1 ≥ TP2 ≥ … ≥ TPn, and

in the case of TPi = TPi + 1, from the largest to smallest; i.e.:

Ci ≥ Ci + 1

Note: The k i factor is not to be applied to «CEs» 2 to 12 if the TP i of the «CE» or group of «CEs» is more than 50 Mtops; i.e., C i for «CEs» 2 to 12 is 0,75.

TECHNICAL NOTE ON «ADJUSTED PEAK PERFORMANCE» («APP»)

«APP» is an adjusted peak rate at which «digital computers» perform 64-bit or larger floating point additions and multiplications.

«APP» is expressed in Weighted TeraFLOPS (WT), in units of 1012 adjusted floating point operations per second

Abbreviations used in this Technical Note

n | number of processors in the «digital computer» |

i | processor number (i,...n) |

ti | processor cycle time (ti = 1/Fi) |

Fi | processor frequency |

Ri | peak floating point calculating rate |

Wi | architecture adjustment factor |

Outline of «APP» calculation method

1. For each processor i, determine the peak number of 64-bit or larger floating point operations, FPOi, performed per cycle for each processor in the «digital computer».

Note

In determining FPO, include only 64-bit or larger floating point additions and/or multiplications. All floating point operations must be expressed in operations per processor cycle; operations requiring multiple cycles may be expressed in fractional results per cycle. For processors not capable of performing calculations on floating point operands of 64-bits or more, the effective calculating rate R is zero.

2. Calculate the floating point rate R for each processor Ri = FPOi/ti.

3. Calculate «APP» as «APP» = W1 x R1 + W2 x R2 + … + Wn x Rn.

4. For «vector processors», Wi = 0.9. For non-«vector processors», Wi = 0.3.

Note 1 For processors that perform compound operations in a cycle, such as addition and multiplication, each operation is counted.

Note 2 For a pipelined processor the effective calculating rate R is the faster of the pipelined rate, once the pipeline is full, or the non-pipelined rate.

Note 3 The calculating rate R of each contributing processor is to be calculated at its maximum value theoretically possible before the «APP» of the combination is derived. Simultaneous operations are assumed to exist when the computer manufacturer claims concurrent, parallel, or simultaneous operation or execution in a manual or brochure for the computer.

Note 4 Do not include processors that are limited to input/output and peripheral functions (e.g., disk drive, communication and video display) when calculating «APP».

Note 5«APP» values are not to be calculated for processor combinations (inter)connected by «Local Area Networks», Wide Area Networks, I/O shared connections/devices, I/O controllers and any communication interconnection implemented by «software».

TECHNICAL NOTE ON «ADJUSTED PEAK PERFORMANCE» («APP»)

Note 6«APP» values must be calculated for:

1. Processor combinations containing processors specially designed to enhance performance by aggregation, operating simultaneously and sharing memory; or

2. Multiple memory/processor combinations operating simultaneously utilizing specially designed hardware.

Note 7 A «vector processor» is defined as a processor with built-in instructions that perform multiple calculations on floating-point vectors (one-dimensional arrays of 64-bit or larger numbers) simultaneously, having at least 2 vector functional units and at least 8 vector registers of at least 64 elements each.

CATEGORY 5

TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND «INFORMATION SECURITY»

PART 1

TELECOMMUNICATIONS

Note 1: The control status of components, «lasers», test and «production» equipment and «software» therefor which are specially designed for telecommunications equipment or systems is determined in Category 5, Part 1.

Note 2:«Digital computers», related equipment or«software», when essential for the operation and support of telecommunications equipment described in this Category, are regarded as specially designed components, provided they are the standard models customarily supplied by the manufacturer. This includes operation, administration, maintenance, engineering or billing computer systems.

5A1Systems, Equipment and Components

5A001

a. Any type of telecommunications equipment having any of the following characteristics, functions or features:

1. Specially designed to withstand transitory electronic effects or electromagnetic pulse effects, both arising from a nuclear explosion;

2. Specially hardened to withstand gamma, neutron or ion radiation; or

3. Specially designed to operate outside the temperature range from 218 K (– 55 °C) to 397 K (124 °C).

Note: 5A001.a.3. applies only to electronic equipment.

Note: 5A001.a.2. and 5A001.a.3. do not control equipment designed or modified for use on board satellites.

b. Telecommunication transmission equipment and systems, and specially designed components and accessories therefor, having any of the following characteristics, functions or features:

1. Being underwater communications systems having any of the following characteristics:

a. An acoustic carrier frequency outside the range from 20 kHz to 60 kHz;

b. Using an electromagnetic carrier frequency below 30 kHz; or

c. Using electronic beam steering techniques;

2. Being radio equipment operating in the 1,5 MHz to 87,5 MHz band and having any of the following characteristics:

a. Incorporating adaptive techniques providing more than 15 dB suppression of an interfering signal; or

b. Having all of the following:

1. Automatically predicting and selecting frequencies and «total digital transfer rates» per channel to optimise the transmission; and

2. Incorporating a linear power amplifier configuration having a capability to support multiple signals simultaneously at an output power of 1 kW or more in the frequency range of 1,5 MHz or more but less than 30 MHz, or 250 W or more in the frequency range of 30 MHz or more but not exceeding 87,5 MHz, over an «instantaneous bandwidth» of one octave or more and with an output harmonic and distortion content of better than – 80 dB;

3. Being radio equipment employing «spread spectrum» techniques, including «frequency hopping» techniques, other than those specified in 5A001.b.4., having any of the following characteristics:

a. User programmable spreading codes; or

b. A total transmitted bandwidth which is 100 or more times the bandwidth of any one information channel and in excess of 50 kHz;

Note: 5A001.b.3.b. does not control radio equipment specially designed for use with civil cellular radio-communications systems.

Note: 5A001.b.3. does not control equipment designed to operate at an output power of 1,0 Watt or less.

4. Being radio equipment employing ultra-wideband modulation techniques, having user programmable channelising codes scrambling codes or network identification codes, having any of the following characteristics:

a. A bandwidth exceeding 500 MHz; or

b. A «fractional bandwidth» of 20 % or more;

5. Being digitally controlled radio receivers having all of the following:

a. More than 1000 channels;

b. A «frequency switching time» of less than 1 ms;

c. Automatic searching or scanning of a part of the electromagnetic spectrum; and

d. Identification of the received signals or the type of transmitter; or

Note: 5A001.b.5. does not control radio equipment specially designed for use with civil cellular radio-communications systems.

6. Employing functions of digital «signal processing» to provide «voice coding» output at rates of less than 2400 bit/s.

Technical Notes:

1. For variable rate voice coding, 5A001.b.6. applies to the voice coding output of continuous speech.

2. For the purposes of 5A001.b.6., «voice coding» is defined as the technique to take samples of human voice and then convert these samples into a digital signal, taking into account specific characteristics of human speech.

c. Optical fibre communication cables, optical fibres and accessories, as follows:

1. Optical fibres of more than 500 m in length, and specified by the manufacturer as being capable of withstanding a proof test tensile stress of 2 × 109 N/m2 or more;

Technical Note:

Proof Test: on-line or off-line production screen testing that dynamically applies a prescribed tensile stress over a 0,5 to 3 m length of fibre at a running rate of 2 to 5 m/s while passing between capstans approximately 150 mm in diameter. The ambient temperature is a nominal 293 K (20 °C) and relative humidity 40 %. Equivalent national standards may be used for executing the proof test.

2. Optical fibre cables and accessories designed for underwater use.

Note: 5A001.c.2. does not control standard civil telecommunication cables and accessories.

N.B. 1: For underwater umbilical cables, and connectors therefor, see 8A002.a.3.

N.B. 2: For fibre-optic hull penetrators or connectors, see 8A002.c.

d.«Electronically steerable phased array antennae» operating above 31.8 GHz.

Note: 5A001.d. does not control «electronically steerable phased array antennae» for landing systems with instruments meeting ICAO standards covering microwave landing systems (MLS).

e. Radio direction finding equipment operating at frequencies above 30 MHz and having all of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

1.«Instantaneous bandwidth» of 10 MHz or more; and

2. Capable of finding a line of bearing (LOB) to non-cooperating radio transmitters with a signal duration of less than 1 ms.

Note: 5A001.d. does not control «electronically steerable phased array antennae» for landing systems with instruments meeting ICAO standards covering microwave landing systems (MLS).

f. Jamming equipment specially designed or modified to intentionally and selectively interfere with, deny, inhibit, degrade or seduce cellular mobile telecommunications services, having any of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

1. Simulating the functions of Radio Access Network (RAN) equipment; or

2. Detecting and exploiting specific characteristics of the mobile telecommunications protocol employed (e.g., GSM).

N.B.: For GNSS jamming equipment see Military Goods Controls.

5A101 Telemetering and telecontrol equipment, including ground equipment, designed or modified for «missiles».

Technical Note:

In 5A101 «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

Note: 5A101 does not control:

a.Equipment designed or modified for manned aircraft or satellites;

b.Ground based equipment designed or modified for terrestrial or marine applications;

c.Equipment designed for commercial, civil or «Safety of Life» (e.g. data integrity, flight safety) GNSS services;

5B1Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

5B001

a. Equipment and specially designed components or accessories therefor, specially designed for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment, functions or features specified in 5A001, 5B001, 5D001 or 5E001.

Note: 5B001.a. does not control optical fibre characterisation equipment.

b. Equipment and specially designed components or accessories therefor, specially designed for the «development» of any of the following telecommunication transmission or switching equipment:

1. Equipment employing digital techniques designed to operate at a «total digital transfer rate» exceeding 15 Gbit/s;

Technical Note:

For switching equipment the «total digital transfer rate» is measured at the highest speed port or line.

2. Equipment employing a «laser» and having any of the following:

a. A transmission wavelength exceeding 1750 nm;

b. Performing «optical amplification»;

c. Employing coherent optical transmission or coherent optical detection techniques (also called optical heterodyne or homodyne techniques); or

d. Employing analogue techniques and having a bandwidth exceeding 2,5 GHz;

Note: 5B001.b.2.d. does not control equipment specially designed for the «development» of commercial TV systems.

3. Equipment employing «optical switching»;

4. Radio equipment employing quadrature-amplitude-modulation (QAM) techniques above level 256; or

5. Equipment employing «common channel signalling» operating in non-associated mode of operation.

5C1Materials

None

5D1Software

5D001

a.«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment, functions or features specified by 5A001 or 5B001.

b.«Software» specially designed or modified to support «technology» specified in 5E001.

c. Specific «software» specially designed or modified to provide characteristics, functions or features of equipment specified in 5A001 or 5B001;

d.«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development» of any of the following telecommunication transmission or switching equipment:

1. Equipment employing digital techniques designed to operate at a «total digital transfer rate» exceeding 15 Gbit/s;

Technical Note:

For switching equipment the «total digital transfer rate» is measured at the highest speed port or line.

2. Equipment employing a «laser» and having any of the following:

a. A transmission wavelength exceeding 1750 nm; or

b. Employing analogue techniques and having a bandwidth exceeding 2,5 GHz;

Note: 5D001.d.2.b. does not control «software» specially designed or modified for the «development» of commercial TV systems.

3. Equipment employing «optical switching»; or

4. Radio equipment employing quadrature-amplitude-modulation (QAM) techniques above level 256.

5D101«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of equipment specified in 5A101.

5E1Technology

5E001

a.«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development», «production» or «use» (excluding operation) of equipment, functions or features or «software» specified in 5A001, 5B001 or 5D001.

b. Specific «technologies», as follows:

1.«Required»«technology» for the «development» or «production» of telecommunications equipment specially designed to be used on board satellites;

2.«Technology» for the «development» or «use» of «laser» communication techniques with the capability of automatically acquiring and tracking signals and maintaining communications through exoatmosphere or sub-surface (water) media;

3.«Technology» for the «development» of digital cellular radio base station receiving equipment whose reception capabilities that allow multi-band, multi-channel, multi-mode, multi-coding algorithm or multi-protocol operation can be modified by changes in «software»;

4.«Technology» for the «development» of «spread spectrum» techniques, including «frequency hopping» techniques.

c.«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» or «production» of any of the following telecommunication transmission or switching equipment, functions or features:

1. Equipment employing digital techniques designed to operate at a «total digital transfer rate» exceeding 15 Gbit/s;

Technical Note:

For switching equipment the «total digital transfer rate» is measured at the highest speed port or line.

2. Equipment employing a «laser» and having any of the following:

a. A transmission wavelength exceeding 1750 nm;

b. Performing «optical amplification» using praseodymium-doped fluoride fibre amplifiers (PDFFA);

c. Employing coherent optical transmission or coherent optical detection techniques (also called optical heterodyne or homodyne techniques);

d. Employing wavelength division multiplexing techniques exceeding 8 optical carriers in a single optical window; or

e. Employing analogue techniques and having a bandwidth exceeding 2,5 GHz;

Note: 5E001.c.2.e. does not control «technology» for the «development» or «production» of commercial TV systems.

3. Equipment employing «optical switching»;

4. Radio equipment having any of the following:

a. Quadrature-amplitude-modulation (QAM) techniques above level 256; or

b. Operating at input or output frequencies exceeding 31,8 GHz; or

Note: 5E001.c.4.b. does not control «technology» for the «development» or «production» of equipment designed or modified for operation in any frequency band which is «allocated by the ITU» for radio-communications services, but not for radio-determination.

5. Equipment employing «common channel signalling» operating in non-associated mode of operation.

5E101«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment specified in 5A101.

PART 2

«INFORMATION SECURITY»

Note 1: The control status of «information security» equipment, «software», systems, application specific «electronic assemblies», modules, integrated circuits, components or functions is determined in Category 5, Part 2 even if they are components or «electronic assemblies» of other equipment.

Note 2: Category 5 — Part 2 does not control products when accompanying their user for the user's personal use.

Note 3:

Cryptography Note

5A002 and 5D002 do not control goods that meet all of the following:

a.Generally available to the public by being sold, without restriction, from stock at retail selling points by means of any of the following:

1.Over-the-counter transactions;

2.Mail order transactions;

3.Electronic transactions; or

4.Telephone call transactions;

b.The cryptographic functionality cannot easily be changed by the user;

c.Designed for installation by the user without further substantial support by the supplier; and

d.When necessary, details of the goods are accessible and will be provided, upon request, to the competent authorities of the Member State in which the exporter is established in order to ascertain compliance with conditions described in paragraphs a. to c. above.

Technical Note:

In Category 5 — Part 2, parity bits are not included in the key length.

5A2Systems, Equipment and Components

5A002a. Systems, equipment, application specific «electronic assemblies», modules and integrated circuits for «information security», as follows, and other specially designed components therefor:

N.B.: For the control of global navigation satellite systems receiving equipment containing or employing decryption (i.e. GPS or GLONASS), see 7A005.

1. Designed or modified to use «cryptography» employing digital techniques performing any cryptographic function other than authentication or digital signature having any of the following:

Technical Notes:

1.Authentication and digital signature functions include their associated key management function.

2.Authentication includes all aspects of access control where there is no encryption of files or text except as directly related to the protection of passwords, Personal Identification Numbers (PINs) or similar data to prevent unauthorised access.

3.«Cryptography» does not include «fixed» data compression or coding techniques.

Note: 5A002.a.1. includes equipment designed or modified to use «cryptography» employing analogue principles when implemented with digital techniques.

a. A «symmetric algorithm» employing a key length in excess of 56 bits; or

b. An «asymmetric algorithm» where the security of the algorithm is based on any of the following:

1. Factorisation of integers in excess of 512 bits (e.g., RSA);

2. Computation of discrete logarithms in a multiplicative group of a finite field of size greater than 512 bits (e.g., Diffie-Hellman over Z/pZ); or

3. Discrete logarithms in a group other than mentioned in 5A002.a.1.b.2. in excess of 112 bits (e.g., Diffie-Hellman over an elliptic curve);

2. Designed or modified to perform cryptanalytic functions;

3. Not used;

4. Specially designed or modified to reduce the compromising emanations of information-bearing signals beyond what is necessary for health, safety or electromagnetic interference standards;

5. Designed or modified to use cryptographic techniques to generate the spreading code for «spread spectrum» systems, other than those specified in 5A002.a.6., including the hopping code for «frequency hopping» systems;

6. Designed or modified to use cryptographic techniques to generate channelising codes, scrambling codes or network identification codes, for systems using ultra-wideband modulation techniques, having any of the following characteristics:

a. A bandwidth exceeding 500 MHz; or

b. A «fractional bandwidth» of 20 % or more.

7. Not used;

8. Communications cable systems designed or modified using mechanical, electrical or electronic means to detect surreptitious intrusion;

9. Designed or modified to use «quantum cryptography».

Technical Note:

«Quantum cryptography» is also known as quantum key distribution (QKD).

Note: 5A002 does not control:

a.«Personalised smart cards»:

1.Where the cryptographic capability is restricted for use in equipment or systems excluded from control under entries b. to f. of this Note; or

2.For general public-use applications where the cryptographic capability is not user-accessible and it is specially designed and limited to allow protection of personal data stored within.

N.B.: If a «personalised smart card» has multiple functions, the control status of each function is assessed individually;

b.Receiving equipment for radio broadcast, pay television or similar restricted audience broadcast of the consumer type, without digital encryption except that exclusively used for sending the billing or programme-related information back to the broadcast providers;

c.Equipment where the cryptographic capability is not user-accessible and which is specially designed and limited to allow any of the following:

1.Execution of copy-protected «software»;

2.Access to any of the following:

a.Copy-protected contents stored on read-only media; or

b.Information stored in encrypted form on media (e.g. in connection with the protection of intellectual property rights) when the media is offered for sale in identical sets to the public;

3.Copying control of copyright protected audio/video data; or

4. Encryption and/or decryption for protection of libraries, design attributes, or associated data for the design of semiconductor devices or integrated circuits;

d.Cryptographic equipment specially designed and limited for banking use or «money transactions»;

Technical Note:

«Money transactions» in 5A002 Note d. includes the collection and settlement of fares or credit functions.

e.Portable or mobile radiotelephones for civil use (e.g. for use with commercial civil cellular radiocommunications systems) that are not capable of end-to-end encryption;

f.Cordless telephone equipment not capable of end-to-end encryption where the maximum effective range of unboosted cordless operation (i.e. a single, unrelayed hop between terminal and home basestation) is less than 400 metres according to the manufacturer's specifications.

5B2Test, Inspection and Production Equipment

5B002

a. Equipment specially designed for:

1. The «development» of equipment or functions specified in 5A002, 5B002, 5D002 or 5E002 including measuring or test equipment;

2. The «production» of equipment or functions specified in 5A002, 5B002, 5D002 or 5E002, including measuring, test, repair or production equipment;

b. Measuring equipment specially designed to evaluate and validate the «information security» functions specified in 5A002 or 5D002.

5C2Materials

None.

5D2Software

5D002

a.«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment or «software» specified in 5A002, 5B002 or 5D002;

b.«Software» specially designed or modified to support «technology» specified in 5E002;

c. Specific «software», as follows:

1.«Software» having the characteristics, or performing or simulating the functions of the equipment specified in 5A002 or 5B002;

2.«Software» to certify «software» specified in 5D002.c.1.

Note: 5D002 does not control:

a.«Software» required for the «use» of equipment excluded from control under the Note to 5A002;

b.«Software» providing any of the functions of equipment excluded from control under the Note to 5A002.

5E2Technology

5E002«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment or «software» specified in 5A002, 5B002 or 5D002.

CATEGORY 6

SENSORS AND LASERS

6ASystems, Equipment and Components

6A001Acoustics:

a. Marine acoustic systems, equipment and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

1. Active (transmitting or transmitting-and-receiving) systems, equipment and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

Note: 6A001.a.1. does not control:

a.Depth sounders operating vertically below the apparatus, not including a scanning function exceeding ± 20°, and limited to measuring the depth of water, the distance of submerged or buried objects or fish finding;

b.Acoustic beacons, as follows:

1.Acoustic emergency beacons;

2.Pingers specially designed for relocating or returning to an underwater position.

a. Wide-swath bathymetric survey systems designed for sea bed topographic mapping, having all of the following:

1. Being designed to take measurements at an angle exceeding 20° from the vertical;

2. Being designed to measure depths exceeding 600 m below the water surface; and

3. Being designed to provide any of the following:

a. Incorporation of multiple beams any of which is less than 1,9°; or

b. Data accuracies of better than 0,3 % of water depth across the swath averaged over the individual measurements within the swath;

b. Object detection or location systems having any of the following:

1. A transmitting frequency below 10 kHz;

2. Sound pressure level exceeding 224 dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) for equipment with an operating frequency in the band from 10 kHz to 24 kHz inclusive;

3. Sound pressure level exceeding 235 dB (reference 1 μPa at 1 m) for equipment with an operating frequency in the band between 24 kHz and 30 kHz;

4. Forming beams of less than 1° on any axis and having an operating frequency of less than 100 kHz;

5. Designed to operate with an unambiguous display range exceeding 5120 m; or

6. Designed to withstand pressure during normal operation at depths exceeding 1000 m and having transducers with any of the following:

a. Dynamic compensation for pressure; or

b. Incorporating other than lead zirconate titanate as the transduction element;

c. Acoustic projectors, including transducers, incorporating piezoelectric, magnetostrictive, electrostrictive, electrodynamic or hydraulic elements operating individually or in a designed combination, having any of the following:

Note 1: The control status of acoustic projectors, including transducers, specially designed for other equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment.

Note 2: 6A001.a.1.c. does not control electronic sources which direct the sound vertically only, or mechanical (e.g., air gun or vapour-shock gun) or chemical (e.g., explosive) sources.

1. An instantaneous radiated «acoustic power density» exceeding 0,01 mW/mm2/Hz for devices operating at frequencies below 10 kHz;

2. A continuously radiated «acoustic power density» exceeding 0,001 mW/mm2/Hz for devices operating at frequencies below 10 kHz; or

Technical Note:

«Acoustic power density» is obtained by dividing the output acoustic power by the product of the area of the radiating surface and the frequency of operation.

3. Side-lobe suppression exceeding 22 dB;

d. Acoustic systems, equipment and specially designed components for determining the position of surface vessels or underwater vehicles designed to operate at a range exceeding 1000 m with a positioning accuracy of less than 10 m rms (root mean square) when measured at a range of 1000 m;

Note: 6A001.a.1.d. includes:

a.Equipment using coherent «signal processing» between two or more beacons and the hydrophone unit carried by the surface vessel or underwater vehicle;

b.Equipment capable of automatically correcting speed-of-sound propagation errors for calculation of a point.

2. Passive (receiving, whether or not related in normal application to separate active equipment) systems, equipment and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

a. Hydrophones having any of the following characteristics:

Note: The control status of hydrophones specially designed for other equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment.

1. Incorporating continuous flexible sensing elements;

2. Incorporating flexible assemblies of discrete sensing elements with either a diameter or length less than 20 mm and with a separation between elements of less than 20 mm;

3. Having any of the following sensing elements:

a. Optical fibres;

b.«Piezoelectric polymer films» other than polyvinylidene-fluoride (PVDF) and its copolymers {}{P(VDF-TrFE) and P(VDF-TFE)}}; or

c.«Flexible piezoelectric composites»;

4. A «hydrophone sensitivity» better than – 180 dB at any depth with no acceleration compensation;

5. When designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m with acceleration compensation; or

6. Designed for operation at depths exceeding 1000 m;

Technical Notes:

1. «Piezoelectric polymer film» sensing elements consist of polarised polymer film that is stretched over and attached to a supporting frame or spool (mandrel).

2. «Flexible piezoelectric composite» sensing elements consist of piezoelectric ceramic particles or fibres combined with an electrically insulating, acoustically transparent rubber, polymer or epoxy compound, where the compound is an integral part of the sensing elements.

3. «Hydrophone sensitivity» is defined as twenty times the logarithm to the base 10 of the ratio of rms output voltage to a 1 V rms reference, when the hydrophone sensor, without a pre-amplifier, is placed in a plane wave acoustic field with an rms pressure of 1 μPa. For example, a hydrophone of – 160 dB (reference 1 V per μPa) would yield an output voltage of 10 -8 V in such a field, while one of – 180 dB sensitivity would yield only 10 -9 V output. Thus, – 160 dB is better than – 180 dB.

b. Towed acoustic hydrophone arrays having any of the following:

1. Hydrophone group spacing of less than 12,5 m or «able to be modified» to have hydrophone group spacing of less than 12,5 m;

2. Designed or «able to be modified» to operate at depths exceeding 35 m;

Technical Note:

«Able to be modified» in 6A001.a.2.b.1. and 2. means having provisions to allow a change of the wiring or interconnections to alter hydrophone group spacing or operating depth limits. These provisions are: spare wiring exceeding 10 % of the number of wires, hydrophone group spacing adjustment blocks or internal depth limiting devices that are adjustable or that control more than one hydrophone group.

3. Heading sensors specified in 6A001.a.2.d.;

4. Longitudinally reinforced array hoses;

5. An assembled array of less than 40 mm in diameter;

6. Multiplexed hydrophone group signals designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m or having an adjustable or removable depth sensing device in order to operate at depths exceeding 35 m; or

7. Hydrophone characteristics specified in 6A001.a.2.a.;

c. Processing equipment, specially designed for towed acoustic hydrophone arrays, having «user accessible programmability» and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;

d. Heading sensors having all of the following:

1. An accuracy of better than ± 0,5°; and

2. Designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m or having an adjustable or removable depth sensing device in order to operate at depths exceeding 35 m;

e. Bottom or bay cable systems having any of the following:

1. Incorporating hydrophones specified in 6A001.a.2.a.; or

2. Incorporating multiplexed hydrophone group signal modules having all of the following characteristics:

a. Designed to operate at depths exceeding 35 m or having an adjustable or removable depth sensing device in order to operate at depths exceeding 35 m; and

b. Capable of being operationally interchanged with towed acoustic hydrophone array modules;

f. Processing equipment, specially designed for bottom or bay cable systems, having «user accessible programmability» and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes;

b. Correlation-velocity sonar log equipment designed to measure the horizontal speed of the equipment carrier relative to the sea bed at distances between the carrier and the sea bed exceeding 500 m.

6A002Optical sensors

N.B.: SEE ALSO 6A102.

a. Optical detectors, as follows:

Note: 6A002.a. does not control germanium or silicon photodevices.

N.B.: Silicon and other material based microbolometer non «space-qualified»«focal plane arrays» are only specified in 6A002.a.3.f.

1.«Space-qualified» solid-state detectors, as follows:

a.«Space-qualified» solid-state detectors, having all of the following:

1. A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 10 nm but not exceeding 300 nm; and

2. A response of less than 0,1 % relative to the peak response at a wavelength exceeding 400 nm;

b.«Space-qualified» solid-state detectors, having all of the following:

1. A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 900 nm but not exceeding 1200 nm; and

2. A response «time constant» of 95 ns or less;

c.«Space-qualified» solid-state detectors having a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1200 nm but not exceeding 30000 nm;

2. Image intensifier tubes and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

a. Image intensifier tubes having all of the following:

1. A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 1050 nm;

2. A microchannel plate for electron image amplification with a hole pitch (centre-to-centre spacing) of 12 μm or less; and

3. Any of the following photocathodes:

a. S-20, S-25 or multialkali photocathodes with a luminous sensitivity exceeding 350 μA/lm;

b. GaAs or GaInAs photocathodes; or

c. Other III-V compound semiconductor photocathodes;

Note: 6A002.a.2.a.3.c. does not apply to compound semiconductor photocathodes with a maximum radiant sensitivity of 10 mA/W or less.

b. Specially designed components, as follows:

1. Microchannel plates having a hole pitch (centre-to-centre spacing) of 12 μm or less;

2. GaAs or GaInAs photocathodes;

3. Other III-V compound semiconductor photocathodes;

Note: 6A002.a.2.b.3. does not control compound semiconductor photocathodes with a maximum radiant sensitivity of 10 mA/W or less.

3. Non-«space-qualified»«focal plane arrays», as follows:

N.B.: Silicon and other material based microbolometer non «space-qualified»«focal plane arrays» are only specified in 6A002.a.3.f.

Technical Notes:

1.Linear or two-dimensional multi-element detector arrays are referred to as «focal plane arrays»;

2.For the purposes of 6A002.a.3. «cross scan direction» is defined as the axis parallel to the linear array of detector elements and the «scan direction» is defined as the axis perpendicular to the linear array of detector elements.

Note 1: 6A002.a.3. includes photoconductive arrays and photovoltaic arrays.

Note 2: 6A002.a.3. does not control:

a.Multi-element (not to exceed 16 elements) encapsulated photoconductive cells using either lead sulphide or lead selenide;

b. Pyroelectric detectors using any of the following:

1. Triglycine sulphate and variants;

2. Lead-lanthanum-zirconium titanate and variants;

3. Lithium tantalate;

4. Polyvinylidene fluoride and variants; or

5. Strontium barium niobate and variants.

a. Non-«space-qualified»«focal plane arrays», having all of the following:

1. Individual elements with a peak response within the wavelength range exceeding 900 nm but not exceeding 1050 nm; and

2. A response «time constant» of less than 0,5 ns;

b. Non-«space-qualified»«focal plane arrays», having all of the following:

1. Individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1050 nm but not exceeding 1200 nm; and

2. A response «time constant» of 95 ns or less;

c. Non-«space-qualified» non-linear (2-dimensional) «focal plane arrays», having individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1200 nm but not exceeding 30000 nm;

N.B.: Silicon and other material based microbolometer non «space-qualified»«focal plane arrays» are only specified in 6A.002.a.3.f.

d. Non-«space-qualified» linear (1-dimensional) «focal plane arrays», having all of the following:

1. Individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 1200 nm but not exceeding 2500 nm; and

2. Any of the following:

a. A ratio of scan direction dimension of the detector element to the cross-scan direction dimension of the detector element of less than 3,8; or

b. Signal processing in the element (SPRITE);

e. Non-«space-qualified» linear (1-dimensional) «focal plane arrays», having individual elements with a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 2500 nm but not exceeding 30000 nm.

f. Non-«space-qualified» non-linear (2-dimensional) infrared «focal plane arrays» based on «micro-bolometer» material having individual elements with an unfiltered response in the wavelength range equal to or exceeding 8000 nm but not exceeding 14000 nm.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 6A002.a.3.f. «micro-bolometer» is defined as a thermal imaging detector that, as a result of a temperature change in the detector caused by the absorption of infrared radiation, is used to generate any usable signal.

b.«Monospectral imaging sensors» and «multispectral imaging sensors» designed for remote sensing applications, having any of the following:

1. An Instantaneous-Field-Of-View (IFOV) of less than 200 μrad (microradians); or

2. Being specified for operation in the wavelength range exceeding 400 nm but not exceeding 30000 nm and having all the following;

a. Providing output imaging data in digital format; and

b. Being any of the following:

1.«Space-qualified»; or

2. Designed for airborne operation, using other than silicon detectors, and having an IFOV of less than 2,5 mrad (milliradians).

c.«Direct view» imaging equipment operating in the visible or infrared spectrum, incorporating any of the following:

1. Image intensifier tubes specified in 6A002.a.2.a.; or

2.«Focal plane arrays» specified in 6A002.a.3.

Technical Note:

«Direct view» refers to imaging equipment, operating in the visible or infrared spectrum, that presents a visual image to a human observer without converting the image into an electronic signal for television display, and that cannot record or store the image photographically, electronically or by any other means.

Note: 6A002.c. does not control the following equipment incorporating other than GaAs or GaInAs photocathodes:

a.Industrial or civilian intrusion alarm, traffic or industrial movement control or counting systems;

b.Medical equipment;

c.Industrial equipment used for inspection, sorting or analysis of the properties of materials;

d.Flame detectors for industrial furnaces;

e.Equipment specially designed for laboratory use.

d. Special support components for optical sensors, as follows:

1.«Space-qualified» cryocoolers;

2. Non-«space-qualified» cryocoolers, having a cooling source temperature below 218 K (– 55 °C), as follows:

a. Closed cycle type with a specified Mean-Time-To-Failure (MTTF), or Mean-Time-Between-Failures (MTBF), exceeding 2500 hours;

b. Joule-Thomson (JT) self-regulating minicoolers having bore (outside) diameters of less than 8 mm;

3. Optical sensing fibres specially fabricated either compositionally or structurally, or modified by coating, to be acoustically, thermally, inertially, electromagnetically or nuclear radiation sensitive.

e.«Space qualified»«focal plane arrays» having more than 2048 elements per array and having a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 300 nm but not exceeding 900 nm.

6A003Cameras

N.B.: SEE ALSO 6A203.

N.B.: For cameras specially designed or modified for underwater use, see 8A002.d. and 8A002.e.

a. Instrumentation cameras and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

Note: Instrumentation cameras, specified in 6A003.a.3. to 6A003.a.5., with modular structures should be evaluated by their maximum capability, using plug-ins available according to the camera manufacturer's specifications.

1. High-speed cinema recording cameras using any film format from 8 mm to 16 mm inclusive, in which the film is continuously advanced throughout the recording period, and that are capable of recording at framing rates exceeding 13150 frames/s;

Note: 6A003.a.1. does not control cinema recording cameras designed for civil purposes.

2. Mechanical high-speed cameras, in which the film does not move, capable of recording at rates exceeding 1000000 frames/s for the full framing height of 35 mm film, or at proportionately higher rates for lesser frame heights, or at proportionately lower rates for greater frame heights;

3. Mechanical or electronic streak cameras having writing speeds exceeding 10 mm/s;

4. Electronic framing cameras having a speed exceeding 1000000 frames/s;

5. Electronic cameras, having all of the following:

a. An electronic shutter speed (gating capability) of less than 1 μs per full frame; and

b. A read out time allowing a framing rate of more than 125 full frames per second.

6. Plug-ins, having all of the following characteristics:

a. Specially designed for instrumentation cameras which have modular structures and which are specified in 6A003.a.; and

b. Enabling these cameras to meet the characteristics specified in 6A003.a.3., 6A003.a.4., or 6A003.a.5., according to the manufacturer's specifications.

b. Imaging cameras, as follows:

Note: 6A003.b. does not control television or video cameras specially designed for television broadcasting.

1. Video cameras incorporating solid state sensors, having a peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 10 nm, but not exceeding 30000 nm and having all of the following:

a. Having any of the following:

1. More than 4 × 106«active pixels» per solid state array for monochrome (black and white) cameras;

2. More than 4 × 106«active pixels» per solid state array for colour cameras incorporating three solid state arrays; or

3. More than 12 × 106«active pixels» for solid state array colour cameras incorporating one solid state array; and

b. Having any of the following:

1. Optical mirrors controlled by 6A004.a.;

2. Optical control equipment controlled by 6A004.d.; or

3. The capability for annotating internally generated camera tracking data.

Technical Note:

1.For the purpose of this entry, digital video cameras should be evaluated by the maximum number of «active pixels» used for capturing moving images.

2.For the purpose of this entry, camera tracking data is the information necessary to define camera line of sight orientation with respect to the earth. This includes: 1) the horizontal angle the camera line of sight makes with respect to the earth's magnetic field direction and; 2) the vertical angle between the camera line of sight and the earth's horizon.

2. Scanning cameras and scanning camera systems, having all of the following:

a. A peak response in the wavelength range exceeding 10 nm, but not exceeding 30000 nm;

b. Linear detector arrays with more than 8192 elements per array; and

c. Mechanical scanning in one direction;

3. Imaging cameras incorporating image intensifier tubes specified in 6A002.a.2.a.;

4.«Imaging cameras» incorporating «focal plane arrays» having any of the following:

a. Incorporating «focal plane arrays» controlled by 6A002.a.3.a. to 6A002.a.3.e.; or

b. Incorporating «focal plane arrays» controlled by 6A002.a.3.f.

Note 1:«Imaging cameras» described in 6A003.b.4 include «focal plane arrays» combined with sufficient signal processing electronics, beyond the read out integrated circuit, to enable as a minimum the output of an analogue or digital signal once power is supplied.

Note 2: 6A003.b.4.a. does not control imaging cameras incorporating linear «focal plane arrays» with twelve elements or fewer, not employing time-delay-and-integration within the element, designed for any of the following:

a.Industrial or civilian intrusion alarm, traffic or industrial movement control or counting systems;

b.Industrial equipment used for inspection or monitoring of heat flows in buildings, equipment or industrial processes;

c.Industrial equipment used for inspection, sorting or analysis of the properties of materials;

d.Equipment specially designed for laboratory use; or

e.Medical equipment.

Note 3: 6A003.b.4.b. does not control imaging cameras having any of the following characteristics:

a.A maximum frame rate equal to or less than 9 Hz;

b.Having all of the following:

1.Having a minimum horizontal or vertical Instantaneous-Field-of-View (IFOV) of at least 10 mrad/pixel (milliradians/pixel);

2.Incorporating a fixed focal-length lens that is not designed to be removed;

3.Not incorporating a «direct view» display, and

4.Having any of the following:

a.No facility to obtain a viewable image of the detected field-of-view, or

b.The camera is designed for a single kind of application and designed not to be user modified; or

c.Where the camera is specially designed for installation into a civilian passenger land vehicle of less than three tonnes (gross vehicle weight) and having all of the following:

1.Is only operable when installed in any of the following:

a.The civilian passenger land vehicle for which it was intended; or

b.A specially designed, authorized maintenance test facility; and

2.Incorporates an active mechanism that forces the camera not to function when it is removed from the vehicle for which it was intended.

Technical Notes:

1.Instantaneous Field of View (IFOV) specified in 6A003.b.4. Note 3.b. is the lesser figure of the Horizontal IFOV or the Vertical IFOV.

Horizontal IFOV = horizontal Field of View (FOV)/number of horizontal detector elements

Vertical IFOV = vertical Field of View (FOV)/number of vertical detector elements.

2.«Direct view» in 6A003.b.4. Note 3.b. refers to an imaging camera operating in the infrared spectrum that presents a visual image to a human observer using a near-to-eye micro display incorporating any light-security mechanism.

6A004Optics

a. Optical mirrors (reflectors), as follows:

1.«Deformable mirrors» having either continuous or multi-element surfaces, and specially designed components therefor, capable of dynamically repositioning portions of the surface of the mirror at rates exceeding 100 Hz;

2. Lightweight monolithic mirrors having an average «equivalent density» of less than 30 kg/m2 and a total mass exceeding 10 kg;

3. Lightweight «composite» or foam mirror structures having an average «equivalent density» of less than 30 kg/m2 and a total mass exceeding 2 kg;

4. Beam steering mirrors more than 100 mm in diameter or length of major axis, which maintain a flatness of lambda/2 or better (lambda is equal to 633 nm) having a control bandwidth exceeding 100 Hz.

b. Optical components made from zinc selenide (ZnSe) or zinc sulphide (ZnS) with transmission in the wavelength range exceeding 3000 nm but not exceeding 25000 nm and having any of the following:

1. Exceeding 100 cm3 in volume; or

2. Exceeding 80 mm in diameter or length of major axis and 20 mm in thickness (depth).

c.«Space-qualified» components for optical systems, as follows:

1. Lightweighted to less than 20 % «equivalent density» compared with a solid blank of the same aperture and thickness;

2. Raw substrates, processed substrates having surface coatings (single-layer or multi-layer, metallic or dielectric, conducting, semiconducting or insulating) or having protective films;

3. Segments or assemblies of mirrors designed to be assembled in space into an optical system with a collecting aperture equivalent to or larger than a single optic 1 m in diameter;

4. Manufactured from «composite» materials having a coefficient of linear thermal expansion equal to or less than 5 × 10-6 in any coordinate direction.

d. Optical control equipment, as follows:

1. Specially designed to maintain the surface figure or orientation of the «space-qualified» components specified in 6A004.c.1. or 6A004.c.3.;

2. Having steering, tracking, stabilisation or resonator alignment bandwidths equal to or more than 100 Hz and an accuracy of 10 μrad (microradians) or less;

3. Gimbals having all of the following:

a. A maximum slew exceeding 5°;

b. A bandwidth of 100 Hz or more;

c. Angular pointing errors of 200 μrad (microradians) or less; and

d. Having any of the following:

1. Exceeding 0,15 m but not exceeding 1 m in diameter or major axis length and capable of angular accelerations exceeding 2 rad (radians)/s2; or

2. Exceeding 1 m in diameter or major axis length and capable of angular accelerations exceeding 0,5 rad (radians)/s2;

4. Specially designed to maintain the alignment of phased array or phased segment mirror systems consisting of mirrors with a segment diameter or major axis length of 1 m or more.

e.«Aspheric optical elements» having all of the following characteristics:

1. The largest dimension of the optical-aperture is greater than 400 mm;

2. The surface roughness is less than 1 nm (rms) for sampling lengths equal to or greater than 1 mm; and

3. The coefficient of linear thermal expansion's absolute magnitude is less than 3 × 10-6/K at 25 °C.

Technical Notes:

1.An «aspheric optical element» is any element used in an optical system whose imaging surface or surfaces are designed to depart from the shape of an ideal sphere.

2.Manufacturers are not required to measure the surface roughness listed in 6A004.e.2. unless the optical element was designed or manufactured with the intent to meet, or exceed, the control parameter.

Note: 6A004.e. does not control aspheric optical elements having any of the following:

a.A largest optical-aperture dimension less than 1 m and a focal length to aperture ratio equal to or greater than 4,5:1;

b.A largest optical-aperture dimension equal to or greater than 1 m and a focal length to aperture ratio equal to or greater than 7:1;

c.Being designed as Fresnel, flyeye, stripe, prism or diffractive optical elements;

d.Being fabricated from borosilicate glass having a coefficient of linear thermal expansion greater than 2,5 × 10 -6 /K at 25 °C; or

e.Being an x-ray optical element having inner mirror capabilities (e.g. tube-type mirrors).

N.B.: For aspheric optical elements specially designed for lithography equipment, see 3B001.

6A005«Lasers», other than those specified in 0B001.g.5. or 0B001.h.6., components and optical equipment, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 6A205.

Note 1: Pulsed «lasers» include those that run in a continuous wave (CW) mode with pulses superimposed.

Note 2: Pulse-excited «lasers» include those that run in a continuously excited mode with pulse excitation superimposed.

Note 3: The control status of Raman «lasers» is determined by the parameters of the pumping source «lasers». The pumping source «lasers» can be any of the «lasers» described below.

a. Gas «lasers», as follows:

1. Excimer «lasers», having any of the following:

a. An output wavelength not exceeding 150 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse; or

2. An average output power exceeding 1 W;

b. An output wavelength exceeding 150 nm but not exceeding 190 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse; or

2. An average output power exceeding 120 W;

c. An output wavelength exceeding 190 nm but not exceeding 360 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 10 J per pulse; or

2. An average output power exceeding 500 W; or

d. An output wavelength exceeding 360 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse; or

2. An average output power exceeding 30 W;

N.B.: For excimer «lasers» specially designed for lithography equipment, see 3B001

2. Metal vapour «lasers», as follows:

a. Copper (Cu) «lasers» having an average output power exceeding 20 W;

b. Gold (Au) «lasers» having an average output power exceeding 5 W;

c. Sodium (Na) «lasers» having an output power exceeding 5 W;

d. Barium (Ba) «lasers» having an average output power exceeding 2 W;

3. Carbon monoxide (CO) «lasers» having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 5 kW; or

b. An average or CW output power exceeding 5 kW;

4. Carbon dioxide (CO2) «lasers» having any of the following:

a. A CW output power exceeding 15 kW;

b. A pulsed output having a «pulse duration» exceeding 10 μs and having any of the following:

1. An average output power exceeding 10 kW; or

2. A pulsed «peak power» exceeding 100 kW; or

c. A pulsed output having a «pulse duration» equal to or less than 10 μs; and having any of the following:

1. A pulse energy exceeding 5 J per pulse; or

2. An average output power exceeding 2,5 kW;

5.«Chemical lasers», as follows:

a. Hydrogen Fluoride (HF) «lasers»;

b. Deuterium Fluoride (DF) «lasers»;

c.«Transfer lasers», as follows:

1. Oxygen Iodine (O2-I) «lasers»;

2. Deuterium Fluoride-Carbon dioxide (DF-CO2) «lasers»;

6. Krypton ion or argon ion «lasers» having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 50 W; or

b. An average or CW output power exceeding 50 W;

7. Other gas «lasers», having any of the following:

Note: 6A005.a.7. does not control nitrogen «lasers».

a. An output wavelength not exceeding 150 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 1 W; or

2. An average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;

b. An output wavelength exceeding 150 nm but not exceeding 800 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 30 W; or

2. An average or CW output power exceeding 30 W;

c. An output wavelength exceeding 800 nm but not exceeding 1400 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 0,25 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 10 W; or

2. An average or CW output power exceeding 10 W; or

d. An output wavelength exceeding 1400 nm and an average or CW output power exceeding 1 W.

b. Semiconductor «lasers», as follows:

1. Individual single-transverse mode semiconductor «lasers», having any of the following:

a. A wavelength equal to or less than 1510 nm, and having an average or CW output power exceeding 1,5 W; or

b. A wavelength greater than 1510 nm, and having an average or CW output power exceeding 500 mW;

2. Individual, multiple-transverse mode semiconductor «lasers», having any of the following:

a. A wavelength of less than 1400 nm, and having an average or CW output power exceeding 10 W;

b. A wavelength equal to or greater than 1400 nm and less than 1900 nm, and having an average or CW output power exceeding 2,5 W; or

c. A wavelength equal to or greater than 1900 nm and having an average or CW output power exceeding 1 W.

3. Individual semiconductor «laser» arrays, having any of the following:

a. A wavelength of less than 1400 nm, and having an average or CW output power exceeding 80 W;

b. A wavelength equal to or greater than 1400 nm and less than 1900 nm, and having an average or CW output power exceeding 25 W; or

c. A wavelength equal to or greater than 1900 nm, and having an average or CW output power exceeding 10 W.

4. Array stacks of semiconductor «lasers» containing at least one array that is controlled under 6A005.b.3.

Technical Notes:

1.Semiconductor «lasers» are commonly called «laser» diodes.

2.An «array» consists of multiple semiconductor «laser» emitters fabricated as a single chip so that the centres of the emitted light beams are on parallel paths.

3.An «array stack» is fabricated by stacking, or otherwise assembling, «arrays» so that the centres of the emitted light beams are on parallel paths.

Note 1: 6A005.b. includes semiconductor «lasers» having optical output connectors (e.g. fibre optic pigtails).

Note 2: The control status of semiconductor «lasers» specially designed for other equipment is determined by the control status of the other equipment.

c. Solid state «lasers», as follows:

1.«Tunable»«lasers» having any of the following:

Note: 6A005.c.1. includes titanium — sapphire (Ti: Al 2 O 3 ), thulium — YAG (Tm: YAG), thulium — YSGG (Tm: YSGG), alexandrite (Cr: BeAl 2 O 4 ) and colour centre «lasers».

a. An output wavelength less than 600 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 1 W; or

2. An average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;

b. An output wavelength of 600 nm or more but not exceeding 1400 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 1 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 20 W; or

2. An average or CW output power exceeding 20 W; or

c. An output wavelength exceeding 1400 nm and having any of the following:

1. An output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 1 W; or

2. An average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;

2. Non-«tunable»«lasers», as follows:

Note: 6A005.c.2. includes atomic transition solid state «lasers».

a. Neodymium glass «lasers», as follows:

1.«Q-switched lasers» having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 20 J but not exceeding 50 J per pulse and an average output power exceeding 10 W; or

b. An output energy exceeding 50 J per pulse;

2. Non-«Q-switched lasers» having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 50 J but not exceeding 100 J per pulse and an average output power exceeding 20 W; or

b. An output energy exceeding 100 J per pulse;

b. Neodymium-doped (other than glass) «lasers», having an output wavelength exceeding 1000 nm but not exceeding 1100 nm, as follows:

N.B.: For neodymium-doped (other than glass) «lasers» having an output wavelength not exceeding 1000 nm or exceeding 1100 nm, see 6A005.c.2.c.

1. Pulse-excited, mode-locked, «Q-switched lasers» having a «pulse duration» of less than 1 ns and having any of the following:

a. A «peak power» exceeding 5 GW;

b. An average output power exceeding 10 W; or

c. A pulsed energy exceeding 0,1 J;

2. Pulse-excited, «Q-switched lasers» having a «pulse duration» equal to or more than 1 ns, and having any of the following:

a. A single-transverse mode output having:

1. A «peak power» exceeding 100 MW;

2. An average output power exceeding 20 W; or

3. A pulsed energy exceeding 2 J; or

b. A multiple-transverse mode output having:

1. A «peak power» exceeding 400 MW;

2. An average output power exceeding 2 kW; or

3. A pulsed energy exceeding 2 J;

3. Pulse-excited, non-«Q-switched lasers», having:

a. A single-transverse mode output having:

1. A «peak power» exceeding 500 kW; or

2. An average output power exceeding 150 W; or

b. A multiple-transverse mode output having:

1. A «peak power» exceeding 1 MW; or

2. An average power exceeding 2 kW;

4. Continuously excited «lasers» having:

a. A single-transverse mode output having:

1. A «peak power» exceeding 500 kW; or

2. An average or CW output power exceeding 150 W; or

b. A multiple-transverse mode output having:

1. A «peak power» exceeding 1 MW; or

2. An average or CW output power exceeding 2 kW;

c. Other non-«tunable»«lasers», having any of the following:

1. A wavelength less than 150 nm and having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 1 W; or

b. An average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;

2. A wavelength of 150 nm or more but not exceeding 800 nm and having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 30 W; or

b. An average or CW output power exceeding 30 W;

3. A wavelength exceeding 800 nm but not exceeding 1400 nm, as follows:

a.«Q-switched lasers» having:

1. An output energy exceeding 0,5 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 50 W; or

2. An average output power exceeding:

a. 10 W for single-transverse mode «lasers»;

b. 30 W for multiple-transverse mode «lasers»;

b. Non-«Q-switched lasers» having:

1. An output energy exceeding 2 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 50 W; or

2. An average or CW output power exceeding 50 W; or

4. A wavelength exceeding 1400 nm and having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 1 W; or

b. An average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;

d. Dye and other liquid «lasers», having any of the following:

1. A wavelength less than 150 nm and:

a. An output energy exceeding 50 mJ per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 1 W; or

b. An average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;

2. A wavelength of 150 nm or more but not exceeding 800 nm and having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 1,5 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 20 W;

b. An average or CW output power exceeding 20 W; or

c. A pulsed single longitudinal mode oscillator having an average output power exceeding 1 W and a repetition rate exceeding 1 kHz if the «pulse duration» is less than 100 ns;

3. A wavelength exceeding 800 nm but not exceeding 1400 nm and having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 0,5 J per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 10 W; or

b. An average or CW output power exceeding 10 W; or

4. A wavelength exceeding 1400 nm and having any of the following:

a. An output energy exceeding 100 mJ per pulse and a pulsed «peak power» exceeding 1 W; or

b. An average or CW output power exceeding 1 W;

e. Components, as follows:

1. Mirrors cooled either by «active cooling» or by heat pipe cooling;

Technical Note:

«Active cooling» is a cooling technique for optical components using flowing fluids within the subsurface (nominally less than 1 mm below the optical surface) of the optical component to remove heat from the optic.

2. Optical mirrors or transmissive or partially transmissive optical or electro-optical components specially designed for use with controlled «lasers»;

f. Optical equipment, as follows:

N.B.: For shared aperture optical elements, capable of operating in «Super-High Power Laser» («SHPL») applications, see the Military Goods Lists.

1. Dynamic wavefront (phase) measuring equipment capable of mapping at least 50 positions on a beam wavefront having any of the following:

a. Frame rates equal to or more than 100 Hz and phase discrimination of at least 5 % of the beam's wavelength; or

b. Frame rates equal to or more than 1000 Hz and phase discrimination of at least 20 % of the beam's wavelength;

2.«Laser» diagnostic equipment capable of measuring «SHPL» system angular beam steering errors of equal to or less than 10 μrad;

3. Optical equipment and components specially designed for a phased-array «SHPL» system for coherent beam combination to an accuracy of lambda/10 at the designed wavelength, or 0,1 μm, whichever is the smaller;

4. Projection telescopes specially designed for use with «SHPL» systems.

6A006«Magnetometers», «magnetic gradiometers», «intrinsic magnetic gradiometers» underwater electric field sensors and compensation systems, and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

Note: 6A006 does not control instruments specially designed for fishery applications or biomagnetic measurements for medical diagnostics.

a.«Magnetometers» and subsystems as follows:

1. Using «superconductive» (SQUID) «technology» and having any of the following characteristics:

a. SQUID systems designed for stationary operation, without specially designed subsystems designed to reduce in-motion noise, and having a «noise level» (sensitivity) equal to or lower (better) than 50 fT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz; or

b. SQUID systems having an in-motion-magntometer «noise level» (sensitivity) lower (better) than 20 pT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz and specially designed to reduce in-motion noise;

2. Using optically pumped or nuclear precession (proton/Overhauser) «technology» having a «noise level» (sensitivity) lower (better) than 20 pT (rms) per square root Hz;

3. Using fluxgate «technology» having a «noise level» (sensitivity) equal to or lower (better) than 10 pT (rms) per square root Hz at a frequency of 1 Hz;

4. Induction coil «magnetometers» having a «noise level» (sensitivity) lower (better) than any of the following:

a. 0.05 nT (rms) per square root Hz at frequencies of less than 1 Hz;

b. 1 × 10-3 nT (rms) per square root Hz at frequencies of 1 Hz or more but not exceeding 10 Hz; or

c. 1 × 10-4 nT (rms) per square root Hz at frequencies exceeding 10 Hz;

5. Fibre optic «magnetometers» having a «noise level» (sensitivity) lower (better) than 1 nT (rms) per square root Hz;

b. Underwater electric field sensors having a «noise level» (sensitivity) lower (better) than 8 nanovolt per metre per square root Hz when measured at 1 Hz;

c.«Magnetic gradiometers», as follows:

1.«Magnetic gradiometers» using multiple «magnetometers» specified in 6A006.a.;

2. Fibre optic «intrinsic magnetic gradiometers» having a magnetic gradient field «noise level» (sensitivity) lower (better) than 0,3 nT/m rms per square root Hz;

3.«Intrinsic magnetic gradiometers», using «technology» other than fibre-optic «technology», having a magnetic gradient field «noise level» (sensitivity) lower (better) than 0,015 nT/m rms per square root Hz;

d. Compensation systems for magnetic or underwater electric field sensors resulting in a performance equal to or better than the control parameters of 6A006.a., 6A006.b. or 6A006.c.

6A007Gravity meters (gravimeters) and gravity gradiometers, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 6A107.

a. Gravity meters designed or modified for ground use having a static accuracy of less (better) than 10 μgal;

Note: 6A007.a. does not control ground gravity meters of the quartz element (Worden) type.

b. Gravity meters designed for mobile platforms, having all of the following:

1. A static accuracy of less (better) than 0,7 mgal; and

2. An in-service (operational) accuracy of less (better) than 0,7 mgal having a time-to-steady-state registration of less than 2 minutes under any combination of attendant corrective compensations and motional influences;

c. Gravity gradiometers.

6A008Radar systems, equipment and assemblies having any of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 6A108.

Note: 6A008 does not control:

a.Secondary surveillance radar (SSR);

b.Car radar designed for collision prevention;

c.Displays or monitors used for air traffic control (ATC) having no more than 12 resolvable elements per mm;

d.Meteorological (weather) radar.

a. Operating at frequencies from 40 GHz to 230 GHz and having an average output power exceeding 100 mW;

b. Having a tunable bandwidth exceeding ± 6,25 % of the «centre operating frequency»;

Technical Note:

The «centre operating frequency» equals one half of the sum of the highest plus the lowest specified operating frequencies.

c. Capable of operating simultaneously on more than two carrier frequencies;

d. Capable of operating in synthetic aperture (SAR), inverse synthetic aperture (ISAR) radar mode, or sidelooking airborne (SLAR) radar mode;

e. Incorporating «electronically steerable phased array antennae»;

f. Capable of heightfinding non-cooperative targets;

Note: 6A008.f. does not control precision approach radar (PAR) equipment conforming to ICAO standards.

g. Specially designed for airborne (balloon or airframe mounted) operation and having Doppler «signal processing» for the detection of moving targets;

h. Employing processing of radar signals using any of the following:

1.«Radar spread spectrum» techniques; or

2.«Radar frequency agility» techniques;

i. Providing ground-based operation with a maximum «instrumented range» exceeding 185 km;

Note: 6A008.i. does not control:

a.Fishing ground surveillance radar;

b.Ground radar equipment specially designed for enroute air traffic control, provided that all the following conditions are met:

1.It has a maximum «instrumented range» of 500 km or less;

2.It is configured so that radar target data can be transmitted only one way from the radar site to one or more civil ATC centres;

3.It contains no provisions for remote control of the radar scan rate from the enroute ATC centre; and

4.It is to be permanently installed;

c.Weather balloon tracking radars.

j. Being «laser» radar or Light Detection and Ranging (LIDAR) equipment, having any of the following:

1.«Space-qualified»; or

2. Employing coherent heterodyne or homodyne detection techniques and having an angular resolution of less (better) than 20 μrad (microradians);

Note: 6A008.j. does not control LIDAR equipment specially designed for surveying or for meteorological observation.

k. Having «signal processing» sub-systems using «pulse compression», with any of the following:

1. A «pulse compression» ratio exceeding 150; or

2. A pulse width of less than 200 ns; or

l. Having data processing sub-systems with any of the following:

1.«Automatic target tracking» providing, at any antenna rotation, the predicted target position beyond the time of the next antenna beam passage;

Note: 6A008.l.1. does not control conflict alert capability in ATC systems, or marine or harbour radar.

2. Calculation of target velocity from primary radar having non-periodic (variable) scanning rates;

3. Processing for automatic pattern recognition (feature extraction) and comparison with target characteristic data bases (waveforms or imagery) to identify or classify targets; or

4. Superposition and correlation, or fusion, of target data from two or more «geographically dispersed» and «interconnected radar sensors» to enhance and discriminate targets.

Note: 6A008.l.4. does not control systems, equipment and assemblies used for marine traffic control.

6A102Radiation hardened «detectors», other than those specified in 6A002, specially designed or modified for protecting against nuclear effects (e.g. electromagnetic pulse (EMP), X-rays, combined blast and thermal effects) and usable for «missiles», designed or rated to withstand radiation levels which meet or exceed a total irradiation dose of 5 × 105 rads (silicon).

Technical Note:

In 6A102, a «detector» is defined as a mechanical, electrical, optical or chemical device that automatically identifies and records, or registers a stimulus such as an environmental change in pressure or temperature, an electrical or electromagnetic signal or radiation from a radioactive material. This includes devices that sense by one time operation or failure.

6A107Gravity meters (gravimeters) and components for gravity meters and gravity gradiometers, as follows:

a. Gravity meters, other than those specified in 6A007.b., designed or modified for airborne or marine use, and having a static or operational accuracy of 7 × 10-6 m/s2 (0,7 milligal) or less (better), and having a time-to-steady-state registration of two minutes or less;

b. Specially designed components for gravity meters specified in 6A007.b or 6A107.a. and gravity gradiometers specified in 6A007.c.

6A108Radar systems and tracking systems, other than those specified in entry 6A008, as follows:

a. Radar and laser radar systems designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;

Note: 6A108.a. includes the following:

a.Terrain contour mapping equipment;

b.Imaging sensor equipment;

c.Scene mapping and correlation (both digital and analogue) equipment;

d.Doppler navigation radar equipment.

b. Precision tracking systems, usable for «missiles», as follows:

1. Tracking systems which use a code translator in conjunction with either surface or airborne references or navigation satellite systems to provide real-time measurements of in-flight position and velocity;

2. Range instrumentation radars including associated optical/infrared trackers with all of the following capabilities:

a. Angular resolution better than 3 milliradians (0,5 mils);

b. Range of 30 km or greater with a range resolution better than 10 m rms;

c. Velocity resolution better than 3 m/s.

Technical Note:

In 6A108.b. «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

6A202Photomultiplier tubes having both of the following characteristics:

a. Photocathode area of greater than 20 cm2; and

b. Anode pulse rise time of less than 1 ns.

6A203Cameras and components, other than those specified in 6A003, as follows:

a. Mechanical rotating mirror cameras, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:

1. Framing cameras with recording rates greater than 225000 frames per second;

2. Streak cameras with writing speeds greater than 0,5 mm per microsecond;

Note: In 6A203.a. components of such cameras include their synchronizing electronics units and rotor assemblies consisting of turbines, mirrors and bearings.

b. Electronic streak cameras, electronic framing cameras, tubes and devices, as follows:

1. Electronic streak cameras capable of 50 ns or less time resolution;

2. Streak tubes for cameras specified in 6A203.b.1.;

3. Electronic (or electronically shuttered) framing cameras capable of 50 ns or less frame exposure time;

4. Framing tubes and solid-state imaging devices for use with cameras specified in 6A203.b.3., as follows:

a. Proximity focused image intensifier tubes having the photocathode deposited on a transparent conductive coating to decrease photocathode sheet resistance;

b. Gate silicon intensifier target (SIT) videcon tubes, where a fast system allows gating the photoelectrons from the photocathode before they impinge on the SIT plate;

c. Kerr or Pockels cell electro-optical shuttering;

d. Other framing tubes and solid-state imaging devices having a fast-image gating time of less than 50 ns specially designed for cameras specified in 6A203.b.3.;

c. Radiation-hardened TV cameras, or lenses therefor, specially designed or rated as radiation hardened to withstand a total radiation dose greater than 50 × 103 Gy(silicon) (5 × 106 rad (silicon)) without operational degradation.

Technical Note:

The term Gy(silicon) refers to the energy in Joules per kilogram absorbed by an unshielded silicon sample when exposed to ionising radiation.

6A205«Lasers», «laser» amplifiers and oscillators, other than those specified in 0B001.g.5., 0B001.h.6. and 6A005; as follows:

a. Argon ion «lasers» having both of the following characteristics:

1. Operating at wavelengths between 400 nm and 515 nm; and

2. An average output power greater than 40 W;

b. Tunable pulsed single-mode dye laser oscillators having all of the following characteristics:

1. Operating at wavelengths between 300 nm and 800 nm;

2. An average output power greater than 1 W;

3. A repetition rate greater than 1 kHz; and

4. Pulse width less than 100 ns;

c. Tunable pulsed dye laser amplifiers and oscillators, having all of the following characteristics:

1. Operating at wavelengths between 300 nm and 800 nm;

2. An average output power greater than 30 W;

3. A repetition rate greater than 1 kHz; and

4. Pulse width less than 100 ns;

Note: 6A205.c. does not control single mode oscillators;

d. Pulsed carbon dioxide «lasers» having all of the following characteristics:

1. Operating at wavelengths between 9000 nm and 11000 nm;

2. A repetition rate greater than 250 Hz;

3. An average output power greater than 500 W; and

4. Pulse width of less than 200 ns;

e. Para-hydrogen Raman shifters designed to operate at 16 micrometre output wavelength and at a repetition rate greater than 250 Hz;

f. Pulse-excited, Q-switched neodymium-doped (other than glass) «lasers», having all of the following characteristics:

1. An output wavelength exceeding 1000 nm but not exceeding 1100 nm;

2. A pulse duration equal to or more than 1 ns; and

3. A multiple-transverse mode output having an average power exceeding 50 W.

6A225Velocity interferometers for measuring velocities exceeding 1 km/s during time intervals of less than 10 microseconds.

Note: 6A225 includes velocity interferometers such as VISARs (Velocity interferometer systems for any reflector) and DLIs (Doppler laser interferometers).

6A226Pressure sensors, as follows:

a. Manganin gauges for pressures greater than 10 GPa;

b. Quartz pressure transducers for pressures greater than 10 GPa.

6BTest, Inspection and Production Equipment

6B004Optical equipment, as follows:

a. Equipment for measuring absolute reflectance to an accuracy of ± 0,1 % of the reflectance value;

b. Equipment other than optical surface scattering measurement equipment, having an unobscured aperture of more than 10 cm, specially designed for the non-contact optical measurement of a non-planar optical surface figure (profile) to an «accuracy» of 2 nm or less (better) against the required profile.

Note: 6B004 does not control microscopes.

6B007Equipment to produce, align and calibrate land-based gravity meters with a static accuracy of better than 0,1 mgal.

6B008Pulse radar cross-section measurement systems having transmit pulse widths of 100 ns or less and specially designed components therefor.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 6B108.

6B108Systems, other than those specified in 6B008, specially designed for radar cross section measurement usable for «missiles» and their subsystems.

6CMaterials

6C002Optical sensor materials, as follows:

a. Elemental tellurium (Te) of purity levels of 99,9995 % or more;

b. Single crystals (including epitaxial wafers) of any of the following:

1. Cadmium zinc telluride (CdZnTe), with zinc content of less than 6 % by «mole fraction»;

2. Cadmium telluride (CdTe) of any purity level; or

3. Mercury cadmium telluride (HgCdTe) of any purity level.

Technical Note:

«Mole fraction» is defined as the ratio of moles of ZnTe to the sum of moles of CdTe and ZnTe present in the crystal.

6C004Optical materials, as follows:

a. Zinc selenide (ZnSe) and zinc sulphide (ZnS) «substrate blanks» produced by the chemical vapour deposition process, having any of the following:

1. A volume greater than 100 cm3; or

2. A diameter greater than 80 mm having a thickness of 20 mm or more;

b. Boules of the following electro-optic materials:

1. Potassium titanyl arsenate (KTA);

2. Silver gallium selenide (AgGaSe2);

3. Thallium arsenic selenide (Tl3AsSe3, also known as TAS);

c. Non-linear optical materials, having all of the following:

1. Third order susceptibility (chi 3) of 10-6 m2/V2 or more; and

2. A response time of less than 1 ms;

d.«Substrate blanks» of silicon carbide or beryllium beryllium (Be/Be) deposited materials exceeding 300 mm in diameter or major axis length;

e. Glass, including fused silica, phosphate glass, fluorophosphate glass, zirconium fluoride (ZrF4) and hafnium fluoride (HfF4), having all of the following:

1. A hydroxyl ion (OH-) concentration of less than 5 ppm;

2. Integrated metallic purity levels of less than 1 ppm; and

3. High homogeneity (index of refraction variance) less than 5 × 10-6;

f. Synthetically produced diamond material with an absorption of less than 10-5 cm-1 for wavelengths exceeding 200 nm but not exceeding 14000 nm.

6C005Synthetic crystalline «laser» host material in unfinished form, as follows:

a. Titanium doped sapphire;

b. Alexandrite.

6DSoftware

6D001«Software» specially designed for the «development» or «production» of equipment specified in 6A004, 6A005, 6A008 or 6B008.

6D002«Software» specially designed for the «use» of equipment specified in 6A002.b., 6A008 or 6B008.

6D003Other «software», as follows:

a.

1.«Software» specially designed for acoustic beam forming for the «real time processing» of acoustic data for passive reception using towed hydrophone arrays;

2.«Source code» for the «real time processing» of acoustic data for passive reception using towed hydrophone arrays;

3.«Software» specially designed for acoustic beam forming for «real time processing» of acoustic data for passive reception using bottom or bay cable systems;

4.«Source code» for «real time processing» of acoustic data for passive reception using bottom or bay cable systems;

b.

1.«Software» specially designed for magnetic and electric field compensation systems for magnetic sensors designed to operate on mobile platforms;

2.«Software» specially designed for magnetic and electric field anomaly detection on mobile platforms;

c.«Software» specially designed to correct motional influences of gravity meters or gravity gradiometers;

d.

1. Air Traffic Control «software» application «programmes» hosted on general purpose computers located at Air Traffic Control centres and capable of any of the following:

a. Processing and displaying more than 150 simultaneous «system tracks»; or

b. Accepting radar target data from more than four primary radars;

2.«Software» for the design or «production» of radomes which:

a. Are specially designed to protect the «electronically steerable phased array antennae» specified in 6A008.e.; and

b. Result in an antenna pattern having an «average side lobe level» more than 40 dB below the peak of the main beam level.

Technical Note:

«Average side lobe level» in 6D003.d.2.b. is measured over the entire array excluding the angular extent of the main beam and the first two side lobes on either side of the main beam.

6D102«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of goods specified in 6A108.

6D103«Software» which processes post-flight, recorded data, enabling determination of vehicle position throughout its flight path, specially designed or modified for «missiles».

Technical Note:

In 6D103 «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

6ETechnology

6E001«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» of equipment, materials or «software» specified in 6A, 6B, 6C or 6D.

6E002«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «production» of equipment or materials specified in 6A, 6B or 6C.

6E003Other «technology», as follows:

a.

1. Optical surface coating and treatment «technology»«required» to achieve uniformity of 99,5 % or better for optical coatings 500 mm or more in diameter or major axis length and with a total loss (absorption and scatter) of less than 5 × 10-3;

N.B.: See also 2E003.f.

2. Optical fabrication «technology» using single point diamond turning techniques to produce surface finish accuracies of better than 10 nm rms on non-planar surfaces exceeding 0,5 m2;

b.«Technology»«required» for the «development», «production» or «use» of specially designed diagnostic instruments or targets in test facilities for «SHPL» testing or testing or evaluation of materials irradiated by «SHPL» beams;

6E101«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment or «software» specified in 6A002, 6A007.b. and c., 6A008, 6A102, 6A107, 6A108, 6B108, 6D102 or 6D103.

Note: 6E101 only specifies «technology» for equipment specified in 6A008 when it is designed for airborne applications and is usable in «missiles».

6E201«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment specified in 6A003, 6A005.a.1.c., 6A005.a.2.a., 6A005.c.1.b., 6A005.c.2.c.2., 6A005.c.2.d.2.b., 6A202, 6A203, 6A205, 6A225 or 6A226.

CATEGORY 7

NAVIGATION AND AVIONICS

7ASystems, Equipment and Components

N.B.: For automatic pilots for underwater vehicles, see Category 8.

For radar, see Category 6.

7A001Linear accelerometers designed for use in inertial navigation or guidance systems and having any of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 7A101. For angular or rotational accelerometers, see 7A002.

a. A «bias»«stability» of less (better) than 130 micro g with respect to a fixed calibration value over a period of one year;

b. A «scale factor»«stability» of less (better) than 130 ppm with respect to a fixed calibration value over a period of one year; or

c. Specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 100 g.

7A002Gyros, and angular or rotational accelerometers, having any of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 7A102.

a. A «drift rate»«stability», when measured in a 1 g environment over a period of one month and with respect to a fixed calibration value, of:

1. Less (better) than 0,1° per hour when specified to function at linear acceleration levels below 12 g; or

2. Less (better) than 0,5° per hour when specified to function at linear acceleration levels from 12 g to 100 g inclusive; or

b. An angle random walk of less (better) than or equal to 0.0035° per square root hour; or

Note: 7A002.b. does not control spinning mass gyros (spinning mass gyros are gyros which use a continually rotating mass to sense angular motion).

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 7A002.b., «angle random walk» is the angular error buildup with time that is due to white noise in angular rate. (IEEE STD 528-2001)

c. Specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 100 g.

7A003Inertial Systems and specially designed components, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 7A103.

a. Inertial navigation systems (INS) (gimballed or strapdown) and inertial equipment designed for «aircraft», land vehicle, vessels (surface or underwater) or «spacecraft» for attitude, guidance or control, having any of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

1. Navigation error (free inertial) subsequent to normal alignment of 0,8 nautical mile per hour (nm/hr) «Circular Error Probable» (CEP) or less (better); or

2. Specified to function at linear acceleration levels exceeding 10 g;

b. Hybrid Inertial Navigation Systems embedded with Global Navigation Satellite Systems(s) (GNSS) or with «Data-Based Referenced Navigation» («DBRN») System(s) for attitude, guidance or control, subsequent to normal alignment, having an INS navigation position accuracy, after loss of GNSS or «DBRN» for a period of up to four minutes, of less (better) than 10 metres «Circular Error Probable» (CEP).

c. Inertial Equipment for Azimuth, Heading, or North Pointing having any of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

1. Designed to have an Azimuth, Heading, or North Pointing accuracy equal to, or less (better) than 6 arc minutes RMS at 45 degrees latitude; or

2. Designed to have a non-operating shock level of 900 g or greater at a duration of 1 msec, or greater.

Note 1: The parameters of 7A003.a. and 7A003.b. are applicable with any of the following environmental conditions:

1.Input random vibration with an overall magnitude of 7,7 g rms in the first half hour and a total test duration of one and one half hour per axis in each of the three perpendicular axes, when the random vibration meets the following:

a.A constant power spectral density (PSD) value of 0,04 g 2 /Hz over a frequency interval of 15 to 1000 Hz; and

b.The PSD attenuates with frequency from 0,04 g 2 /Hz to 0,01 g 2 /Hz over a frequency interval from 1000 to 2000 Hz;

2.A roll and yaw rate of equal to or more than +2,62 radian/s (150 deg/s); or

3.According to national standards equivalent to 1. or 2. above.

Note 2: 7A003 does not control inertial navigation systems which are certified for use on «civil aircraft» by civil authorities of a «participating state».

Note 3: 7A003.c.1. does not control theodolite systems incorporating inertial equipment specially designed for civil surveying purposes.

Technical Notes:

1.7A003.b. refers to systems in which an INS and other independent navigation aids are built into a single unit (embedded) in order to achieve improved performance.

2.«Circular Error Probable» (CEP) — In a circular normal distribution, the radius of the circle containing 50 percent of the individual measurements being made, or the radius of the circle within which there is a 50 percent probability of being located.

7A004Gyro-astro compasses, and other devices which derive position or orientation by means of automatically tracking celestial bodies or satellites, with an azimuth accuracy of equal to or less (better) than 5 seconds of arc.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 7A104.

7A005Global navigation satellite systems (i.e. GPS or GLONASS) receiving equipment having any of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 7A105.

a. Employing decryption; or

b. A null-steerable antenna.

7A006Airborne altimeters operating at frequencies other than 4,2 to 4,4 GHz inclusive, having any of the following characteristics:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 7A106.

a.«Power management»; or

b. Using phase shift key modulation.

7A101Accelerometers, other than those specified in 7A001, as follows, and specially designed components therefor:

a. Linear accelerometers, designed for use in inertial navigation systems or in guidance systems of all types, usable in «missiles», having all the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor;

1. A «bias»«repeatability» of less (better) than 1250 micro g; and

2. A «scale factor»«repeatability» of less (better) than 1250 ppm;

Note: 7A101.a. does not specify accelerometers which are specially designed and developed as MWD (Measurement While Drilling) Sensors for use in downhole well service operations.

Technical Notes:

1.In 7A101.a. «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km;

2.In 7A101.a. the measurement of «bias» and «scale factor» refers to a one sigma standard deviation with respect to a fixed calibration over a period of one year;

3.In 7A101.a. «repeatability» is defined according to IEEE standard 528-2001 as the closeness of agreement among repeated measurements of the same variable under the same operating conditions when changes in conditions or non-operating periods occur between measurements.

b. Continuous output accelerometers specified to function at acceleration levels exceeding 100 g.

7A102All types of gyros, other than those specified in 7A002, usable in «missiles», with a rated «drift rate»«stability» of less than 0,5° (1 sigma or rms) per hour in a 1 g environment and specially designed components therefor.

Technical Note:

In 7A102 «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

7A103Instrumentation, navigation equipment and systems, other than those specified in 7A003, as follows; and specially designed components therefor:

a. Inertial or other equipment using accelerometers specified in 7A001 or 7A101 or gyros specified in 7A002 or 7A102 and systems incorporating such equipment;

Note: 7A103.a. does not specify equipment containing accelerometers specified in 7A001 where such accelerometers are specially designed and developed as MWD (Measurement While Drilling) sensors for use in downhole well services operations.

b. Integrated flight instrument systems, which include gyrostabilisers or automatic pilots, designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;

c.«Integrated navigation systems», designed or modified «missiles» and capable of providing a navigational accuracy of 200 m Circle of Equal Probability (CEP) or less.

Technical Notes:

1. An «integrated navigation system» typically incorporates the following components:

a. An inertial measurement device (e.g., an attitude and heading reference system, inertial reference unit, or inertial navigation system);

b. One or more external sensors used to update the position and/or velocity, either periodically or continuously throughout the flight (e.g., satellite navigation receiver, radar altimeter, and/or Doppler radar); and

c. Integration hardware and software;

2. In 7A103.c. «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

7A104Gyro-astro compasses and other devices, other than those specified in 7A004, which derive position or orientation by means of automatically tracking celestial bodies or satellites and specially designed components therefor.

7A105Receiving equipment for Global Navigation Satellite Systems (GNSS; e.g. GPS, GLONASS, or Galileo), having any of the following characteristics, and specially designed components therefor:

a. Designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104; or

b. Designed or modified for airborne applications and having any of the following:

1. Capable of providing navigation information at speeds in excess of 600 m/s;

2. Employing decryption, designed or modified for military or governmental services, to gain access to GNSS secured signal/data; or

3. Being specially designed to employ anti-jam features (e.g. null steering antenna or electronically steerable antenna) to function in an environment of active or passive countermeasures.

Note: 7A105.b.2. and 7A105.b.3. do not control equipment designed for commercial, civil or «Safety of Life» (e.g., data integrity, flight safety) GNSS services.

7A106Altimeters, other than those specified in 7A006, of radar or laser radar type, designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

7A115Passive sensors for determining bearing to specific electromagnetic source (direction finding equipment) or terrain characteristics, designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

Note: 7A115 includes sensors for the following equipment:

a.Terrain contour mapping equipment;

b.Imaging sensor equipment (both active and passive);

c.Passive interferometer equipment.

7A116Flight control systems and servo valves, as follows; designed or modified for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

a. Hydraulic, mechanical, electro optical, or electro mechanical flight control systems (including fly-by-wire types);

b. Attitude control equipment;

c. Flight control servo valves designed or modified for the systems specified in 7A116.a. or 7A116.b., and designed or modified to operate in a vibration environment greater than 10 g rms between 20 Hz and 2 kHz.

7A117«Guidance sets», usable in «missiles» capable of achieving system accuracy of 3,33 % or less of the range (e.g., a «CEP» of 10 km or less at a range of 300 km).

7BTest, Inspection and Production Equipment

7B001Test, calibration or alignment equipment specially designed for equipment specified in 7A.

Note: 7B001 does not control test, calibration or alignment equipment for Maintenance Level I or Maintenance Level II.

Technical Notes:

1.Maintenance Level I

The failure of an inertial navigation unit is detected on the aircraft by indications from the control and display unit (CDU) or by the status message from the corresponding sub-system. By following the manufacturer's manual, the cause of the failure may be localised at the level of the malfunctioning line replaceable unit (LRU). The operator then removes the LRU and replaces it with a spare.

2.Maintenance Level II

The defective LRU is sent to the maintenance workshop (the manufacturer's or that of the operator responsible for level II maintenance). At the maintenance workshop, the malfunctioning LRU is tested by various appropriate means to verify and localise the defective shop replaceable assembly (SRA) module responsible for the failure. This SRA is removed and replaced by an operative spare. The defective SRA (or possibly the complete LRU) is then shipped to the manufacturer.

N.B.: Maintenance Level II does not include the removal of controlled accelerometers or gyro sensors from the SRA.

7B002Equipment, as follows, specially designed to characterize mirrors for ring «laser» gyros:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 7B102.

a. Scatterometers having a measurement accuracy of 10 ppm or less (better);

b. Profilometers having a measurement accuracy of 0,5 nm (5 angstrom) or less (better).

7B003Equipment specially designed for the «production» of equipment specified in 7A.

Note: 7B003 includes:

a.Gyro tuning test stations;

b.Gyro dynamic balance stations;

c.Gyro run-in/motor test stations;

d.Gyro evacuation and fill stations;

e.Centrifuge fixtures for gyro bearings;

f.Accelerometer axis align stations.

7B102Reflectometers specially designed to characterise mirrors, for «laser» gyros, having a measurement accuracy of 50 ppm or less (better).

7B103«Production facilities» and «production equipment» as follows:

a.«Production facilities» specially designed for equipment specified in 7A117;

b. Production equipment, and other test, calibration and alignment equipment, other than that specified in 7B001 to 7B003, designed or modified to be used with equipment specified in 7A.

7CMaterials

None.

7DSoftware

7D001«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development» or «production» of equipment specified in 7A. or 7B.

7D002«Source code» for the «use» of any inertial navigation equipment, including inertial equipment not controlled by 7A003 or 7A004, or Attitude and Heading Reference Systems (AHRS).

Note: 7D002 does not control «source code» for the «use» of gimballed AHRS.

Technical Note:

AHRS generally differ from inertial navigation systems (INS) in that an AHRS provides attitude and heading information and normally does not provide the acceleration, velocity and position information associated with an INS.

7D003Other «Software», as follows:

a.«Software» specially designed or modified to improve the operational performance or reduce the navigational error of systems to the levels specified in 7A003 or 7A004;

b.«Source code» for hybrid integrated systems which improves the operational performance or reduces the navigational error of systems to the level specified in 7A003 by continuously combining inertial data with any of the following:

1. Doppler radar velocity data;

2. Global navigation satellite systems (i.e., GPS or GLONASS) reference data; or

3. Data from «Data-Based Referenced Navigation» («DBRN») systems;

c.«Source code» for integrated avionics or mission systems which combine sensor data and employ «expert systems»;

d.«Source code» for the «development» of any of the following:

1. Digital flight management systems for «total control of flight»;

2. Integrated propulsion and flight control systems;

3. Fly-by-wire or fly-by-light control systems;

4. Fault-tolerant or self-reconfiguring «active flight control systems»;

5. Airborne automatic direction finding equipment;

6. Air data systems based on surface static data; or

7. Raster-type head-up displays or three dimensional displays;

e. Computer-aided-design (CAD) «software» specially designed for the «development» of «active flight control systems», helicopter multi-axis fly-by-wire or fly-by-light controllers or helicopter «circulation controlled anti-torque or circulation-controlled direction control systems» whose «technology» is specified in 7E004.b., 7E004.c.1. or 7E004.c.2.

7D101«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of equipment specified in 7A001 to 7A006, 7A101 to 7A106, 7A115, 7A116.a., 7A116.b., 7B001, 7B002, 7B003, 7B102 or 7B103.

7D102Integration«software» as follows:

a. Integration «software» for the equipment specified in 7A103.b.;

b. Integration «software» specially designed for the equipment specified in 7A003 or 7A103.a.;

c. Integration «software» designed or modified for the equipment specified in 7A103.c.

Note: A common form of integration «Software» employs Kalman filtering.

7D103«Software» specially designed for modelling or simulation of the «guidance sets» specified in 7A117 or for their design integration with the space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

Note:«Software» specified in 7D103 remains controlled when combined with specially designed hardware specified in 4A102.

7ETechnology

7E001«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» of equipment or «software» specified in 7A, 7B or 7D.

7E002«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «production» of equipment specified in 7A or 7B.

7E003«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the repair, refurbishing or overhaul of equipment specified in 7A001 to 7A004.

Note: 7E003 does not control maintenance «technology» directly associated with calibration, removal or replacement of damaged or unserviceable LRUs and SRAs of a «civil aircraft» as described in Maintenance Level I or Maintenance Level II.

N.B.: See Technical Notes to 7B001.

7E004Other «technology», as follows:

a.«Technology» for the «development» or «production» of:

1. Airborne automatic direction finding equipment operating at frequencies exceeding 5 MHz;

2. Air data systems based on surface static data only, i.e., which dispense with conventional air data probes;

3. Raster-type head-up displays or three dimensional displays for «aircraft»;

4. Inertial navigation systems or gyro-astro compasses containing accelerometers or gyros specified in 7A001 or 7A002;

5. Electric actuators (i.e., electromechanical, electrohydrostatic and integrated actuator package) specially designed for «primary flight control»;

6.«Flight control optical sensor array» specially designed for implementing «active flight control systems»;

b.«Development»«technology», as follows, for «active flight control systems» (including fly-by-wire or fly-by-light):

1. Configuration design for interconnecting multiple microelectronic processing elements (on-board computers) to achieve «real time processing» for control law implementation;

2. Control law compensation for sensor location or dynamic airframe loads, i.e., compensation for sensor vibration environment or for variation of sensor location from the centre of gravity;

3. Electronic management of data redundancy or systems redundancy for fault detection, fault tolerance, fault isolation or reconfiguration;

Note: 7E004.b.3. does not control «technology» for the design of physical redundancy.

4. Flight controls which permit inflight reconfiguration of force and moment controls for real time autonomous air vehicle control;

5. Integration of digital flight control, navigation and propulsion control data into a digital flight management system for «total control of flight»;

Note: 7E004.b.5. does not control:

a.«Development»«technology» for integration of digital flight control, navigation and propulsion control data into a digital flight management system for «flight path optimisation»;

b.«Development»«technology» for «aircraft» flight instrument systems integrated solely for VOR, DME, ILS or MLS navigation or approaches.

6. Full authority digital flight control or multisensor mission management systems employing «expert systems»;

N.B.: For «technology» for Full Authority Digital Engine Control («FADEC»), see 9E003.a.9.

c.«Technology» for the «development» of helicopter systems, as follows:

1. Multi-axis fly-by-wire or fly-by-light controllers which combine the functions of at least two of the following into one controlling element:

a. Collective controls;

b. Cyclic controls;

c. Yaw controls;

2.«Circulation-controlled anti-torque or circulation-controlled directional control systems»;

3. Rotor blades incorporating «variable geometry airfoils» for use in systems using individual blade control.

7E101«Technology», according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment specified in 7A001 to 7A006, 7A101 to 7A106, 7A115 to 7A117, 7B001, 7B002, 7B003, 7B102, 7B103, 7D101 to 7D103.

7E102«Technology» for protection of avionics and electrical subsystems against electromagnetic pulse (EMP) and electromagnetic interference (EMI) hazards, from external sources, as follows:

a. Design «technology» for shielding systems;

b. Design «technology» for the configuration of hardened electrical circuits and subsystems;

c. Design «technology» for the determination of hardening criteria of 7E102.a. and 7E102.b.

7E104«Technology» for the integration of the flight control, guidance, and propulsion data into a flight management system for optimisation of rocket system trajectory.

CATEGORY 8

MARINE

8ASystems, Equipment and Components

8A001Submersible vehicles and surface vessels, as follows:

Note: For the control status of equipment for submersible vehicles, see:

Category 5, Part 2 «Information Security» for encrypted communication equipment;

Category 6 for sensors;

Categories 7 and 8 for navigation equipment;

Category 8A for underwater equipment.

a. Manned, tethered submersible vehicles designed to operate at depths exceeding 1000 m;

b. Manned, untethered submersible vehicles, having any of the following:

1. Designed to «operate autonomously» and having a lifting capacity of all the following:

a. 10 % or more of their weight in air; and

b. 15 kN or more;

2. Designed to operate at depths exceeding 1000 m; or

3. Having all of the following:

a. Designed to carry a crew of 4 or more;

b. Designed to «operate autonomously» for 10 hours or more;

c. Having a «range» of 25 nautical miles or more; and

d. Having a length of 21 m or less;

Technical Notes:

1.For the purposes of 8A001.b., «operate autonomously» means fully submerged, without snorkel, all systems working and cruising at minimum speed at which the submersible can safely control its depth dynamically by using its depth planes only, with no need for a support vessel or support base on the surface, sea-bed or shore, and containing a propulsion system for submerged or surface use.

2.For the purposes of 8A001.b.,«range» means half the maximum distance a submersible vehicle can cover.

c. Unmanned, tethered submersible vehicles designed to operate at depths exceeding 1000 m, having any of the following:

1. Designed for self-propelled manoeuvre using propulsion motors or thrusters specified in 8A002.a.2.; or

2. Having a fibre optic data link;

d. Unmanned, untethered submersible vehicles, having any of the following:

1. Designed for deciding a course relative to any geographical reference without real-time human assistance;

2. Having an acoustic data or command link; or

3. Having a fibre optic data or command link exceeding 1000 m;

e. Ocean salvage systems with a lifting capacity exceeding 5 MN for salvaging objects from depths exceeding 250 m and having any of the following:

1. Dynamic positioning systems capable of position keeping within 20 m of a given point provided by the navigation system; or

2. Seafloor navigation and navigation integration systems for depths exceeding 1000 m with positioning accuracies to within 10 m of a predetermined point;

f. Surface-effect vehicles (fully skirted variety) having all of the following characteristics:

1. A maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 30 knots in a significant wave height of 1,25 m (Sea State 3) or more;

2. A cushion pressure exceeding 3830 Pa; and

3. A light-ship-to-full-load displacement ratio of less than 0,70;

g. Surface-effect vehicles (rigid sidewalls) with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 40 knots in a significant wave height of 3,25 m (Sea State 5) or more;

h. Hydrofoil vessels with active systems for automatically controlling foil systems, with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, of 40 knots or more in a significant wave height of 3,25 m (Sea State 5) or more;

i.«'Small waterplane area vessels» having any of the following:

1. A full load displacement exceeding 500 tonnes with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 35 knots in a significant wave height of 3,25 m (Sea State 5) or more; or

2. A full load displacement exceeding 1500 tonnes with a maximum design speed, fully loaded, exceeding 25 knots in a significant wave height of 4 m (Sea State 6) or more.

Technical Note:

A «small waterplane area vessel» is defined by the following formula: waterplane area at an operational design draught less than 2 × (displaced volume at the operational design draught) 2/3 .

8A002Systems and equipment, as follows:

Note: For underwater communications systems, see Category 5, Part 1 — Telecommunications.

a. Systems and equipment, specially designed or modified for submersible vehicles, designed to operate at depths exceeding 1000 m, as follows:

1. Pressure housings or pressure hulls with a maximum inside chamber diameter exceeding 1,5 m;

2. Direct current propulsion motors or thrusters;

3. Umbilical cables, and connectors therefor, using optical fibre and having synthetic strength members;

b. Systems specially designed or modified for the automated control of the motion of submersible vehicles specified in 8A001 using navigation data and having closed loop servo-controls:

1. Enabling a vehicle to move within 10 m of a predetermined point in the water column;

2. Maintaining the position of the vehicle within 10 m of a predetermined point in the water column; or

3. Maintaining the position of the vehicle within 10 m while following a cable on or under the seabed;

c. Fibre optic hull penetrators or connectors;

d. Underwater vision systems, as follows:

1. Television systems and television cameras, as follows:

a. Television systems (comprising camera, monitoring and signal transmission equipment) having a limiting resolution when measured in air of more than 800 lines and specially designed or modified for remote operation with a submersible vehicle;

b. Underwater television cameras having a limiting resolution when measured in air of more than 1100 lines;

c. Low light level television cameras specially designed or modified for underwater use containing all of the following:

1. Image intensifier tubes specified in 6A002.a.2.a.; and

2. More than 150000«active pixels» per solid state area array;

Technical Note:

Limiting resolution in television is a measure of horizontal resolution usually expressed in terms of the maximum number of lines per picture height discriminated on a test chart, using IEEE Standard 208/1960 or any equivalent standard.

2. Systems, specially designed or modified for remote operation with an underwater vehicle, employing techniques to minimise the effects of back scatter, including range-gated illuminators or «laser» systems;

e. Photographic still cameras specially designed or modified for underwater use below 150 m having a film format of 35 mm or larger, and having any of the following:

1. Annotation of the film with data provided by a source external to the camera;

2. Automatic back focal distance correction; or

3. Automatic compensation control specially designed to permit an underwater camera housing to be usable at depths exceeding 1000 m;

f. Electronic imaging systems, specially designed or modified for underwater use, capable of storing digitally more than 50 exposed images;

Note: 8A002.f. does not control digital cameras specially designed for consumer purposes, other than those employing electronic image multiplication techniques.

g. Light systems, as follows, specially designed or modified for underwater use:

1. Stroboscopic light systems capable of a light output energy of more than 300 J per flash and a flash rate of more than 5 flashes per second;

2. Argon arc light systems specially designed for use below 1000 m;

h.«Robots» specially designed for underwater use, controlled by using a dedicated computer, having any of the following:

1. Systems that control the «robot» using information from sensors which measure force or torque applied to an external object, distance to an external object, or tactile sense between the «robot» and an external object; or

2. The ability to exert a force of 250 N or more or a torque of 250 Nm or more and using titanium based alloys or «fibrous or filamentary»«composite» materials in their structural members;

i. Remotely controlled articulated manipulators specially designed or modified for use with submersible vehicles, having any of the following:

1. Systems which control the manipulator using the information from sensors which measure the torque or force applied to an external object, or tactile sense between the manipulator and an external object; or

2. Controlled by proportional master-slave techniques or by using a dedicated computer, and having 5 degrees of freedom of movement or more;

Note: Only functions having proportional control using positional feedback or by using a dedicated computer are counted when determining the number of degrees of freedom of movement.

j. Air independent power systems, specially designed for underwater use, as follows:

1. Brayton or Rankine cycle engine air independent power systems having any of the following:

a. Chemical scrubber or absorber systems specially designed to remove carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and particulates from recirculated engine exhaust;

b. Systems specially designed to use a monoatomic gas;

c. Devices or enclosures specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz, or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; or

d. Systems specially designed:

1. To pressurise the products of reaction or for fuel reformation;

2. To store the products of the reaction; and

3. To discharge the products of the reaction against a pressure of 100 kPa or more;

2. Diesel cycle engine air independent systems, having all of the following:

a. Chemical scrubber or absorber systems specially designed to remove carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and particulates from recirculated engine exhaust;

b. Systems specially designed to use a monoatomic gas;

c. Devices or enclosures specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; and

d. Specially designed exhaust systems that do not exhaust continuously the products of combustion;

3. Fuel cell air independent power systems with an output exceeding 2 kW having any of the following:

a. Devices or enclosures specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; or

b. Systems specially designed:

1. To pressurise the products of reaction or for fuel reformation;

2. To store the products of the reaction; and

3. To discharge the products of the reaction against a pressure of 100 kPa or more;

4. Stirling cycle engine air independent power systems, having all of the following:

a. Devices or enclosures specially designed for underwater noise reduction in frequencies below 10 kHz or special mounting devices for shock mitigation; and

b. Specially designed exhaust systems which discharge the products of combustion against a pressure of 100 kPa or more;

k. Skirts, seals and fingers, having any of the following:

1. Designed for cushion pressures of 3830 Pa or more, operating in a significant wave height of 1,25 m (Sea State 3) or more and specially designed for surface effect vehicles (fully skirted variety) specified in 8A001.f.; or

2. Designed for cushion pressures of 6224 Pa or more, operating in a significant wave height of 3,25 m (Sea State 5) or more and specially designed for surface effect vehicles (rigid sidewalls) specified in 8A001.g.;

l. Lift fans rated at more than 400 kW specially designed for surface effect vehicles specified in 8A001.f. or 8A001.g.;

m. Fully submerged subcavitating or supercavitating hydrofoils specially designed for vessels specified in 8A001.h.;

n. Active systems specially designed or modified to control automatically the sea-induced motion of vehicles or vessels specified in 8A001.f., 8A001.g., 8A001.h. or 8A001.i.;

o. Propellers, power transmission systems, power generation systems and noise reduction systems, as follows:

1. Water-screw propeller or power transmission systems, as follows, specially designed for surface effect vehicles (fully skirted or rigid sidewall variety), hydrofoils or small waterplane area vessels specified in 8A001.f., 8A001.g., 8A001.h. or 8A001.i.:

a. Supercavitating, super-ventilated, partially-submerged or surface piercing propellers rated at more than 7,5 MW;

b. Contrarotating propeller systems rated at more than 15 MW;

c. Systems employing pre-swirl or post-swirl techniques for smoothing the flow into a propeller;

d. Light-weight, high capacity (K factor exceeding 300) reduction gearing;

e. Power transmission shaft systems, incorporating «composite» material components, capable of transmitting more than 1 MW;

2. Water-screw propeller, power generation systems or transmission systems designed for use on vessels, as follows:

a. Controllable-pitch propellers and hub assemblies rated at more than 30 MW;

b. Internally liquid-cooled electric propulsion engines with a power output exceeding 2,5 MW;

c.«Superconductive» propulsion engines, or permanent magnet electric propulsion engines, with a power output exceeding 0,1 MW;

d. Power transmission shaft systems, incorporating «composite» material components, capable of transmitting more than 2 MW;

e. Ventilated or base-ventilated propeller systems rated at more than 2,5 MW;

3. Noise reduction systems designed for use on vessels of 1000 tonnes displacement or more, as follows:

a. Systems that attenuate underwater noise at frequencies below 500 Hz and consist of compound acoustic mounts for the acoustic isolation of diesel engines, diesel generator sets, gas turbines, gas turbine generator sets, propulsion motors or propulsion reduction gears, specially designed for sound or vibration isolation, having an intermediate mass exceeding 30 % of the equipment to be mounted;

b. Active noise reduction or cancellation systems, or magnetic bearings, specially designed for power transmission systems, and incorporating electronic control systems capable of actively reducing equipment vibration by the generation of anti-noise or anti-vibration signals directly to the source;

p. Pumpjet propulsion systems having a power output exceeding 2,5 MW using divergent nozzle and flow conditioning vane techniques to improve propulsive efficiency or reduce propulsion-generated underwater-radiated noise;

q. Self-contained, closed or semi-closed circuit (rebreathing) diving and underwater swimming apparatus.

Note: 8A002.q. does not control an individual apparatus for personal use when accompanying its user.

8BTest, Inspection and Production Equipment

8B001Water tunnels, having a background noise of less than 100 dB (reference 1 μPa, 1 Hz), in the frequency range from 0 to 500 Hz, designed for measuring acoustic fields generated by a hydro-flow around propulsion system models.

8CMaterials

8C001«Syntactic foam» designed for underwater use, having all of the following:

a. Designed for marine depths exceeding 1000 m; and

b. A density less than 561 kg/m3.

Technical Note:

«Syntactic foam» consists of hollow spheres of plastic or glass embedded in a resin matrix.

8DSoftware

8D001«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development», «production» or «use» of equipment or materials specified in 8A, 8B or 8C.

8D002Specific «software» specially designed or modified for the «development», «production», repair, overhaul or refurbishing (re-machining) of propellers specially designed for underwater noise reduction.

8ETechnology

8E001«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» or «production» of equipment or materials specified in 8A, 8B or 8C.

8E002Other «technology», as follows:

a.«Technology» for the«development», «production», repair, overhaul or refurbishing (re-machining) of propellers specially designed for underwater noise reduction;

b.«Technology» for the overhaul or refurbishing of equipment specified in 8A001, 8A002.b., 8A002.j., 8A002.o. or 8A002.p.

CATEGORY 9

PROPULSION SYSTEMS, SPACE VEHICLES AND RELATED EQUIPMENT

9ASystems, Equipment and Components

N.B.: For propulsion systems designed or rated against neutron or transient ionizing radiation, see the Military Goods Controls.

9A001Aero gas turbine engines having any of the following:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A101.

a. Incorporating any of the «technologies» specified in 9E003.a.; or

Note: 9A001.a. does not control aero gas turbine engines which meet all of the following:

a.Certified by the civil aviation authority in a «participating state»; and

b.Intended to power non-military manned aircraft for which one of the following has been issued by a «participating state» for the aircraft with this specific engine type:

1.A civil Type Certificate; or

2.An equivalent document recognized by the International Civil Aviation Organisation (ICAO).

b. Designed to power an aircraft to cruise at Mach 1 or higher for more than thirty minutes.

9A002«Marine gas turbine engines» with an ISO standard continuous power rating of 24245 kW or more and a specific fuel consumption not exceeding 0,219 kg/kWh in the power range from 35 to 100 %, and specially designed assemblies and components therefor.

Note: The term «marine gas turbine engines» includes those industrial, or aero-derivative, gas turbine engines adapted for a ship's electric power generation or propulsion.

9A003Specially designed assemblies and components, incorporating any of the «technologies» specified in 9E003.a., for the following gas turbine engine propulsion systems:

a. Specified in 9A001;

b. Whose design or production origins are either non-«participating States» or unknown to the manufacturer.

9A004Space launch vehicles and «spacecraft».

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A104.

Note: 9A004 does not control payloads.

N.B.: For the control status of products contained in «spacecraft» payloads, see the appropriate Categories.

9A005Liquid rocket propulsion systems containing any of the systems or components specified in 9A006.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A105 and 9A119.

9A006Systems and components specially designed for liquid rocket propulsion systems, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A106, 9A108 and 9A.120.

a. Cryogenic refrigerators, flightweight dewars, cryogenic heat pipes or cryogenic systems specially designed for use in space vehicles and capable of restricting cryogenic fluid losses to less than 30 % per year;

b. Cryogenic containers or closed-cycle refrigeration systems capable of providing temperatures of 100 K (–173 °C) or less for «aircraft» capable of sustained flight at speeds exceeding Mach 3, launch vehicles or «spacecraft»;

c. Slush hydrogen storage or transfer systems;

d. High pressure (exceeding 17,5 MPa) turbo pumps, pump components or their associated gas generator or expander cycle turbine drive systems;

e. High-pressure (exceeding 10,6 MPa) thrust chambers and nozzles therefor;

f. Propellant storage systems using the principle of capillary containment or positive expulsion (i.e., with flexible bladders);

g. Liquid propellant injectors, with individual orifices of 0.381 mm or smaller in diameter (an area of 1,14 × 10–3 cm2 or smaller for non-circular orifices) specially designed for liquid rocket engines;

h. One-piece carbon-carbon thrust chambers or one-piece carbon-carbon exit cones with densities exceeding 1,4 g/cm3 and tensile strengths exceeding 48 MPa.

9A007Solid rocket propulsion systems with any of the following:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A119.

a. Total impulse capacity exceeding 1,1 MNs;

b. Specific impulse of 2,4 kNs/kg or more when the nozzle flow is expanded to ambient sea level conditions for an adjusted chamber pressure of 7 MPa;

c. Stage mass fractions exceeding 88 % and propellant solid loadings exceeding 86 %;

d. Any of the components specified in 9A008; or

e. Insulation and propellant bonding systems using direct-bonded motor designs to provide a «strong mechanical bond» or a barrier to chemical migration between the solid propellant and case insulation material.

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 9A007.e., a «strong mechanical bond» means bond strength equal to or more than propellant strength.

9A008Components, as follows, specially designed for solid rocket propulsion systems:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A108.

a. Insulation and propellant bonding systems using liners to provide a «strong mechanical bond» or a barrier to chemical migration between the solid propellant and case insulation material;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 9A008.a., a «strong mechanical bond» means bond strength equal to or more than propellant strength.

b. Filament-wound «composite» motor cases exceeding 0,61 m in diameter or having «structural efficiency ratios (PV/W)» exceeding 25 km;

Technical Note:

The «structural efficiency ratio (PV/W)» is the burst pressure (P) multiplied by the vessel volume (V) divided by the total pressure vessel weight (W).

c. Nozzles with thrust levels exceeding 45 kN or nozzle throat erosion rates of less than 0,075 mm/s;

d. Movable nozzle or secondary fluid injection thrust vector control systems capable of any of the following:

1. Omni-axial movement exceeding ± 5°;

2. Angular vector rotations of 20°/s or more; or

3. Angular vector accelerations of 40°/s2 or more.

9A009Hybrid rocket propulsion systems with:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A109 and 9A119.

a. Total impulse capacity exceeding 1.1 MNs; or

b. Thrust levels exceeding 220 kN in vacuum exit conditions.

9A010Specially designed components, systems and structures for launch vehicles, launch vehicle propulsion systems or «spacecraft», as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1A002 AND 9A110.

a. Components and structures each exceeding 10 kg, specially designed for launch vehicles manufactured using metal «matrix», «composite», organic «composite», ceramic «matrix» or intermetallic reinforced materials specified in 1C007 or 1C010;

Note: The weight cut-off is not relevant for nose cones.

b. Components and structures specially designed for launch vehicle propulsion systems specified in 9A005 to 9A009 manufactured using metal matrix, composite, organic composite, ceramic matrix or intermetallic reinforced materials specified in 1C007 or 1C010;

c. Structural components and isolation systems specially designed to control actively the dynamic response or distortion of «spacecraft» structures;

d. Pulsed liquid rocket engines with thrust-to-weight ratios equal to or more than 1 kN/kg and a response time (the time required to achieve 90 % of total rated thrust from start-up) of less than 30 ms.

9A011Ramjet, scramjet or combined cycle engines and specially designed components therefor.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A111 and 9A118.

9A012«Unmanned aerial vehicles» («UAVs»), associated systems, equipment and components as follows:

a.«UAVs» having any of the following:

1. An autonomous flight control and navigation capability (e.g., an autopilot with an Inertial Navigation System); or

2. Capability of controlled-flight out of the direct vision range involving a human operator (e.g., televisual remote control).

b. Associated systems, equipment and components as follows:

1. Equipment specially designed for remotely controlling the «UAVs» specified in 9A012.a.;

2. Guidance or control systems, other than those specified in 7A, specially designed for integration into «UAVs» specified in 9A012.a.;

3. Equipment and components specially designed to convert a manned «aircraft» to a «UAV» specified in 9A012.a.

9A101Lightweight turbojet and turbofan engines (including turbocompound engines), other than those specified in 9A001, as follows;

a. Engines having both of the following characteristics:

1. Maximum thrust value greater than 400 N (achieved un-installed) excluding civil certified engines with a maximum thrust value greater than 8890 N (achieved un-installed), and

2. Specific fuel consumption of 0,15 kg/N/hr or less (at maximum continuous power at sea level static and standard conditions);

b. Engines designed or modified for use in «missiles».

9A104Sounding rockets, capable of a range of at least 300 km.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A004.

9A105Liquid propellant rocket engines, as follows:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A119.

a. Liquid propellant rocket engines usable in «missiles», other than those specified in 9A005, having a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 1.1 MNs;

b. Liquid propellant rocket engines, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A005 or 9A105.a., having a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 0.841 MNs.

9A106Systems or components, other than those specified in 9A006, usable in «missiles», as follows, specially designed for liquid rocket propulsion systems:

a. Ablative liners for thrust or combustion chambers;

b. Rocket nozzles;

c. Thrust vector control sub systems;

Technical Note:

Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A106.c. are:

1.Flexible nozzle;

2.Fluid or secondary gas injection;

3.Movable engine or nozzle;

4.Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or

5.Thrust tabs.

d. Liquid and slurry propellant (including oxidisers) control systems, and specially designed components therefor, designed or modified to operate in vibration environments greater than 10 g rms between 20 Hz and 2 kHz.

Note: The only servo valves and pumps specified in 9A106.d., are the following:

a.Servo valves designed for flow rates equal to or greater than 24 litres per minute, at an absolute pressure equal to or greater than 7 MPa, that have an actuator response time of less than 100 ms;

b.Pumps, for liquid propellants, with shaft speeds equal to or greater than 8000 r.p.m. or with discharge pressures equal to or greater than 7 MPa.

9A107Solid propellant rocket engines, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A007, having total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 0.841 MNs.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A119.

9A108Components, other than those specified in 9A008, usable in «missiles», as follows, specially designed for solid rocket propulsion systems:

a. Rocket motor cases and «insulation» components therefor;

b. Rocket nozzles;

c. Thrust vector control sub-systems.

Technical Note:

Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A108.c. are:

1.Flexible nozzle;

2.Fluid or secondary gas injection;

3.Movable engine or nozzle;

4.Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or

5.Thrust tabs.

9A109Hybrid rocket motors, usable in «missiles», other than those specified in 9A009, and specially designed components therefor.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A119.

Technical Note:

In 9A109 «missile» means complete rocket system and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

9A110Composite structures, laminates and manufactures thereof, other than those specified in 9A010, specially designed for use in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 or the subsystems specified in 9A005, 9A007, 9A105.a., 9A106 to 9A108, 9A116 or 9A119.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1A002.

9A111Pulse jet engines, usable in «missiles», and specially designed components therefor.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A011 and 9A118.

9A115Launch support equipment as follows:

a. Apparatus and devices for handling, control, activation or launching, designed or modified for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104;

b. Vehicles for transport, handling, control, activation or launching, designed or modified for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

9A116Re-entry vehicles, usable in «missiles», and equipment designed or modified therefor, as follows:

a. Re-entry vehicles;

b. Heat shields and components therefor fabricated of ceramic or ablative materials;

c. Heat sinks and components therefor fabricated of light-weight, high heat capacity materials;

d. Electronic equipment specially designed for re-entry vehicles.

9A117Staging mechanisms, separation mechanisms, and interstages, usable in «missiles».

9A118Devices to regulate combustion usable in engines, which are usable in «missiles», specified in 9A011 or 9A111.

9A119Individual rocket stages, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A005, 9A007, 9A009, 9A105, 9A107 and 9A109.

9A120Liquid propellant tanks, other than those specified in 9A006, specially designed for propellants specified in 1C111 or «other liquid propellants», used in rocket systems capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km.

Note: In 9A120 «other liquid propellants» includes, but is not limited to, propellants specified in the Military Goods Controls.

9A350Spraying or fogging systems, specially designed or modified for fitting to aircraft, «lighter-than-air vehicles» or unmanned aerial vehicles, and specially designed components therefor, as follows:

a. Complete spraying or fogging systems capable of delivering, from a liquid suspension, an initial droplet «VMD» of less than 50 μm at a flow rate of greater than two litres per minute;

b. Spray booms or arrays of aerosol generating units capable of delivering, from a liquid suspension, an initial droplet «VMD» of less than 50 μm at a flow rate of greater than two litres per minute;

c. Aerosol generating units specially designed for fitting to systems specified in 9A350.a. and b.

Note: Aerosol generating units are devices specially designed or modified for fitting to aircraft such as nozzles, rotary drum atomisers and similar devices.

Note: 9A350 does not control spraying of fogging systems and components that are demonstrated not to be capable of delivering biological agents in the form of infectious aerosols.

Technical Notes:

1.Droplet size for spray equipment or nozzles specially designed for use on aircraft, «lighter-than-air vehicles» or unmanned aerial vehicles should be measured using either of the following:

a. Doppler laser method;

b. Forward laser diffraction method.

2.In 9A350 «VMD» means Volume Median Diameter and for water-based systems this equates to Mass Median Diameter (MMD).

9BTest, Inspection and Production Equipment

9B001Specially designed equipment, tooling and fixtures, as follows, for manufacturing gas turbine blades, vanes or tip shroud castings:

a. Directional solidification or single crystal casting equipment;

b. Ceramic cores or shells;

9B002On-line (real time) control systems, instrumentation (including sensors) or automated data acquisition and processing equipment, specially designed for the «development» of gas turbine engines, assemblies or components incorporating «technologies» specified in 9E003.a.

9B003Equipment specially designed for the «production» or test of gas turbine brush seals designed to operate at tip speeds exceeding 335 m/s, and temperatures in excess of 773 K (500 °C), and specially designed components or accessories therefor.

9B004Tools, dies or fixtures for the solid state joining of «superalloy», titanium or intermetallic airfoil-to-disk combinations described in 9E003.a.3. or 9E003.a.6. for gas turbines.

9B005On-line (real time) control systems, instrumentation (including sensors) or automated data acquisition and processing equipment, specially designed for use with any of the following wind tunnels or devices:

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9B105.

a. Wind tunnels designed for speeds of Mach 1,2 or more, except those specially designed for educational purposes and having a «test section size» (measured laterally) of less than 250 mm;

Technical Note:

«Test section size» in 9B005.a. means the diameter of the circle, or the side of the square, or the longest side of the rectangle, at the largest test section location.

b. Devices for simulating flow-environments at speeds exceeding Mach 5, including hot-shot tunnels, plasma arc tunnels, shock tubes, shock tunnels, gas tunnels and light gas guns; or

c. Wind tunnels or devices, other than two-dimensional sections, capable of simulating Reynolds number flows exceeding 25 × 106.

9B006Acoustic vibration test equipment capable of producing sound pressure levels of 160 dB or more (referenced to 20 μPa) with a rated output of 4 kW or more at a test cell temperature exceeding 1273 K (1000 °C), and specially designed quartz heaters therefor.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9B106.

9B007Equipment specially designed for inspecting the integrity of rocket motors using non-destructive test (NDT) techniques other than planar X-ray or basic physical or chemical analysis.

9B008Transducers specially designed for the direct measurement of the wall skin friction of the test flow with a stagnation temperature exceeding 833 K (560 °C).

9B009Tooling specially designed for producing turbine engine powder metallurgy rotor components capable of operating at stress levels of 60 % of ultimate tensile strength (UTS) or more and metal temperatures of 873 K (600 °C) or more.

9B010Equipment specially designed for the production of «UAVs» and associated systems, equipment and components specified in 9A012.

9B105Wind tunnels for speeds of Mach 0,9 or more, usable for «missiles» and their subsystems.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 9B005.

9B106Environmental chambers and anechoic chambers, as follows:

a. Environmental chambers capable of simulating the following flight conditions:

1. Vibration environments equal to or greater than 10 g rms, measured «bare table», between 20 Hz and 2 kHz imparting forces equal to or greater than 5 kN; and

2. Altitude equal to or greater than 15 km; or

3. Temperature range of at least 223 K (– 50 °C) to 398 K (+125 °C);

Technical Notes:

1.9B106.a. describes systems that are capable of generating a vibration environment with a single wave (e.g., a sine wave) and systems capable of generating a broad band random vibration (i.e., power spectrum);

2.In 9B106.a.1. «bare table» means a flat table, or surface with no fixture or fittings.

b. Environmental chambers capable of simulating the following flight conditions:

1. Acoustic environments at an overall sound pressure level of 140 dB or greater (referenced to 20 μPa) or with a total rated acoustic power output of 4 kW or greater; and

2. Altitude equal to or greater than 15 km; or

3. Temperature range of at least 223 K (– 50 °C) to 398 K (+ 125 °C).

9B115Specially designed «production equipment»for the systems, subsystems and components specified in 9A005 to 9A009, 9A011, 9A101, 9A105 to 9A109, 9A111, 9A116 to 9A119.

9B116Specially designed «production facilities»for the space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, or systems, sub-systems, and components specified in 9A005 to 9A009, 9A011, 9A101, 9A104 to 9A109, 9A111, or 9A116 to 9A119.

9B117Test benches and test stands for solid or liquid propellant rockets or rocket motors, having either of the following characteristics:

a. The capacity to handle more than 90 kN of thrust; or

b. Capable of simultaneously measuring the three axial thrust components.

9CMaterials

9C108«Insulation» material in bulk form and «interior lining», other than those specified in 9A008, for rocket motor cases usable in «missiles» or specially designed for «missiles».

Technical Note:

In 9C108 «missile» means complete rocket systems and unmanned aerial vehicle systems capable of a range exceeding 300 km.

9C110Resin impregnated fibre prepregs and metal coated fibre preforms therefor, for composite structures, laminates and manufactures specified in 9A110, made either with organic matrix or metal matrix utilising fibrous or filamentary reinforcements having a «specific tensile strength» greater than 7,62 × 104 m and a «specific modulus» greater than 3,18 × 106 m.

N.B.: SEE ALSO 1C010 and 1C210.

Note: The only resin impregnated fibre prepregs specified in entry 9C110 are those using resins with a glass transition temperature (T g ), after cure, exceeding 418 K (145 °C) as determined by ASTM D4065 or equivalent.

9DSoftware

9D001«Software» specially designed or modified for the «development» of equipment or «technology» specified in 9A001 to 9A119, 9B or 9E003.

9D002«Software» specially designed or modified for the «production» of equipment specified in 9A001 to 9A119 or 9B.

9D003«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of «full authority digital electronic engine controls» («FADEC») for propulsion systems specified in 9A or equipment specified in 9B, as follows:

a.«Software» in digital electronic controls for propulsion systems, aerospace test facilities or air breathing aero-engine test facilities;

b. Fault-tolerant «software» used in «FADEC» systems for propulsion systems and associated test facilities.

9D004Other «software», as follows:

a. 2D or 3D viscous «software» validated with wind tunnel or flight test data required for detailed engine flow modelling;

b.«Software» for testing aero gas turbine engines, assemblies or components, specially designed to collect, reduce and analyse data in real time, and capable of feedback control, including the dynamic adjustment of test articles or test conditions, as the test is in progress;

c.«Software» specially designed to control directional solidification or single crystal casting;

d.«Software» in «source code», «object code» or machine code required for the «use» of active compensating systems for rotor blade tip clearance control;

Note: 9D004.d. does not control «software» embedded in uncontrolled equipment or required for maintenance activities associated with the calibration or repair or updates to the active compensating clearance control system.

e.«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of «UAVs» and associated systems, equipment and components specified by 9A012.

9D101«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of goods specified in 9B105, 9B106, 9B116 or 9B117.

9D103«Software» specially designed for modelling, simulation or design integration of the space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104, or the subsystems specified in 9A005, 9A007, 9A105.a., 9A106, 9A108, 9A116 or 9A119.

Note:«Software» specified in 9D103 remains controlled when combined with specially designed hardware specified in 4A102.

9D104«Software» specially designed or modified for the «use» of goods specified in 9A001, 9A005, 9A006.d., 9A006.g., 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A009.a., 9A010.d., 9A011, 9A101, 9A105, 9A106.c., 9A106.d., 9A107, 9A108.c., 9A109, 9A111, 9A115.a., 9A116.d., 9A117 or 9A118.

9D105«Software»which coordinates the function of more than one subsystem, specially designed or modified for «use» in space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104.

9ETechnology

Note:«Development» or «production», «technology» specified in 9E001 to 9E003 for gas turbine engines remains controlled when used as «use»«technology» for repair, rebuild and overhaul. Excluded from control are: technical data, drawings or documentation for maintenance activities directly associated with calibration, removal or replacement of damaged or unserviceable line replaceable units, including replacement of whole engines or engine modules.

9E001«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» of equipment or «software» specified in 9A001.c., 9A004 to 9A012, 9A350, 9B or 9D.

9E002«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «production» of equipment specified in 9A001.c., 9A004 to 9A011, 9A350 or 9B.

N.B.: For «technology» for the repair of controlled structures, laminates or materials, see 1E002.f.

9E003Other «technology», as follows:

a.«Technology»«required» for the «development» or «production» of any of the following gas turbine engine components or systems:

1. Gas turbine blades, vanes or tip shrouds made from directionally solidified (DS) or single crystal (SC) alloys having (in the 001 Miller Index Direction) a stress-rupture life exceeding 400 hours at 1273 K (1000 °C) at a stress of 200 MPa, based on the average property values;

2. Multiple domed combustors operating at average burner outlet temperatures exceeding 1813 K (1540 °C) or combustors incorporating thermally decoupled combustion liners, non-metallic liners or non-metallic shells;

3. Components manufactured from any of the following:

a. Organic «composite» materials designed to operate above 588 K (315 °C);

b. Metal «matrix»«composite», ceramic «matrix», intermetallic or intermetallic reinforced materials specified in 1C007; or

c.«Composite» material specified in 1C010 and manufactured with resins specified in 1C008.

4. Uncooled turbine blades, vanes, tip-shrouds or other components designed to operate at gas path temperatures of 1323 K (1050 °C) or more;

5. Cooled turbine blades, vanes or tip-shrouds, other than those described in 9E003.a.1., exposed to gas path temperatures of 1643 K (1370 °C) or more;

6. Airfoil-to-disk blade combinations using solid state joining;

7. Gas turbine engine components using «diffusion bonding»«technology» specified in 2E003.b.;

8. Damage tolerant gas turbine engine rotating components using powder metallurgy materials specified in 1C002.b.;

9.«FADEC» for gas turbine and combined cycle engines and their related diagnostic components, sensors and specially designed components;

10. Adjustable flow path geometry and associated control systems for:

a. Gas generator turbines;

b. Fan or power turbines;

c. Propelling nozzles;

Note 1: Adjustable flow path geometry and associated control systems in 9E003.a.10. do not include inlet guide vanes, variable pitch fans, variable stators or bleed valves for compressors.

Note 2: 9E003.a.10. does not control «development» or «production»«technology» for adjustable flow path geometry for reverse thrust.

11. Hollow fan blades

b.«Technology»«required» for the «development» or «production» of any of the following:

1. Wind tunnel aero-models equipped with non-intrusive sensors capable of transmitting data from the sensors to the data acquisition system; or

2.«Composite» propeller blades or propfans capable of absorbing more than 2000 kW at flight speeds exceeding Mach 0,55;

c.«Technology»«required» for the «development» or «production» of gas turbine engine components using «laser» water jet, ECM or EDM hole drilling processes to produce holes having any of the following sets of characteristics:

1. All of the following:

a. Depths more than four times their diameter;

b. Diameters less than 0,76 mm; and

c. Incidence angles equal to or less than 25°; or

2. All of the following:

a. Depths more than five times their diameter;

b. Diameters less than 0,4 mm; and

c. Incidence angles of more than 25°;

Technical Note:

For the purposes of 9E003.c., incidence angle is measured from a plane tangential to the airfoil surface at the point where the hole axis enters the airfoil surface.

d.«Technology»«required» for the «development» or «production» of helicopter power transfer systems or tilt rotor or tilt wing «aircraft» power transfer systems;

e.«Technology» for the «development» or «production» of reciprocating diesel engine ground vehicle propulsion systems having all of the following:

1. A «box volume» of 1,2 m3 or less;

2. An overall power output of more than 750 kW based on 80/1269/EEC, ISO 2534 or national equivalents; and

3. A power density of more than 700 kW/m3 of «box volume»;

Technical Note:

«Box volume» in 9E003.e. is the product of three perpendicular dimensions measured in the following way:

Length | : | The length of the crankshaft from front flange to flywheel face; |

Width | : | The widest of the following: a.The outside dimension from valve cover to valve cover; b.The dimensions of the outside edges of the cylinder heads; or c.The diameter of the flywheel housing; |

Height | : | The largest of the following: a.The dimension of the crankshaft centre-line to the top plane of the valve cover (or cylinder head) plus twice the stroke; or b.The diameter of the flywheel housing. |

f.«Technology»«required» for the «production» of specially designed components, as follows, for high output diesel engines:

1.«Technology»«required» for the «production» of engine systems having all of the following components employing ceramics materials specified in 1C007:

a. Cylinder liners;

b. Pistons;

c. Cylinder heads; and

d. One or more other components (including exhaust ports, turbochargers, valve guides, valve assemblies or insulated fuel injectors);

2.«Technology»«required» for the «production» of turbocharger systems, with single-stage compressors having all of the following:

a. Operating at pressure ratios of 4:1 or higher;

b. A mass flow in the range from 30 to 130 kg per minute; and

c. Variable flow area capability within the compressor or turbine sections;

3.«Technology»«required» for the «production» of fuel injection systems with a specially designed multifuel (e.g., diesel or jet fuel) capability covering a viscosity range from diesel fuel (2,5 cSt at 310,8 K (37,8 °C)) down to gasoline fuel (0,5 cSt at 310,8 K (37,8 °C)), having both of the following:

a. Injection amount in excess of 230 mm3 per injection per cylinder; and

b. Specially designed electronic control features for switching governor characteristics automatically depending on fuel property to provide the same torque characteristics by using the appropriate sensors;

g.«Technology»«required» for the «development» or «production» of high output diesel engines for solid, gas phase or liquid film (or combinations thereof) cylinder wall lubrication, permitting operation to temperatures exceeding 723 K (450 °C), measured on the cylinder wall at the top limit of travel of the top ring of the piston.

Technical Note:

High output diesel engines: diesel engines with a specified brake mean effective pressure of 1,8 MPa or more at a speed of 2300 r.p.m., provided the rated speed is 2300 r.p.m. or more.

9E101«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» or «production» of goods specified in 9A101, 9A104 to 9A111 or 9A115 to 9A119.

9E102«Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, or goods specified in 9A005 to 9A011, 9A101, 9A104 to 9A111, 9A115 to 9A119, 9B105, 9B106, 9B115, 9B116, 9B117, 9D101 or 9D103.

394/2006 Art. 1 and Annex

ANNEX II

COMMUNITY GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATION No EU001

(referred to in Article 6 of Regulation (EC) No 1334/2000)

Issuing authority: European Community

ò new

The explicit consent of the competent national authorities where the exporter is established must be given for any re-export under conditions that would not comply with those set by this authorisation.

394/2006 Art. 1 and Annex

Part 1

This export authorisation covers the following items:

All dual-use items specified in any entry in Annex I of the present Regulation except those listed in Part 2 below.

Part 2

— | All items specified in Annex IV V. |

— | 0C001 | «Natural uranium» or «depleted uranium» or thorium in the form of metal, alloy, chemical compound or concentrate and any other material containing one or more of the foregoing. |

— | 0C002 | «Special fissile materials» other than those specified in Annex IV V. |

— | 0D001 | «Software» specially designed or modified for the «development», «production» or «use» of goods specified in Category 0, insofar as it relates to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV V. |

— | 0E001 | «Technology» according to the Nuclear Technology Note for the «development», «production» or «use» of goods specified in Category 0, insofar as it relates to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV V. |

— | 1A102 | Resaturated pyrolised carbon-carbon components designed for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 or sounding rockets specified in 9A104. |

— | 1C351 | Human pathogens, zoonoses and «toxins». |

— | 1C352 | Animal pathogens. |

— | 1C353 | Genetic elements and genetically modified organisms. |

— | 1C354 | Plant pathogens. |

— | 7E104 | «Technology» for the integration of the flight control, guidance, and propulsion data into a flight management system for optimisation of rocket system trajectory. |

— | 9A009.a. | Hybrid rocket propulsion systems with total impulse capacity exceeding 1.1 MNs. |

— | 9A117 | Staging mechanisms, separation mechanisms, and interstages, usable in «missiles». |

Part 3

This export authorisation is valid throughout the Community for exports to the following destinations:

Australia

Canada

Japan

New Zealand

Norway

Switzerland

United States of America

Note: Parts 2 and 3 may be amended only in conformity with the relevant obligations and commitments that each Member State has accepted as a member of the international non-proliferation regimes and export control arrangements, and in conformity with the public security interests of each Member State as reflected in its responsibility for deciding on applications for authorisations to export dual-use items under Article 6(2) of this Regulation.

Conditions and requirements for use of this authorisation

1. This general authorisation may not be used if the exporter has been informed by the competent authorities of the Member State in which he is established that the items in question are or may be intended, in their entirety or in part, for use in connection with the development, production, handling, operation, maintenance, storage, detection, identification or dissemination of chemical, biological or nuclear weapons or other nuclear explosive devices or the development, production, maintenance or storage of missiles capable of delivering such weapons, or if the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended for such use.

2. This general authorisation may not be used if the exporter has been informed by the competent authorities of the Member State in which he is established that the items in question are or may be intended for a military end-use as defined in Article 4(2) of the Regulation in a country subject to an EU, OSCE or UN arms embargo, or if the exporter is aware that the items in question are intended for such use.

3. This general authorisation may not be used when the relevant items are exported to a customs free zone or free warehouse which is located in a destination covered by this authorisation.

4. The registration and reporting requirements attached to the use of this general authorisation, and the additional information that the Member State from which the export is made might require on items exported under this authorisation, are defined by Member States. These requirements must be based on those defined for the use of general export authorisations granted by those Member States which provide for such authorisations.

394/2006 Art. 1 and Annex

ð new

ANNEX III a

(model form ð for individual or global export authorisation forms including for intangible exports and for he provision of intermediation services ï )

(referred to in Article 10(1))

ò new

When delivering the export authorisations, Member States will strive to ensure the visibility of the nature of the authorisation (individual or global) on the form issued

This is an export authorisation valid in all Member States of the European Union until its expiry date

394/2006 Art. 1 and Annex

ð new

EUROPEAN COMMUNITY | EXPORT OF DUAL-USE ITEMS ð INCLUDING INTANGIBLE EXPORTS AND PROVISION OF INTERMEDIATION SERVICES ï (Reg. (EC) No …) |

1 | 1 Exporter | No | 3. Expiry date (if applicable) |

LICENCE | 4. Contact point details |

5 Consignee ð (if applicable for IT transfers) ï | 6. Issuing authority |

7 Agent/Representative (if different from exporter) | No |

8. Country of origin | Code [21] |

9 Country of consignment | Code1 |

10. End user (if different from consignee) | 11. Member State of current or future location of the items ð (if applicable for intangible transfers of technology and for the provision of intermediation services ) ï | Code1 |

12. Member State of intended entry into the customs export procedure ð (if applicable for intangible transfers of technology and provision of intermediation services ) ï | Code1 |

1 | 13. Country of final destination | Code1 |

14. Description of the items [22] | 15. ð Harmonised System or Combined Nomenclature ï Code (if applicable ð with 8 digit; CAS number if available ï ) | 16. Control list no ð (for listed items) ï |

17. Currency and Value ð (if applicable for intangible transfers of technology and for the provision of ï intermediation services) | 18. Quantity of the items ð (if applicable for IT transfers) ï |

19. End use | 20. Contract date (if applicable ) | 21. Customs export procedure ð (if applicable for intangible transfers of technology and provision of intermediation services) ï |

22. Additional information required by national legislation (to be specified on the form) |

Available for pre-printed information At discretion of Member States |

For completion by issuing authority Signature Issuing Authority | Stamp |

Date |

EUROPEAN COMMUNITY | EXPORT OF DUAL-USE ITEMS ð INCLUDING INTANGIBLE EXPORTS AND PROVISION OF INTERMEDIATION SERVICES ï (Reg. (EC) No …) |

1 Bis | 1. Exporter | 2 . Identification number |

LICENCE |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code ð (if applicable with 8 digit; CAS number if available ) ï | 16. Control list no ð (for listed items) ï |

17. Currency and Value ð (if applicable for intangible transfers of technology and for the provision of ï intermediation services) | 18. Quantity of the items ð (if applicable for IT transfers) ï |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code ð (if applicable with 8 digit; CAS number if available ) ï | 16. Control list no ð (for listed items) ï |

17. Currency and Value ð (if applicable for intangible transfers of technology and for the provision of intermediation services) ï | 18. Quantity of the itemsð (if applicable for IT transfers) ï |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code | 16. Control list no |

17. Currency and value | 18. Quantity of the items |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code | 16. Control list no |

17. Currency and value | 18. Quantity of the items |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code | 16. Control list no |

17. Currency and value | 18. Quantity of the items |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code | 16. Control list no |

17. Currency and value | 18. Quantity of the items |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code | 16. Control list no |

17. Currency and value | 18. Quantity of the items |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code | 16. Control list no |

17. Currency and value | 18. Quantity of the items |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code | 16. Control list no |

17. Currency and value | 18. Quantity of the items |

14. Description of the items | 15. Commodity code | 16. Control list no |

17. Currency and value | 18. Quantity of the items |

Note: In part 1 of column 24, write the quantity still available and in part 2 of column 24, write the quantity deducted on this occasion. |

23. Net quantity/value (Net mass/other unit with indication of unit) | 26. Customs document (Type and number) or extract (Nr) and date of deduction | 27. Member state, name and signature, stamp of deduction |

24. In numbers | 25. In words for quantity/value deducted |

1 |

2 |

1 |

2 |

1 |

2 |

1 |

2 |

1 |

2 |

1 |

2 |

1 |

2 |

1 |

2 |

394/2006 Art. 1 and Annex (adapted)

ANNEX III bIV

COMMON ELEMENTS FOR PUBLICATION OF NATIONAL GENERAL EXPORT AUTHORISATIONS IN NATIONAL OFFICIAL JOURNALS

(REFERRED TO IN ARTICLE 10(3) AND in Article 6 (3)

ò new

The explicit consent of the competent national authorities where the exporter is established must be given for any re-export under conditions that would not comply with those set by this authorisation.

394/2006 Art. 1 and Annex (adapted)

1. Title of general export authorisation

2. Authority issuing the authorisation

3. EC validity. The following text shall be used:

««This is a general export authorisation under the terms of Article 6(2) of Regulation (EC) No 1334/2000 […] . This authorisation, in accordance with Article 6(2) and 6(3) of that Regulation, is valid in all Member States of the European Union Community»»

ò new

National validity: the period of validity of the authorisation must be mentioned

394/2006 Art. 1 and Annex

ð new

4. Items concerned: the following introductory text shall be used:

««This export authorisation covers the following items »»

5. Destinations concerned: The following introductory text shall be used:

««This export authorisation is valid for exports to the following destinations»»

6. Conditions and requirements ð : exporters have to register the use or their intention of use of the national general authorisation to national competent authorities of the Member State where they are established no later than 30 days after the first shipment. ï

394/2006 Art. 1 and Annex (adapted)

ANNEX IVV

(List referred to in Article 21(1) 25.1 of Regulation (EC) No 1334/2000 […] )

The entries do not always cover the complete description of the item and the related notes in Annex I[23]. Only Annex I provides the complete description of the items.

The mention of an item in this Annex does not affect the application of the provisions concerning mass-market products in Annex I.

Part I

(possibility of National General Authorisation for intra-Community trade)

Items of stealth technology

1C001 | Materials specially designed for use as absorbers of electromagnetic waves, or intrinsically conductive polymers. NB: SEE ALSO 1C101 |

1C101 | Materials or devices for reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures; other than those specified in 1C001, usable in «missiles», «missile» subsystems or unmanned aerial vehicles specified in 9A012. |

1D103 | «Software» specially designed for analysis of reduced observables such as radar reflectivity, ultraviolet/infrared signatures and acoustic signatures. |

1E101 | «Technology» according to the GTN for the «use» of goods specified in 1C101 or 1D103. |

1E102 | «Technology» according to the GTN for the «development» of «software» specified in 1D103. |

6B008 | Pulse radar cross-section measurement systems having transmit pulse widths of 100 ns or less and specially designed components therefor. NB: SEE ALSO 6B108 |

6B108 | Systems specially designed for radar cross-section measurement usable for «missiles» and their subsystems. |

Items of the Community strategic control

1C239 | High explosives, other than those specified in the military goods controls, or substances or mixtures containing more than 2 % thereof, with a crystal density greater than 1,8 gm per cm3 and having a detonation velocity greater than 8000 m/s. |

1E201 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of goods specified in 1C239. |

3A229 | Firing sets and equivalent high-current pulse generators, as follows … NB: SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS |

3A232 | Detonators and multipoint initiation systems, as follows … NB: SEE ALSO MILITARY GOODS CONTROLS |

3E201 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment specified in 3A229 or 3A232. |

6A001 | Acoustics, limited to the following: |

6A001.a.1.b. | Object detection or location systems having any of the following: 1. A transmitting frequency below 5 kHz; 6. Designed to withstand …; |

6A001.a.2.a.2. | Hydrophones … Incorporating … |

6A001.a.2.a.3. | Hydrophones … Having any … |

6A001.a.2.a.6. | Hydrophones … Designed for … |

6A001.a.2.b. | Towed acoustic hydrophone arrays … |

6A001.a.2.c. | Processing equipment, specially designed for real time application with towed acoustic hydrophone arrays, having «user accessible programmability» and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes; |

6A001.a.2.e. | Bottom or bay cable systems having any of the following: 1. Incorporating hydrophones …, or 2. Incorporating multiplexed hydrophone group signal modules …; |

6A001.a.2.f. | Processing equipment, specially designed for real time application with bottom or bay cable systems, having «user accessible programmability» and time or frequency domain processing and correlation, including spectral analysis, digital filtering and beamforming using Fast Fourier or other transforms or processes; |

6D003.a. | «Software» for the «real time processing» of acoustic data; |

8A002.o.3. | Noise reduction systems designed for use on vessels of 1000 tonnes displacement or more, as follows: (b) active noise reduction or cancellation systems, or magnetic bearings, specially designed for power transmission systems, and incorporating electronic control systems capable of actively reducing equipment vibration by the generation of anti-noise or anti-vibration signals directly to the source; |

8E002.a. | «Technology» for the «development», «production», repair, overhaul or refurbishing (re-machining) of propellers specially designed for underwater noise reduction. |

Items of the Community strategic control — Cryptography — category 5 Part 2

5A002.a.2. | equipment designed or modified to perform cryptanalytic functions. |

5D002.c.1 | only «software» having the characteristics, or performing or simulating the functions, of equipment specified in 5A002.a.2. |

5E002 | only «technology» for the «development», «production» or «use» of the goods specified in 5A002.a.2. or 5D002.c.1. above. |

Items of the MTCR technology

7A117 | «Guidance sets», usable in «missiles», capable of achieving system accuracy of 3,33 % or less of the range (e.g., a «CEP» of 10 km or less at a range of 300 km), except «guidance sets» designed for missiles with a range under 300 km or manned aircraft. |

7B001 | Test, calibration or alignment equipment specially designed for equipment specified in 7A117 above. Note: 7B001 does not control test, calibration or alignment equipment for Maintenance Level I or Maintenance Level II. |

7B003 | Equipment specially designed for the «production» of equipment specified in 7A117 above. |

7B103 | «Production facilities» specially designed for equipment specified in 7A117 above. |

7D101 | «Software» specially designed for the «use» of equipment specified in 7B003 or 7B103 above. |

7E001 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» of equipment or «software» specified in 7A117, 7B003, 7B103 or 7D101 above. |

7E002 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «production» of equipment specified in 7A117, 7B003 and 7B103 above. |

7E101 | «Technology» to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment specified in 7A117, 7B003, 7B103 and 7D101 above. |

9A004 | Space launch vehicles capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km. N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A104. Note 1: 9A004 does not control payloads. |

9A005 | Liquid rocket propulsion systems containing any of the systems or components specified in 9A006 usable for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 above or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 below. N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A105 and 9A119. |

9A007.a. | Solid rocket propulsion systems, usable for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 above or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 below, with any of the following: N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A119. a. Total impulse capacity exceeding 1,1 MNs; |

9A008.d. | Components, as follows, specially designed for solid rocket propulsion systems: N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A108.c. d. Movable nozzle or secondary fluid injection thrust vector control systems, usable for space launch vehicles specified in 9A004 above or sounding rockets specified in 9A104 below, capable of any of the following: 1. Omni-axial movement exceeding ± 5°; 2. Angular vector rotations of 20°/s or more; or 3. Angular vector accelerations of 40°/s2 or more. |

9A104 | Sounding rockets, capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km. N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A004. |

9A105.a. | Liquid propellant rocket engines, as follows: N.B.: SEE ALSO 9A119. a. Liquid propellant rocket engines usable in «missiles», other than those specified in 9A005, having a total impulse capacity equal to or greater than 1.1 MNs; except liquid propellant apogee engines designed or modified for satellite applications and having all of the following: 1.nozzle throat diameter of 20 mm or less; and 2.combustion chamber pressure of 15 bar or less. |

9A106.c. | Systems or components, other than those specified in 9A006, usable in «missiles», as follows, specially designed for liquid rocket propulsion systems: c. Thrust vector control sub-systems, except those designed for rocket systems that are not capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km. (COD) Technical Note: (COD) Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A106.c. are: 1.Flexible nozzle; 2.Fluid or secondary gas injection; 3.Movable engine or nozzle; 4.Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or 5.Thrust tabs. |

9A108.c. | Components, other than those specified in 9A008, usable in «missiles», as follows, specially designed for solid rocket propulsion systems: c. Thrust vector control sub-systems, except those designed for rocket systems that are not capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of at least 300 km. (COD) Technical Note: (COD) Examples of methods of achieving thrust vector control specified in 9A108.c. are: 1.Flexible nozzle; 2.Fluid or secondary gas injection; 3.Movable engine or nozzle; 4.Deflection of exhaust gas stream (jet vanes or probes); or 5.Thrust tabs. |

9A116 | Re-entry vehicles, usable in «missiles», and equipment designed or modified therefor, as follows, except for re-entry vehicles designed for non-weapon payloads: a. Re-entry vehicles; b. Heat shields and components therefor fabricated of ceramic or ablative materials; c. Heat sinks and components therefor fabricated of lightweight, high-heat capacity materials; d. Electronic equipment specially designed for re-entry vehicles. |

9A119 | Individual rocket stages, usable in complete rocket systems or unmanned aerial vehicles, capable of delivering at least a 500 kg payload to a range of 300 km, other than those specified in 9A005 or 9A007.a. above. |

9B115 | Specially designed «production equipment» for the systems, sub-systems and components specified in 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119 above. |

9B116 | Specially designed «production facilities» for the space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, or systems, sub-systems, and components specified in 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119 above. |

9D101 | «Software» specially designed for the «use» of goods specified in 9B116 above. |

9E001 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» of equipment or «software» specified in 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9B115, 9B116 or 9D101 above. |

9E002 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «production» of equipment specified in: 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9B115 or 9B116 above. Note: For «technology» for the repair of controlled structures, laminates or materials, see 1E002.f. |

9E101 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» or «production» of goods specified in 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116 or 9A119 above. |

9E102 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of space launch vehicles specified in 9A004, 9A005, 9A007.a., 9A008.d., 9A104, 9A105.a., 9A106.c., 9A108.c., 9A116, 9A119, 9B115, 9B116 or 9D101 above. |

— Exemptions:

Annex IV V does not control the following items of the MTCR technology:

1. that are transferred on the basis of orders pursuant to a contractual relationship placed by the European Space Agency (ESA) or that are transferred by ESA to accomplish its official tasks;

2. that are transferred on the basis of orders pursuant to a contractual relationship placed by a Member State's national space organisation or that are transferred by it to accomplish its official tasks;

3. that are transferred on the basis of orders pursuant to a contractual relationship placed in connection with a Community space launch development and production programme signed by two or more European governments;

4. that are transferred to a State-controlled space launching site in the territory of a Member State, unless that Member State controls such transfers within the terms of this Regulation.

PART II

( no National General Authorisation for intra-Community trade)

Items of the CWC (Chemical Weapons Convention)

1C351.d.4. | Ricin |

1C351.d.5. | Saxitoxin |

Items of the NSG technology

All Category 0 of Annex I is included in Annex IV V, subject to the following :

- 0C001: this item is not included in Annex IV V.

- 0C002: this item is not included in Annex IV V, with the exception of special fissile materials as follows:

a. separated plutonium;

b.«uranium enriched in the isotopes 233 or 235» to more than 20 %.

- 0D001 (software) is included in Annex IV V except insofar as it relates to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV V .

- 0E001 (technology) is included in Annex IV V except insofar as these related to 0C001 or to those items of 0C002 that are excluded from Annex IV V .

N.B. : For 0C003 and 0C004 , only if for use in a «nuclear reactor» (within 0A001.a.).

1B226 | Electromagnetic isotope separators designed for, or equipped with, single or multiple ion sources capable of providing a total ion beam current of 50 mA or greater. Note: 1B226 includes separators: a.Capable of enriching stable isotopes; b.With the ion sources and collectors both in the magnetic field and those configurations in which they are external to the field. |

1C012 | Materials as follows: (COD) Technical Note: (COD) These materials are typically used for nuclear heat sources. b.«Previously separated» neptunium-237 in any form. Note: 1C012.b. does not control shipments with a neptunium-237 content of 1 g or less. |

1B231 | Tritium facilities or plants, and equipment therefor, as follows: a. Facilities or plants for the production, recovery, extraction, concentration, or handling of tritium; b. Equipment for tritium facilities or plants, as follows: 1. Hydrogen or helium refrigeration units capable of cooling to 23 K (– 250 °C) or less, with heat removal capacity greater than 150 W; 2. Hydrogen isotope storage or purification systems using metal hydrides as the storage or purification medium. |

1B233 | Lithium isotope separation facilities or plants, and equipment therefor, as follows: a. Facilities or plants for the separation of lithium isotopes; b. Equipment for the separation of lithium isotopes, as follows: 1. Packed liquid-liquid exchange columns specially designed for lithium amalgams; 2. Mercury or lithium amalgam pumps; 3. Lithium amalgam electrolysis cells; 4. Evaporators for concentrated lithium hydroxide solution. |

1C233 | Lithium enriched in the lithium-6 (6Li) isotope to greater than its natural isotopic abundance, and products or devices containing enriched lithium, as follows: elemental lithium, alloys, compounds, mixtures containing lithium, manufactures thereof, waste or scrap of any of the foregoing. Note: 1C233 does not control thermoluminescent dosimeters. (COD) Technical Note: (COD) The natural isotopic abundance of lithium-6 is approximately 6,5 weight per cent (7,5 atom per cent). |

1C235 | Tritium, tritium compounds, mixtures containing tritium in which the ratio of tritium to hydrogen atoms exceeds 1 part in 1000, and products or devices containing any of the foregoing. Note: 1C235 does not control a product or device containing less than 1,48 × 103 GBq (40 Ci) of tritium. |

1E001 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «development» or «production» of equipment or materials specified in 1C012.b. |

1E201 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of goods specified in 1B226, 1B231, 1B233, 1C233 or 1C235. |

3A228 | Switching devices, as follows: a. Cold cathode tubes, whether gas filled or not, operating similarly to a spark gap, having all of the following characteristics: 1. Containing three or more electrodes; 2. Anode peak voltage rating of 2,5 kV or more; 3. Anode peak current rating of 100 A or more; and 4. Anode delay time of 10 μs or less; Note: 3A228 includes gas krytron tubes and vacuum sprytron tubes. b. Triggered spark gaps having both of the following characteristics: 1. An anode delay time of 15 μs or less; and 2. Rated for a peak current of 500 A or more; |

3A231 | Neutron generator systems, including tubes, having both of the following characteristics: a. Designed for operation without an external vacuum system; and b. Utilizing electrostatic acceleration to induce a tritium deuterium nuclear reaction. |

3E201 | «Technology» according to the General Technology Note for the «use» of equipment specified in 3A228.a., 3A228.b. or 3A231. |

6A203 | Cameras and components, other than those specified in 6A003, as follows: a. Mechanical rotating mirror cameras, as follows, and specially designed components therefor: 1. Framing cameras with recording rates greater than 225000 frames per second; 2. Streak cameras with writing speeds greater than 0,5 mm per microsecond; Note: In 6A203.a. components of such cameras include their synchronizing electronics units and rotor assemblies consisting of turbines, mirrors and bearings. |

6A225 | Velocity interferometers for measuring velocities exceeding 1 km/s during time intervals of less than 10 microseconds. Note: 6A225 includes velocity interferometers such as VISARs (Velocity interferometer systems for any reflector) and DLIs (Doppler laser interferometers). |

6A226 | Pressure sensors, as follows: a. Manganin gauges for pressures greater than 10 GPa; b. Quartz pressure transducers for pressures greater than 10 GPa. |

ò new

Part II

Pre-notification form to be filled by the supplier intending to transfer tangible dual use items to another Member State in the EU. It must be addressed to the national competent authorities (defined in Article 6.5) of the country where the item is located.

A- Supplier's dDetails:

Name

Address

B-Contact point for export control and IAEA commitments (where appropriate):

Name

Tel

Fax

Email

GSM (if available)

C- Description of the items

- Entry Number according to EC Regulation

- Characteristics (technical) including where relevant volume, capacity

-quantities

- potential end uses of the item

D- Description of the intended end use for the items by the end user

E-Name of the recipient country

F- End user details

Name

Address

Tel

Fax

Email

G-Location of the item used by the end user (if different from end user address)

H-Date of shipment:

Reminder: the supplier has to put in the invoice to the customer that:

a) the item, if exported, requires an export authorisation under Regulation (EC)N°….

b) the item, cannot be re-transferred to a different end user in a different Member State without a prior notification 8 days before the shipment takes place.

I- Name of the declarant (if different from the supplier)

Date of notification

Signature

ñ

ANNEX VI

Repealed Regulation with its successive amendments

Council Regulation (EC) No 1334/2000 | (OJ L 159, 30.6.2000, p. 1) |

Council Regulation (EC) No 2889/2000 | (OJ L 336, 30.12.2000, p.14) |

Council Regulation (EC) No 458/2001 Council Regulation (EC) No 2432/2001 | (OJ L 65 7.3.2001, p. 19) (OJ L 338 20.12.2001, p. 1) |

Council Regulation (EC) No 880/2002 Council Regulation (EC) No 149/2003 Council Regulation (EC) No 1504/2004 Council Regulation (EC) No 394/2006 | (OJ L 139 29.5.2002, p. 7) (OJ L 30, 5.2.2003 p. 1) (OJ L 281, 31.8.2004, p. 1) (OJ L 74, 13.3.2006, p. 1) |

_____________

ANNEX VII

Correlation Table

Regulation (EC) No 1334/2000 | This Regulation |

Article 1 | Article 1 |

Article 2, introductory wording | Article 2, introductory wording |

Article 2(a) | Article 2(a) |

Article 2(b), introductory wording | Article 2(b), introductory wording |

Article 2(b)(i) | Article 2(b)(i) |

Article 2(b)(ii) | Article 2(b)(ii) |

Article 2(b)(iii) | Article 2(b)(iii) |

- | Article 2(b)(iv) |

Article 2(c)(i) | Article 2(c)(i) |

Article 2(c)(ii) | Article 2(c)(ii) |

Article 2(d) | Article 2(d) |

- | Article 2(e) to (l) |

Article 3.1 Article 3.2 Article 3.3 - Article 3.4 - Article 4.1 Article 4.2 Article 4.3 Article 4.4 Article 4.5 Article 4.6 Article 4.7 - Article 4.8 Article 5 Article 6.1 Article 6.2 Article 6.3 - Article 6.4 Article 6.5 Article 6.6, first sub-paragraph - Article 6.6, second sub-paragraph Article 7 Article 8 - Article 9.1 Article 9.2 Article 9.3 - Article 10.1 Article 10.2 Article 10.3 - Article 11 Article 12 Article 13 Article 14 Article 15.1 Article 15.2 - Article 15.3 - Article 16.1 - Article 16.2 Article 17 Article 18.1, introductory wording Article 18.1 (a) Article 18.1 (b) - Article 18.2 - Article 19 - Article 20 Article 21.1 Article 21.2(a) Article 21.2(b) - | Article 3.1 Article 3.2 Article 3.5 Article 3.3 - Article 3.4 Article 4.1 Article 4.2 Article 4.3 Article 4.4 Article 4.5 Article 4.6 Article 4.7 Article 4.8 Article 4.9 Article 5 Article 6.1, introductory wording Article 6.2 Article 6.3(a) Article 6.3(b) Article 6.3(c) Article 6.4 Article 6.5, introductory wording and (a) Article 6.5 (b) to (d) Article 6.5, final wording Article 7 Article 8.1 Article 8.2 Article 9.1 Article 9.2 Article 9.3 Article 9.4 Article 10.1 Article 10.2 Article 10.3 Article 10.4 Article 11 Article 12 Article 13 Article 14 Article 15.1 Article 15.2, introductory wording Article 15.2(a) to (b) Article 15.3 Article 15.4, Article 15.5 and Article 16.1 Article 16.2 (i) Article 16.2(ii) to (iii) Article 16.3 Article 17 Article 18.1, introductory wording Article 18.1 (a) - Article 18.1 (b) to (d) and final wording Article 18.2 Articles 19 to 20 Article 21 Articles 22 to 23 Article 24 - - - Articles 25.1 to 25.2 and Article 25.3, first and second sub-paragraph |

Article 21.2(c) Article 21.2(d) Article 21.3 Article 21.4 Article 21.5 Article 21.6 Article 21.7 Article 22 Article 23 - Article 24 | Article 25.3, third sub-paragraph - Article 25.4 Article 25.5 - Article 25.6 Article 25.7 Article 26 Article 27, first and second sub-paragraph Article 27, third sub-paragraph Article 28 |

Annex I | Annex I |

Annex II Part 1 Annex II Part 2 Annex II Part 3 Annex II note Annex II, “Conditions and requirements for use of this authorisation” | Annex II Part 1 Annex II Part 2 Annex II Part 3 - Article 6.1(a) to (b) |

Annex III a Annex III b | Annex III Annex IV |

Annex IV Part I | Annex V Part I: “Items of stealth technology,” “Items of the Community strategic control,” “Items of the Community strategic control — Cryptography — category 5 Part 2” and “Items of the MTCR technology” |

Annex IV Part II | Annex V, Part I: “Items of the CWC (Chemical Weapons Convention)” and “Items of the NSG technology” |

- - | Annex V Part II Annexes VI to VII |

_____________

[1] Such authorisations are provided by 8 Member States. Among those Member States, some have issued more than 10 of those trade facilitation instruments covering various types of items or transactions (repair/exhibition/chemical items, non sensitive Wassenaar items) and various destinations.

[2] OJ L 159, 30.6.2000, p. 1. Regulation as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 394/2006 (OJ L 74, 13.3.2006, p. 1).

[3] OJ L 367, 31.12.1994, p. 1. Regulation as amended by Regulation (EC) No 837/95 (OJ L 90, 21.4.1995, p. 1).

[4] OJ L 367, 31.12.1994, p. 8. Decision as last amended by Decision 2000/243 CFSP (OJ L 82, 1.4.2000, p. 1).

[5] OJ L 324, 27.12.1969,p25. Regulation as last amended by Regulation (EEC) N° 3918/91 (OJ L 372, 31.12.1991,p.31).

[6] OJ L 302, 19.10.1992, p. 1. Regulation as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 955/1999 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 119, 7.5.1999, p. 1).

[7] OJ L 253, 11.10.1993, p. 1. Regulation as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 1662/1999 (OJ L 197, 29.7.1999, p. 25).

[8] OJ C 219, 30.7.1999, p. 34.

[9] OJ L82, 22.3.1997, p.1.

[10] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[11] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[12] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[13] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[14] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[15] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[16] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[17] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[18] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[19] Manufacturers calculating positioning accuracy in accordance with ISO 230/2 (1997) should consult the competent authorities of the Member State in which they are established.

[20] The numbers in parenthesis refer to the Notes following this Table.

[21] See Regulation (EC) N°1172/95 (OJ L 118,25.5.1995,p10), as subsequently amended

[22] If needed, this description may be given in one or more attachments to this form (1bis). In this case, indicate the exact number of attachments in this box). The description should be as precise as possible and integrate, where relevant, the CAS or other references for chemical items in particular.

[23] The differences in the wordings/scopes between Annex I and Annex IVVare indicated with bold italic text.